Home

IGP®/PGL® Emulation for T2N™ Printronix Graphics Language

1. 289 MSIE itte hielten eae Lc tente 295 PIDE mre dM ML Ce 301 311 PleSSOy ce idest heiter erat Rottend e ce tabe egt io Leod eon 317 POSTNET Asset vp eR UAM AS 323 PostBar and Royal Mail 329 OR Barcode retten owe etes 333 TERIEN eoi eb tu a eite teta 338 UPGZA Eee Las 345 UPC E and 351 UPGSFHIP idonee Ihi ndi ee 359 Table of Contents Incremental Bar Code 2 0 1 370 Incrementing Bar Code 370 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields 373 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields 375 Duplicating Incremental Bar Code 376 Form Examples And Exercises 377 orm Examiples u cie te Ee et ipe c ti er neta 377 CREATE Mode Allowed no SFCC required 377 NORMAL Mode Not Allowed SFCC required 377 EXECUTE Mode Not Allowed SFCC required 377 Example Create 379 Example Using The Setup 381
2. 419 OCR Character Sets eee Recte eere uds 419 Extended Character Sets 420 Data Bit 420 Power Up Character Set Selection 420 User Defined Set Command 421 Character Set Selection Command ISET 423 Downloading A Block Character 426 Downloading A User Defined Overlay 426 Activating A User Defined Overlay 427 Disabling An Overlay 428 Examples for Downloaded Block Characters amp Overlays 428 Setting The Expanded Font Menu 429 Downloaded Font Menus 430 Multinational Character Set 431 International Character Sets 2 435 ERO GOES Sou MI eto HL EAE 439 IGP PGL Emulation Error 0 439 Horizontal Line 440 Vertical Line Errors st cic Ite RET de hee 441 BOX EITO S 205 oi estate en es 442 ComenErrorss e Ed ee hee ern RR es eon 443 Alpha Errors xe ode i eroe ende pee bep eene 444 445 Create Errors innra ERE
3. AG ak oO monuLu FINNISH Set 01234567 NORWEGIAN Set 01234567 QULUPIS ZX N 0 0t 2 vOnouuocvcocc eovz tE amp Erzo oOmmuUL 2 mE x N XOw lt 20 AO ek SCANMTHORDACMOAWL Tr unp3sa gt BX AN Baw DO r ONY ECO OYNFD gt SBS amp KON amp Qed moonouuLmooruoziarzo V il AO c ANMANMHNORDMDACKCMOOAWL 432 Multinational Character Set Charts DUTCH Set ENGLISH Set 012346567 Ko ite N 99 r2 e suo O nm 0 sri gt gt 20 ON OQ Vil AG vanak or oos cmoaouLru gt gt Eco gt 5 lt gt 2 ON OA V I Ac Oe oMoo monomuirLrx SPANISH Set 01234567 FRENCH Set 01234507 QU u422 5 5XxX gt G monouu or 5 N 0 sr UO D 00 aoc np sa gt BX 9onoocouvcoc 25 xEX MmIMOOAWLOL OCANMTNORD mr Sh de Je v O n WN 0 st i0 0 M0 gt N io ic tO wN DX ECO NtliZio HOY 2 Owes V iI AG AK toe bors gt N03 Or DX gt NI OFM gt Akt el c 433 Ac
4. logoname VL HL DOT DISK dot dot1 dot2 dot END Format CREATE LOGODEF ogoname VL HL T dot dot1 dot2 dot END cc The Special Function Control Code LOGO The Logo command enter LOGO LOGODEF The CREATE mode Logo command enter LOGODEF 99 Chapter 2 Command Codes logoname Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the logo Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable Logo Name characters All future references to this logo Delete Logo or Logo Call commands must use this name If a logo is defined with the same name as a logo already existing in memory the newly defined logo will replace the existing logo VL Defines the vertical length of the logo grid in dot rows enter a value sufficient for the vertical size of the logo not exceeding 252 The dot rows are vertically spaced 1 72 inch apart HL Defines the horizontal length of the logo grid in dot columns enter a value sufficient for the horizontal size of the logo not exceeding 240 On each row the dots are horizontally spaced 1 60 inch apart DOT Optional parameter Enter DOTS If used the logo description and dimensions VL HL are given in printer dots which are based on the printer DPI Otherwise the DOT default is 60x72 Also when the DOT parameter is used there is no limit on the size of the logo as there is when using IGP dots T A line terminator i e LF FF must separate the L
5. 465 Grid Programs And Samples The Standard Grid The standard grid is used for form design The program for the standard grid is listed below and a sample of the standard grid follows on the next page Photocopy the grid provided or enter the grid program and make your own printout CREATE GRID HDUP 75 1 VERT 1 1 1 61 STOP HDUP OFF HDUP 7 10 VERT 1 5 1 61 5 2 10 1 61 5 STOP HDUP OFF VERT 2 75 1 61 5 STOP VDUP 61 1 HORZ 1 l1 1 75 STOP VDUP OFF VDUP 6 10 HORZ 1 5 1 76 2 10 1 76 VDUP OFF VERT 1 1 61 23 STOP HORZ 2 1 1 75 STOP VDUP 12 5 ALPHA 1 5 5 76 0 0 05 5 STOP VDUP OFF HDUP 14 5 ALPHA C15 1 61 9 5 0 0 05 5 STOP OFF END 1 467 The Logo Grid The program for logo grid is listed below and the sample grid follows It is not the full size logo grid the grid can measure up to 240 columns wide by 252 rows high for a logo 4 x 3 5 inches Photocopy the grid or enter the grid program to obtain a printout CREATE LOGOGRID HDUP 75 1 VERT 1 4 4 56 STOP HDUP OFF HDUP 5 15 ALPHA C17 1 3 8 2 0 0 15 05 C17 1 3 13 2 0 0 15 10 1 3 18 2 0 0 15 15 STOP VERT 2 18 3 5 56 1 8 3 9 56 1 13 3 9 56 STOP OFF VDUP 105 0 6 HORZ 1 4 4 78 STOP VDUP OFF VDUP 7 7 6 ALPHA C17 1 5 11 79 0 0 015 C17 1 8 6 79 0 0 015 10 C13 1 11 5 78 2 0 0 015 15
6. SGTIN 64 ICNT1500 NORMAL Example 5 This example shows how to program 96 bit RFID tag A SGTIN 96 format is used and the EPC number is broken into its component parts Assume that the SGTIN 96 value has the Header 48 Filter Value 5d ERC Manager Index 123456d Object Class 7777774 or OXBDES1 and the Serial Number 1234564 NOTE 96 bit tags must be broken up as Examples 2 3 and 4 and field can be more than 64 bits in length if the format is binary or decimal There is no restriction on the bit length if the format is hexadecimal CREATE SGTIN 96 432 RFWTAG 96 8 B 00110000 Header 3 D 5 Filter Value 3 D 6 Partition 20 D 123456 EPC Manager Index 24 0 777777 Object Class 38 D 123456 Serial Number STOP END EXECUTE SGTIN 96 1 NORMAL 135 Chapter 2 Command Codes Example 6 This example shows memory bank usage where multiple RFWTAG and RFRTAG can be used CREATE SGTIN 216 SCALE DOT 203 203 RFWTAG 96 EPC 96 IDF1 H STOP RFRTAG 96 EPC 96 DF3 H STOP RFWTAG 256 USR 256 IDF2 H STOP RFRTAG 256 USR 256 DF4 H STOP ALPHA IAF1 24 POINT 90 60 16 6 IAF2 64 POINT 130 60 16 4 STOP BARCODE C3 9 X1 IBF1 64 170 60 PDF STOP VERIFY DF1 H EPC W r n VERIFY DF3 H EPC R r n VERIFY DF2 H USR W r n VERIFY DF4 H USR R r n END SGTIN ICNT4 IDF1 STEP 1 3132333435363738394142
7. 67 89 AB 5 01234 Hoe cooood G 22 3 29 8 OUO OQ 0 0 er ve tr QOiZOoodwo o x ODDO D gt lt lt OLI NU Gu 09 os LF ARNAN 0 Ho 9 2 m N N 9 de 020 DOr MYR SK KFN YS m COWLOITIANDYIEZO eV IAG EN lt 1 oM oo mooouL gt gt 0000v 0rf ov Eto _ gt gt lt 0 2 g MOCMNOOWLOTHONOYIEZO 9 5 N E o SCANMTNORADAADACMAOOAWL a 5 2 5 2 0200200704 ECO Ss i gt gt 2 G mwdooouuori n nvzzo N vakt eN m o 431 Accessing Characters and Character Sets 5 Chapter DANISH Set SWEDISH Set N Ko 0 M N 01234567 VO UTD YW G monu Sth amp de gt BX gt AN BOD oormnmvreeEeco gt 15 gt lt gt N amp ALC LODHOYISEZO se VAG 4 wank gt ECO gt NOx
8. 2 NOTE Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for future control character pairs 197 Chapter 3 SC 15 TIERE 198 Bar Codes Code 39 Example Figure 12 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 39 bar code generated by the following program CREATE C39 BARCODE C3 9 DARK 40 15 SAMPLE C3 9 PDF STOP BARCODE C3 9 VSCAN H14 DARK 27 58 SAMPLE C3 9 PDF STOP END EXECUTE C39 1 NORMAL SAMPLE C3 9 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code Command Dark Code 39 at SR 40 SC 15 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command New Bar Code Command Vert Dark Code 39 H 1 4 at SR 27 SC 58 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 58 SR 27 SR 40 UU N Figure 12 Sample Code 39 Bar Codes Code 93 Code 93 The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 13 and described on the following pages r 71 I QUIETI I QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE z rs OPTIONAL cow e 1 OPTIONAL READABLE i DATA i FIELD 1 UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER 1 GUARD gt jt GUARD GUARD 1 BAND 1 QUIET ZONE ke HEIGHT HEIGHT gt OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT m SR SC POSITION
9. 292 Maxicode STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Maxicode Control Characters The non printable control characters can be generated by using the switch characters defined in Table 42 NOTE pp Shift Out Character Table 42 Maxicode Control Characters Control Character Alternate Character NUL lt pp gt SP SOH lt pp gt STX lt pp gt ETX lt pp gt EOT lt pp gt ENQ lt pp gt ACK lt pp gt amp BEL lt pp gt BS lt pp gt HT lt pp gt LF lt pp gt VT lt pp gt FF lt pp gt CR lt pp gt SO lt pp gt SI pp DLE pp DC1 pp a DC2 pp b DC3 pp c DC4 lt pp gt d NAK lt pp gt e SYN lt pp gt f ETB lt pp gt g CAN lt pp gt h EM lt pp gt i SUM pp j ESC lt pp gt k FS lt gt GS pp m RS lt gt US pp o 293 Chapter 3 294 Bar Codes Maxicode Examples Figure 36 illustrates a Maxicode bar code generated by the following program NOTE in the bar code represents the Shift Out Character CREATE MAXI Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command MAXICODE 32 37 Dark Bar Code MAXICODE at SR 32 SC 27 999840068107317 This is a secondary message Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode MAXI 1 Execute the form form count of 1
10. e e B Binary The maximum character size for the different barcode models is listed in the table below This limit is based on Automatic mode In Manual mode the maximum character size may be less Type QR code Model 1 QR Code Model 2 MicroQR Numeric Max 1167 characters Max 7089 characters Max 35 characters Alphanumeric Max 707 characters Max 4296 characters Max 21 characters Binary 8 bit bytes Max 486 characters Max 2953 characters Max 15 characters 337 Chapter 3 Codes Telepen The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 52 and described on the following pages r 71 r 71 QUIETI QUIETI SR POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 1 I 1 OPTIONAL I CCW DISIT CW I OPTIONAL READABLE FIELD OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER l i UPPER GUARD GUARD GUARD I GUARD BAND I BAND BAND 7 i BAND QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT gt I OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC rmm POSITION M meh i mimm im m md mud ma Gd Rem mm ud UPPER GUARD BAND 1 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET LOWER GUARD BAND j OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD
11. nennen nennen 63 Delete nemen nnn nennen nnne 64 Delete eere eere tem xe eee 65 Delete eranen ede ee emp c 65 Delete MactO ue e ERREUR Iren 66 E 66 Duplication 2 67 Duplication Vertical 69 nS 70 Emulation 2 0 71 zh ED 71 iie eel paier the d E eie 71 Execute Form Mode insin oraaa nnns 72 Execute Form General 73 Execute Form Electronic Vertical Format Unit 76 Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data 77 Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code 78 Execute Form Dynamic 00 79 Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data 80 Execute Form Overlay Data 82 Expanded Primtes niece ie Red neret 83 ge ELE 84 FONT LOA ia aut daret enne 87 eni Egone nen aui 88 Hex Character 89 Ignore 89 Line Spacing 2 edet nre ree at eL PL ce 90 Table of Contents Lines Diagonal i
12. DARK SH SC D data field Maxicode d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes This parameter is ignored Optional parameter that allows for postponing the definition of the mode until form execution When used the first character of the dynamic barcode data is used as the mode The character is extracted and not used as barcode data This mode should be used with BFn Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will
13. 473 E Vertical Paper 477 Toa rp 477 Paper Motion Using Line Feeds and Form 477 Paper Motion using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing 478 Paper Motion using the 480 General EVFU Programming 480 EVFU Programming Sequence ssssseeeee 480 Using ithe EVE UJ cen tee teet tie AR 482 Clearing the EVFU 484 EU 485 E 489 Standard 489 Thermal nro 489 Line tite Pe tet ot Ced 489 G PGESDBOS uite t RE M Diu 491 TWOBYTE Command Syntax Thermal 492 TWOBYTE Command Syntax Line 495 EXECUTE Mode Command Syntax 497 Table of Contents Contact Information 22 499 Printronix Customer Support Center 499 Printronix Supplies Department sss 499 Corporate Offices nennen nre nnne 500 1 Introduction About this Manual This manual explains how to use the IGP PGL Intelligent Graphics Printing Printronix Graphics Lang
14. SO A Table 30 Special Character Encoding ECC 200 Only Special Characters Method Example FNC1 SO 1 If FNC1 is 2nd 01 1 Data codeword previous data must be A Z a z or 01 99 Structured Append SO 2 3 digit number 2042 File ID representing symbol sequence and file identifier Reader Programming SO 3 43 lt Data gt Must be first in the data field MH10 8 3 Abbreviated lt SO gt 5 A5 lt Data gt Format 05 Header Must be first in the data field MH10 8 3 Abbreviated lt SO gt 6 A6 lt Data gt Format 06 Header Must be first in the data field Extended Channel SO 7 6 digit EC 7112233 Data Interpretation 000000 999999 265 Chapter 3 266 Bar Codes Symbol Characteristics The following tables illustrate the maximum data capacities for the Data Matrix barcode as a function of symbol size column x row and data type Note that all ECC 000 through ECC 140 symbols are square and always have an odd number of rows and columns ECC 200 symbols have square or rectangular sizes and have an even number of rows and columns Table 31 ECC 000 Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 9X9 11 X 11 18 X 13 15 X 15 17 X 17 19 X 19 21X21 23 X 23 25 X25 27 X27 29 X 29 31 X 31 33 X 33 35 X 35 37 X37 39 X 39 41 X41 43 X 43 45 X 45 47 X 47 49 X 49 3 char
15. 365 Volume Cubic Feet 4 366 Volume Cubic Yards 4 367 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 368 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 369 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 390 Amount payable single monetary area n4 n 15 391 n Amount payable with ISO currency code n4 n3 n 15 392 n Amount payable for a Variable Measure Trade Item single 4 15 monetary unit 393 n Amount payable for a Variable Measure Trade Item with n4 n3 n 15 ISO currency code 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number n3 an 30 401 Consignment Number n3 an 30 402 Shipment Identification Number N3 n17 403 Routing code N3 an 30 410 Ship To Deliver To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 411 Bill To Invoice To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 412 Purchase From Location Code of Party From Whom Goods n3 n13 Are Purchased 413 Ship For UCC EAN Location Code n3 n13 414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3 n13 415 EAN UCC Global Location Number of the invoicing party n3 n13 420 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code Within a Single Postal n3 an 20 Authority 241 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 26 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued keiner Al Content Format 421 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code With 3 Digit ISO Country n3 n3 an 9 Code Prefix 422 Country of or
16. 6 r i OPTIONAL 1 CCW CW 1 1 1 OPTIONAL i i READABLE 1 1 DATA i FIELD OPTIONAL 1 CHECK l DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD Jt GUARD GUARD GUARD BAND S BAND QUIET ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT gt OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION gt 1 UPPER GUARD BAND Xm QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal ZONE CODE CODE zoNE HEIGHT J LOWER GUARD BAND 4 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD 1979 TUM LOWER GUARD BAND l HEIGHT INV QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE 1 L UPPER GUARD BAND J cl OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 14 Code 128 Structure 206 Code 128 128B and 128C Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start
17. gt gt gt gt gt U gt gt gt gt U gt gt gt 229 Chapter 3 Codes EAN 13 Example Figure 20 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 13 bar code generated by the following program EAN13 Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code Command EAN13 5 DARK 28 15 Dark Code EAN 13 5 digit add on at SR 28 SC 15 12345678987655555 Data Field 5 digit add on Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command EAN13 5 VSCAN H12 DARK 27 39 Vertical Dark EAN 13 2 digit add on H 1 2 at SR 27 SC 39 12345678987655555 Data Field 5 digit add on Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode 13 1 Execute the form form count of 1 NORMAL SC 39 n po P Uy U m SC 15 U Eee 400 SR27 SR 28 a ELM VY 1 m MMM N 1 234567898766 Figure 20 Sample 13 Bar Codes 230 FIM FIM The FIM Facing Identification Mark bar code structure is shown in Figure 21 and Figure 22 and described on the following pages The left boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece The right most bar must be 2 inches 1 8 inch from th
18. 1 Executes the form form count of 1 NORMAL FIM ACME MOTOR INC ATIN CUSTOMER SERVICE P O BOX 2000 USCITY CA 12345 6789 SC 15 33 3 gt Figure 24 Sample FIMC Bar Code 237 Bar Codes Chapter 3 GS1 128 NOTE GS1 128 is formerly known as UCC EAN 128 QUIETI QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION 1 ZONE gt 6 r OPTIONAL CCW ee CW 1 OPTIONAL i i READABLE i DATA i FIELD OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD Jt GUARD GUARD GUARD BAND QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE 1 E e HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION gt 1 Normal DATA FIELD HEIGHT LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD p 777 LOWER GUARD BAND I CCS Tem HEIGHT NV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE ZONE 1 I EE 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND ees ee J n OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 25 GS1 128 Structure 238 GS1 128 UCC EAN 128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128 However in UCC EAN 128 the Function 1 charac
19. 161 Chapter 3 Overview Table 12 IGP PGL Bar Code Specification Summary for 12 Mil Tip Impact Printers Average Narrow 224 Magnification Character Description Element Width Ratio Parameter Density cpi mils Planet Per U S Postal Service Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation USPS Certified POSTNET Table 13 PGL Bar Code Specification Summary for 16 Mil Tip Impact Printers iui Magnification Average Narrow Character Description Ratio Parameter Element Width Density cpi Codabar X1 16 7 5 4 4 3 2 1 Code 39 xi 16 7 3 75 3 1 1 16 7 4 6 2 1 X1B 16 7 4 2 2 5 1 x2 37 5 1 9 2 3 1 54 2 1 3 2 5 1 X4 70 8 14 2 41 Code 128A x1 16 7 5 4 4 3 2 1 Code 128B X1 5 25 0 4 1 4 3 2 1 Code 93 x2 33 0 2 7 4 3 2 1 UPS 11 50 0 1 8 4 3 2 1 X4 66 7 14 4 3 2 1 Code 128C x1 16 7 10 9 4 3 2 1 UCC EAN 128 X1 5 25 0 8 2 4 3 2 1 x2 33 0 5 4 4 3 2 1 x3 50 0 3 6 4 3 2 1 X4 66 7 2 7 4 3 2 1 EAN 8 and 13 default 16 7 1 28 MAG 4 3 2 1 Interleaved 2 5 X1 16 7 6 7 3 1 German 2 5 X1A 20 8 5 7 2 6 1 ITF 14 X1B 16 7 8 5 2 1 Matrix x2 37 5 3 5 2 3 1 X2A 33 2 4 3 2 1 54 2 2 3 2 5 1 X4 70 8 1 8 2 41 MSI A x1 16 7 6 1 3 1 MSI B x2 25 1 4 1 2 5 1 MSI C 33 4 3 0 2 3 1 MSI D X4 41 7 24 2 3 1 Plessey UPC A and E default 16 7 1 28 MAG 4 3 2 1 PostBar X1 n a n a n a Royal Mail X1A Australian Post Planet Per U S Post
20. 28 Printable Charaeler eene i a eE aai 28 SPACES aunt ee eb i ERR 29 Command 42 2 00 0 29 Form 29 29 2 cite t reped eed etti tete e dead ere ve a did 30 Comments in Command 30 Storing Data ne ei aed tee La Dee 30 Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression 30 Character Position Dot Position CP DP Format 31 Table of Contents Command Codes eret sese tae ade hike re Pu HY 32 Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data 32 Alphanumerics 33 Alphanumerics Incremental Fields 4402222 38 Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields 41 Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields 44 BOX68 un e Ue oe rue a 47 D 50 n 51 Compressed Print 52 Clock Element Format sereia 52 Configuration iecit esf dave te Ee Per ee ees 54 COITIGTS 58 CREATE 61 Dark Printing iint tete 63 Define Month Names
21. Al of two to four numbers followed by data of appropriate length variable or fixed and type numeric or alphanumeric See Table 26 for a list of application identifiers and their associated data fields The FNC1 character is required as the first character after the start code for UCC EAN 128 bar codes and IGP will always generate it automatically It will appear in the bar code but not the human readable field Do not supply FNC1 in the data field The start code and subset switching is done automatically by IGP based on the data field contents so that the bar code length is minimized Subset C encodes each pair of numbers as a single bar code character providing a higher character density If the first four data digits are numbers the bar code starts in subset C otherwise it starts in subset B The subset will switch from B to C at any point in the data field if the next four characters are numbers and will switch from C to B if the next two characters are not numbers or only one character remains The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 26 except the system SFCC and the character used as a delimiter Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If this parameter is not used the human readable data will not print Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the huma
22. HEIGHT HEIGHT 1 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION PEE 1 Normal LOWER GUARD BAND START DATA FIELD stop quiet CODE ZONE 1 _ l OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 INV 1 ZONE Loe t UPPER GUARD BAND _ OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE 2 1 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND Figure 60 UPS 11 Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER 4 GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 365 Chapter 3 366 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the IGP Data Field UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 page 206 This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It
23. LOWER GUARD BAND 1 MB HEIGHT INV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE 1 4 3 UPPER GUARD BAND 5 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 52 Telepen Structure 338 Telepen Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each character is represented by a different series of bars and spaces both wide and narrow but is always 16 units in width for a wide to narrow ratio of 3 Each character starts with a bar and ends with a space Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit A mandatory modulo 127 check digit is inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning 339 Chapter 3 Codes Telep
24. pe l QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal LOWER GUARD BAND L J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD 1 LOWER GUARD BAND TUUM STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE CODE ZONE 1 pen QUIET ZONE INV UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 10 Codabar Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER 4 GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 183 Chapter 3 184 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one charact
25. 3 Example 876543 the first three digits plus 00 87600 000 plus the FOURTH and FIFTH digit 00054 4 Example 753774 the first four digits plus O 75370 0000 plus the FIFTH digit 00007 5 6 7 8 9 Examples 213756 517019 the first five digits of the zero suppressed number 21375 51701 0000 plus the SIXTH digit 00006 00009 357 Chapter 3 358 SC SR 34 gt Bar Codes UPC E and UPC E0 Example Figure 57 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC E bar code generated by the following program CREATE UPCE BARCODE UPC E 2 H9 DARK 34 15 0927400000522 PDF STOP BARCODE Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Code UPC E 2 digit add on H 0 9 at SR 34 SC 15 Data Field the 2 digit add on Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command UPC E0 2 VSCAN H10 DARK 34 50 92745422 PDF STOP END UPCE0 1 NORMAL 15 927454 1 UPC E Vertical Dark 2 digit add on H 1 0 at SR 34 SC 50 Data Field plus the 2 digit add on Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Executes the form form count of 1 SC 50 il 92745 SR 34 UPC EO Figure 57 Sample UPC E Bar Codes UPCSHIP UPCSHIP The structure for the UPCSHIP bar code is shown in Figure 58 and described on the following
26. CW NUMBER SYSTEM j gt CHARACTER FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE 1 1 DATA QUIET CHECK DIGIT ZONE 1 CHARACTER HEIGHT gt Figure 56 UPC E and UPC EO Structure 351 Chapter 3 352 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module wide left quiet zone You must provide sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Stop Codes The start stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field for all UPC E and bar codes must be zero Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules For UPC E eleven digits are expected which are compressed down to the six encoded symbol characters For UPC EO six compressed digits are expected The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed at the end of the bar code and typically identifies a periodical issu
27. Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminate Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of SC 55 SR 31 Figure 15 Sample Code 128B Bar Codes SAMPLE CODE 128B Code 128C Example Code 128A 128B and 128C Figure 16 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128C bar code generated by the following program 128 BARCODE C128C DARK 35 15 1234567890 PDF STOP BARCODE C128C VSCAN H12 DARK 27 50 1234567890 PDF STOP END EXECUTE 128C 1 NORMAL SC 15 SR 35 1234567890 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Code 128C at SR 35 SC 15 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 50 SR27 1234567890 Figure 16 Sample Code 128 Bar Codes 17 Chapter 3 Codes EAN 8 The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 17 and described on the following pages SR SC CENTER CODE START CODE STOP CODE POSITION 4 QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA quiet Normal ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE HEIGHT i ep Ex eeu CHECK DIGIT OPTIONAL READABLE dE DATA FIELD DIGIT POSITION fo area QUIET quiet INV ZONE ZONE HEIGHT 1 RIGHT DATA LEFT DATA I FI
28. HE Defines the horizontal expansion factor to enlarge DBCS characters horizontally The factor must ensure that the characters after expansion do not exceed the form boundary limit The largest value is 63 0 and 1 specifies the stand font no expansion Elongated E characters cannot be used with a horizontal expansion factor other than O D The printable character identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric string Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the alphanumeric string itself You must use the same character at both ends of the alphanumeric string but it will not print with the data DBCS SBCS TEXT The group of DBCS SBCS characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the standard DBCS SBCS printable characters except the character used to delimit the string in the D parameter The data appears as pre positioned information on the form beginning at the location specified by SR and SC This is the fixed or static DBCS SBCS data once defined on the form it is changed only by redefining the form using the TWOBYTE command STOP Indicates the end of the TWOBYTE command EXECUTE Mode Command Syntax Common EXECUTE Form General Format Purpose Prints forms created in the CREATE mode Mode NORMAL Format cc EXECUTE formname PAGE FC GIRST DISK EVFU Data AF n D ASCII text D cc KF n D DBC
29. In the Create Form mode both the form s length and width used for boundary checking may be specified by the user However if the form size is not specified the form length defaults to 11 and the width is not checked Boundary checking for form elements is performed only when the form length is specified Execute Form Mode In the Execute Form mode use the following guidelines to determine if a form will print on the current page size Not User Defined If the form s length width is not user defined and the minimum length width is greater than the current page length width minus the margins then the result will be error 74 or 75 471 Appendix D Paper Selection and Maximum Values User defined If the form s length width is user defined greater than the current page length width minus the margins then the result will be error 74 or 75 Not defined If the form s length width is not defined and the minimum length width is ess than or equal to the current page length width minus the margins then the form length width will equal the page length width minus the margins Table 60 Paper Sizes and Maximum Print Area Maximum Dot Value Paper Size Sce Y Page Width Length Letter 8 0 x 11 481 793 Letter 8 5 x 11 511 798 Legal 8 5x14 511 1009 A4 8 268 x 11 693 497 842 B5 6 929 x 9 842 416 709 AIAG Label 4x6 241 433 Odette Label 8x5 481 361 How to calculate Maximum Dot Values 1 Page Leng
30. NORMAL ee fy ES Figure 36 Sample MAXICODE Bar Code Figure 37 illustrates a MAXICODE bar code generated by the following program NOTE in the bar code represents the Shift Out Character CREATE MAXI Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command MAXTCODE 32 54 Dark Bar Code MAXICODE at SR 32 SC 54 gt n01 m96841706672 m840 m001 1212345675 mUPSN m12345E m089 m m1 1 m10 1 mY m m mUT n Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE MAXI 1 Execute the form form count of 1 NORMAL Figure 37 Sample MAXICODE Bar Code MSI MSI The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 38 and described on the following pages F 1 x SR SC QUIETI SR SC QUIETI POSITION POSITION ZONE gt e gt OPTIONAL DIGIT i OPTIONAL i READABLE i DATA FIELD UPPER 1 1 LOWER LOWER GUARD i GUARD GUARD BAND a BAND BAND QUIET ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT gt OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT DATA FIELD Normal LOWER GUARD BAND L ee OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Er UT LOWER GUARD BAND 40426 777 INV QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE ZONE 1 LEI baia 1 UPPER GUARD BAND ao PEEL D M A aT cR J OPTIONAL CHECK DIG
31. PCX Logo DISK Optional parameter to store the logo to Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK Do not use this parameter in CREATE mode To store the logo in the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge enter EMC See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 T A line terminator i e LF FF must separate the LOGO line from the beginning of the PCX raster data PCX raster data Scanned data in PCX format data must be black and white Grey scales or color PCX files are currently not supported Both uncompressed and compressed formats are supported cc The Special Function Control Code RASTEREND Denotes the end of the PCX raster data Enter RASTEREND END Terminates the PCX logo enter END STOP Ends the Create Logo command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory Also note that each rotation used requires a copy of the image therefore the number of rotations used affects the printer memory available The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined logo into a form The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid Once created the logo is ready to be used in any form Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control codes This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer Consult your host s User
32. RSS14 or RSS14LIM or RSS14STK or RSS14TRU or RSS14OMNI or RSS14EXP or UPCACOMP or UPCECOMP or EAN8COMP or EAN13COMP or UCCACOMP or UCCCCOMP DIR MAG SEGn BFn L DARK SR SC D Data Fiela D PDF LOC F FONT VE HE STOP Parameter Description SEGn Optional parameter that designates the maximum number of segments of data to encode in a row for RSS 14 Expanded RSS14EXP This parameter is ignored for all other RSS types Data Field Format of the Data Field primary data 2 D composite data NOTE 2 D composite data is included by putting a I character after the primary data This character must be included when counting data for the L parameter within the dynamic data declaration BFn L The sections below list the specific format requirements for each individual RSS 14 subtype Data Field for RSS 14 Limited The item number for Al of 01 must be less than 1999999999999 or an error flagging invalid data will be printed Data Field for RSS 14 Expanded Format of the Data Field primary data For RSS 14 Expanded multiple sets of UCC EAN 128 AI values and their data can be included in the primary data up to 74 digits or 41 alphabetic characters The data field can also include FNC1 characters encoded the same way as done for PGL Code 128 and UCC EAN 128 barcodes If the data field is using an AI of 00 and or AI of 01 and the mod 10 checkdigit character is not included then the data field
33. See Clock Element Format on page 52 Delete Font Purpose Mode Format Comment Example Deletes the font identified by the font name which resides in flash memory or RAMDISK memory NORMAL cc DELETE FONT fontname DISK cc The Special Function Control DELETE FONT The Delete Font Command enter DELETE FONT fontname Identifies the font to be deleted Enter the name of the font exactly as it was created DISK Optional parameter Enter DISK to delete the font from Onboard Flash Memory Enter EMC to delete the font from the SD card or External Memory Cartridge When DISK is not specified the font is deleted from RAMDISK See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 When loading fonts to RAMDISK the printer files will not be saved to RAMDISK when the printer is powered off When loading fonts to flash memory the printer files will be saved when the printer is powered off Both RAMDISK and flash memory support file operations such as saving reading and deleting files Removing all font files with ALL as fontname is not currently supported The following example deletes a downloaded true type font named times ttf from flash memory DELETE FONT times ttf DISK NOTE The space of files deleted from flash are not reclaimed for general use within the flash file system until an Optimize amp Reboot operation is performed It is not recommended to frequently store or delete files to flash If the Optimize amp R
34. an error STOP MSI Example Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Figure 39 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by the following program CREATE MSI BARCODE MSTA DARK 32 27 24688642 PDF X STOP BARCODE MSIB VSCAN X2 H12 DARK 32 54 24688642 PDF A STOP END EXECUTE MSI 1 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32 SC 27 Data Field Printable Data Field OCR B Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command Vertical Dark MSIB Mag 2 H 1 2 at SR 32 SC 54 Data Field Upper Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 299 Chapter 3 300 Bar Codes NORMAL i SC 54 Spee ar SR 32 gt 24688642 S N Figure 39 Sample MSI Bar Codes PDF417 PDF417 The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 40 and described on the following pages 1 1 1 1 1 CCW CW 1 1 1 1 UPPER LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD gt GUARD GUARD x J GUARD BAND BAND BAND BAND UPPER GUARD BAND 1 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD QUIET Normal ZONE 1 1 LOWER GUARD BAND INV UPPER GUARD BAND 1 Figure 40 PDF417 Structure 301 Chapter 3 302 Bar Codes Qu
35. bar width space width short bar height full bar height The D parameter can also be used for printer dots User defined ratios can be disabled from the control panel menu Refer to the User s Manual for details NOTE The IGP does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable wide narrow element relationships for barcode readability When designing unique ratio data carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to readable barcodes Variable Ratio Sample CREATE TEST Enters Create Form mode SCALE CHAR ALPHA Alpha command 2 5 1 1 1 Std Ratio STOP Ends Alpha command BARCODE Bar code command C3 9 X1 H7 3 5 CODE39 PDF B N Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command ALPHA Alpha command 2 30 1 1 Var Ratio STOP Ends bar code command BARCODE Bar code command C3 9 XRD2 2 5 5 H7 3 30 CODE39 PDF B N Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST 1 Prints the form NORMAL Std Ratio Var Ratio CODE39 CODE39 IMPACT PDF Character Sizes PDF LOC FONT PDF Character Sizes PDF LOC FONT For UPC and EAN bar codes a smaller Letter Gothic font will be substituted for OCR A or OCR B when the bar code symbol is not large enough to accommodate a 10 CPI font For all other bar codes OCR A and OCR B will print at 10 C
36. 1 UPPER GUARD BAND Normal 19957 1 START DATA FIELD STOP quiet CODE CODE ZONE 1 4 LOWER GUARD BAND jal OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Lew SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE 1 L 4 UPPER GUARD BAND Pee i lvl esee J OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 13 Code 93 Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT n UPPER GUARD BAND HEIGHT 199 Chapter 3 200 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data
37. Figure 61 illustrates a vertical UPS 11 bar code generated by the following program CREATE UPS11 BARCODE UPS11 VSCAN H9 34 15 01234567895 PDF STOP END EXECUTE UPS11 1 NORMAL LLL Figure 61 Sample UPS Bar Code 369 Chapter 3 _ Incremental Bar Code Fields Incremental Bar Code Fields With the incremental bar code fields feature you can update bar code and alphanumeric data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically with just one set of data sent from the host computer You can print up to 65 535 forms with incremental fields automatically updated NOTE Throughout the discussion of incremental fields the term increment or incremental means the field is automatically updated by a specified amount or increment You can actually increment the field by a positive amount added or a negative amount subtracted as specified within the command You can use bar code incremental fields with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form Mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form Mode New formats and parameters are required in the bar code commands for static and dynamic incremental fields In addition the Execute Form command requires a new format and parameters when you use incremental fields with dynamic data You can increment or decrement incremental fields repeat at specified intervals before updating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of incremen
38. GS1 Datamatrix GS1 Datamatrix NOTE 951 Datamatrix is formerly known as Datamatrix Datamatrix is a two dimensional barcode containing small dark and light square data modules It has a finder pattern of two solid lines and two alternating dark and light lines on its perimeter This barcode is capable of storing up to 3116 numeric digits 2335 alphanumeric in a symbol 144 modules square It is also capable of encoding in a number of different schemes Two main subsets for Datamatrix exist which differ in terms of error correction The first subset uses ECC 000 through ECC 140 and uses convolution coding for error correction The second subset is ECC 200 which uses Reed Solomon error correction techniques ECC 200 format is recommended Quiet Zone The minimum quiet zone is one module width on all four sides Readable Data There is no printable data field allowed for the Datamatrix barcode Data Field The data allowed within the data field depends on the error correction subset you are using See the data field description on page 263 for details Data Matrix Command Format BARCODE DATAMATRIX X D n Y D n Rn ID BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE DATAMATRIX Designates bar code type Data Matrix enter DATAMATRIX DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW
39. STOP Ends bar code command BARCODE Bar code command AUSTPOST VSCAN 9 50 Vertical Australian 4 State bar code FCC 11 INFO 1 SR 9 SC 50 00540171 Data Field 8 digit Sorting Number PDF Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST 1 Execute the form form count of 1 NORMAL ace SC 50 SR 62 00141544 0 117 09 44 18 46 589 11 00540171 59 53 56 44 173 Chapter 3 THERMAL 174 Bar Codes Aztec Barcode Aztec barcode is a 2 D matrix symbology designed to combine the best characteristics of several 1st generation symbologies with special attention paid to ease of printing ease of finding in any orientation allowance for field distortion high data security with user selected redundancy and efficient storage over the range from small to large data messages Aztec symbols are made up of an array of square cells with square bullseye in the center Command Format BARCODE AZTEC DIR X D m Hr FORMAT x y APPENDx y INIT BFn L DARK SH SC D Data Field D STOP Parameter Description X D n Optional parameter that designates the x dimension width of a single square data module in IGP dots or printer dots if the option D is used Values range from 1 to 1000 printer dots The y dimension is calculated by converting the printer dots in the x direction to printer dots in the y direction This para
40. Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields Incremental dynamic data fields are created in the Create Form mode using the incremental alphanumeric or bar code commands The incremental dynamic data itself is supplied during the Execute Form mode at the top of the form prior to any overlay data The incremental dynamic data either alphanumeric or bar code data can be changed with each new batch of forms Incremental dynamic data fields specified in the Create Form mode will not appear on the form if corresponding incremental dynamic data is not supplied in the Execute Form mode Format For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data cc IAF n idi STEPMASK RPTm RSTn D STARTDATA D For incremental dynamic bar code data cc IBFn idi STEPMASK RPTm RSTn D STARTDATA D cc IAF IBF idir STEPMASK The Special Function Control Code Identifies the command as an incremental alphanumeric dynamic data enter IAF Identifies the command as an incremental bar code dynamic data enter IBF Identifies the field number of the dynamic data field as entered in the Create Form mode Replace n with the number used to identify the field when it was defined The optional increment direction parameter to specify an increase or decrease of the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement Defines the increment amount step the number of c
41. Vertical Lines 394 Comments in command lines 30 Compressed print density 52 Compression 30 Configuration command codes 54 Contact information 499 Control characters Maxicode 293 Control panel configure IGP PGL 23 Corner Command 392 Corner errors 443 Corners command codes 58 Create commands example 379 Create errors 446 Create Form Command 392 Create Form Mode 19 392 Create Form Mode commands 19 Create Form mode Paper selection and maximum values 471 Create Logo Mode 21 Create Mode form examples 377 CREATE command codes 61 Creating a Box and Corners 392 Creating a logo 401 Customer Support Center 499 D Dark printing 63 Data Bit 8 Accessing characters and character sets 420 Data Field Code 128A 128B and 128C 208 Code 93 200 Data Matrix 261 EAN 13 225 EAN 8 219 FIM 233 Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 278 Matrix 284 Maxicode 289 MSI 296 PDF 417 302 Planet 313 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 POSTNET 325 Telepen 339 UCC EAN 128 243 UPC A 346 UPC E 352 UPCSHIP 360 UPS 11 366 Data fields for alphanumeric and incremental data 32 dynamic data 32 fixed data 32 incremental data fields 32 overlay data 32 Data Field BC412 Barcode 179 Data Field Codabar 184 Data Matrix command format 261 Data Field 261 example 270 Quiet Zone 261 Readable Data 261 special characters using SO 265 symbol characteristics 266 Debugging Programs
42. page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 SC Defines the starting column of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 ER Defines the ending row of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 127 Chapter 2 IMPORTANT 128 Command Codes Comments EC Defines the ending column of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 STOP Stop indicates the end of the REVERSE command enter STOP and the IGP PGL will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP PGL will expect another set of Reverse Print command parameters You can use reverse print with all form elements alpha lines boxes etc The IGP PGL can also reverse print bar codes but reverse printed bar codes are unreadable by bar code scanning devices RFID PGL Commands For all examples make sure Label Length in the QUICK SETUP menu mat
43. 25 1 60 55 33 37 26 1 60 56 35 36 27 1 60 28 1 59 29 1 59 30 1 35 Figure 70 Sample Logo 400 Creating A Logo Creating A Logo 1 Use your system commands to open a file for the logo program with the filename HNDLGO FOM For example Enter Format HNDLGO FOM System Format Input the Special Function Control Code and Logo mode command to put the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode Include HAND as the logo name specify a vertical length VL of 56 column length and a horizontal length HL of 60 row length Enter Format LOGO HAND 56 60 cc LOGO ogoname VL HL DISK Enter each row of dot positions as tabulated from the grid and shown in Figure 70 The format is Row Column for example 15 13 29 36 51 Each row is entered on a separate line After all the dot positions are entered terminate the Create Logo mode by entering an End command line Use the Special Function Control Code and Create command to create a form with the form name LEFTHAND To add the logo to the form input a Create Form mode Logo Call command identify the logo starting row SR 45 and starting column SC 33 and specify the logo to use by its name HAND Stop the Logo command and end the Create Form mode Enter Format CREATE LEFTHAND cc CREATE formname FL DISK LOGO LOGO 45 33 HAND SR SC logoname DISK STOP STOP END END Input the Special Function Control Code and Execute command for the LEFTHAND form just create
44. Any number of locations can be identified during the Create Form mode as part of the form definition A command during the Execute Form mode enters new data in the identified location s each time the form prints Dynamic data is the most efficient method of supplying variable data to the form Again customer names addresses or any type of logo variable alphanumeric or bar code data can be provided dynamically Incremental Data Fields The incremental data fields feature allows alphanumeric and bar code data fields to automatically update numerically or alphabetically with just one set of data sent from the host computer A maximum of 65 535 fields can print with incremental fields automatically updated Alphanumeric incremental fields can be used with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form mode Incremental data fields cannot be used with Overlay data Alphanumerics Alphanumerics Purpose Defines and positions alphanumeric data on a preprinted static data field or as a dynamic data field Mode CREATE Format ALPHA R AF 5 L T RJUST or CJUST NLZ DIR UC DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SR SC VE HE D text D STOP ALPHA The Alphanumeric command enter ALPHA The optional reverse printing white on black parameter Enter R to specify a black background NOTE The D parameter used in earlier IGP PGL version
45. CREATE mode When defining a logo in NORMAL mode enter DISK to store the logo to Onboard Flash Memory or enter EMC to store the logo in the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 for details T A line terminator i e LF FF must separate the LOGO line from the beginning of the TIFF raster data TIFF raster data Scanned data in TIFF format data must be black and white Grey scales or color TIFF files are currently not supported Both uncompressed and packed bits compression formats are supported cc The Special Function Control Code RASTEREND Denotes the end of the TIFF raster data Enter RASTEREND END Terminates the TIFF logo enter END STOP Ends the Create Logo command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory Also note that each rotation used requires a copy of the image therefore the number of rotations used affects the printer memory available The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined logo into a form The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid Once created the logo is ready to be used in any form and will print at the size shown Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control codes This may affect the way the host sends data to t
46. During the Execute Form mode the IGP PGL responds to regular print format commands such as 8 and elongated characters Some commands be used in other modes in addition to the Execute Form mode For example Compressed Print Expanded Print Execute Ignore Select Format and Vertical Line Spacing which are also Normal mode commands can be used in the Execute or Create Form modes The IGP PGL alternate character set can also be used in the Execute Form mode Execute Form General Format Execute Form General Format Purpose Mode Format Prints forms created in the CREATE mode NORMAL cc EXECUTE formname SAVEDYN FC CNTn FCNTn DISK DISK EVFU Data cc AF m D ASCII text D cc BF D data D cc DFn D data D cc AF n lt DFn gt cc BFn lt DFn gt cc GFn D logoname D cc AF n idi STEPMASK RPT m RSTm D STARTDATA D cc IBFE n idi STEPMASK RPT m RSTm D STARTDATA D DE idi STEP RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D Overlay Data Form Feed character cc NORMAL cc The Special Function Control Code EXECUTE The Execute Form command enter EXECUTE formname Identifies a previously defined form by name Enter the form name exactly as used when created SAVEDYN The optional command to have dynamic fields saved across forms that are separated with a form feed character PAGE n The optional Pagination comma
47. ELLIPSE LT SR SC ER EC The Ellipse command Defines the line thickness measured in vertical IGP dots 1 72 inch increments Defines the starting row of the ellipse CP DP format rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE Defines the starting column of the ellipse CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE command Defines the ending row of the ellipse CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE command Defines the ending column of the ellipse CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE command NOTE This command is currently applicable to non impact printers only CREATE XYZ 432 ELLIPSE 2 5 5 10 20 STOP END EXECUTE XYZ NORMAL Figure 7 Ellipse Example 70 Emulation Switching Emulation Switching Purpose switch the active emulation from IGP PGL to the emulation selected Mode NORMAL Format cc EMULATION emulation cc The Special Function Control Code EMULATION The Emulation Switch command emulation Specifies the emulation to activate Enter V to switch to VGL and P to switch to ZGL Comments The switching of emulations causes IGP PGL to perform a soft reset Therefore front panel selections return to their saved state and all forms and logos resident in RAM memory are deleted Enter V to select VGL and P for ZGL
48. End Purpose Terminates the current mode of operation and must be used before entering a new mode command EXECUTE LOGO NORMAL or even CREATE Mode CREATE Format END Comments After the End command is received the IGP PGL flushes program errors stores the error free portions of the form program just completed and then returns to the Normal mode If the debug slash is included in the Create command the program prints with any corresponding error messages Enquiry Purpose To send information a status byte about the printer state to the host through the serial port This command is ignored if the current host interface is not the serial port This is an online command and is not required to be followed by a terminator Mode NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE Format cc ENQUIRY ENQUIRY Enquiry command Enter ENQUIRY 71 Chapter 2 72 Command Codes Execute Form Mode How to Use the Execute Command Forms are printed in the Execute Form mode In addition to printing the form in the Execute Form mode variable data can also be entered onto the form dynamically during the Execute Form mode This dynamic data input during the Execute Form mode includes page numbers alphanumeric data fields and bar code data fields Pagination described on page 106 is performed in the Execute Form mode Dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data require additional commands within the Execute Form mode The fastest metho
49. Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The bar code data For PostBar enter values 0 through 3 to represent the four different types of bars For Royal Mail enter alphanumeric data A through Z and 0 through 9 If using the KIX format for Royal Mail lowercase characters a through z are also valid Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result 331 Chapter 3 332 Bar Codes PostBar and Royal Mail Examples Figure 50 illustrates a horizontal Royal Mail bar code generated by the following program CREATE ROYALBAR Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command ROYALBAR X1A 10 40 Royal Mail bar code at SR 10 SC 40 with MAG 1A SN34RD1
50. Pi Font PI PI PC 850 Multilingual PM PM PC 8 TK Code Page 437T PT PT PC 775 Baltic PV PV Non UGL Generic Pi Font PY Roman 8 R8 R8 ISO 17 Spanish SP SP ISO 11 Swedish SW SW Symbol SY PS Text TS TS ISO 4 United Kingdom UK UK ISO 6 ASCII US US Ventura International VI VI Ventura Math VM VM Ventura US VU VU Ventura 3 1 Latin 1 W1 W1 AgfaTidbits WD Windows 3 1 Latin 2 WE WE Windows 3 0 Latin 1 WO WO Windows 3 1 Latin 5 WT WT 425 Chapter 5 _ Accessing Characters and Character Sets Downloading A Block Character Purpose The BLOCKLOAD command allows the user to replace a built in block character with a user defined downloaded block character Mode PGL NORMAL mode Format NORMAL cc BLOCKLOADE DISK dest data END cc Represents the Special Function Control Code SFCC BLOCKLOAD The download load Block character command DISK Optional parameter to store the downloaded character to the printer s non volatile memory FLASH as well as its volatile memory RAM If the DISK parameter is not included then the character would only be saved in RAM dest The location or address space in which the character is to be saved The location can be a used or unused location in the Character Table The range is from 33 to 65 535 decimal Locations 0 through 32 are control characters and the space character which are non replaceable characters data The data in Block format represents the shape of the Block
51. Solving Program Errors If you make an error in the program to create a form or an element in the form a coded error message and program line containing the error will print when the form is executed These error codes are defined in the Error Codes chapter To solve program errors perform the following steps 1 Locate the error message in the listing provided in the Error Codes chapter for a description of the error Analyze the related portion of the program to find the error Correct the error and reprint the file containing the program If the error persists or you cannot locate it in the program use the debug parameter in the Create command as described in the Error Codes chapter Print the file with the IGP PGL program The debug parameter lists the program line by line including the error on the line where the error occurs followed by the error free sections of the form Correct the error and print the file again When the error has been corrected delete the debug parameter Example Assume you made two errors in the Box and Corner commands input in steps 3 and 4 of the Form and Bar Code Example on page 391 Using the debug parameter in the Create command produces the following sample listing PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 ERROR 24 BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters STOP CORNER 3 300 13 57 64 5 7 ERROR 35 CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds ERROR 31 CORNER sta
52. These command standards are described in the following sections Familiarize yourself with the meaning and use of these standards before operating the IGP PGL Special Function Control Code SFCC The SFCC identifies a command directed to the IGP PGL to enable a specific IGP PGL function Based on the host computer interface requirements various characters can be selected as the SFCC such as the caret or a tilde The SFCC must be placed before a command or data is entered The examples in this manual use the tilde as the SFCC always substitute the actual SFCC required by your system wherever the tilde is shown In the general command formats the SFCC is represented by cc You can select the SFCC using the CONFIG command page 54 the Special Function Control Code Change command page 150 or the control panel see the User s Manual Semicolon Each parameter alpha data options etc on the command line is separated by a semicolon Blank spaces between the semicolon and the next parameter are not allowed A missing or misplaced semicolon causes an error message Uppercase The IGP PGL is case sensitive ALL commands must be entered in uppercase 27 Chapter 2 IGP PGL Command Standards Inline Commands The SFCC usually a was required to be the first character on a new line It may now appear anywhere on the command line There is a configuration option that determines whether any
53. USET1 ISET 29 selects USET6 etc 421 Chapter 5 422 Accessing Characters and Character Sets Table 54 USET ISET Relationship USETn e ISET n n 1 n 24 n 2 n 25 n 3 26 4 27 5 28 n 6 n 29 n 7 30 n 8 31 Example The following example defines User Set 1 to contain the Multinational font addresses B1 A1 and BF 5 at the hex cell addresses 23 24 and 25 respectively Therefore if ca 23 and fa B1 each time that cell address 23 is received it will select the character located at font address B1 USET1 23 1 24 1 25 END User Set 1 now contains the following the plus or minus sign hex B1 in place of the number sign hex 23 the upside down exclamation point hex A1 in place of the dollar sign hex 24 and the upside down question mark hex in place of the percent sign 96 hex 25 To print User Set 1 you must use the ISET command discussed on page 423 Character Set Selection Command ISET Character Set Selection Command ISET Purpose Mode Format Comments Accesses one of the multinational Table 50 or international Table 56 character sets Use this command to access a different character set from the configured power up default character set NORMAL CREATE and EXECUTE In Normal and Execute modes cc ISET n or cc ISET UTF8 or ISET xx In the Create mode SFCC not required ISET
54. When this occurs the IGP PGL automatically reverts to Normal mode To create space in IGP PGL memory delete forms with logo elements including the logos that are no longer required LOGO format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the Logo command If this occurs while specifying the size and name of the logo the IGP PGL automatically reverts to the Normal mode If this occurs during the actual construction of the logo the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally 445 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 55 56 57 58 59 LOGO call not previously defined An attempt was made in the Create Form mode to incorporate an undefined logo into a form This error is not generated during the Logo Form mode When this error occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then forms creation continues normally Insufficient memory for another LOGO call IGP PGL memory cannot store another logo call To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with logo elements including the logos no longer required LOGO call starting row SR out of bounds During form creation the parameter specifying the row position of a logo places the logo outside the form boundaries The buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then processing continues normally LOGO call starting column SC out of bounds Duri
55. _42 Two separate but linked alpha STEPMASK 01101 subfields with leading space _ fixed data 42 is non Printed Results EU incrementing ES RPT 1 RST 0 4272 42 Value Description STARTDATA 9AA02 Single numeric field decremented by STEPMASK XXX01 1 while fixed data 9 and AA are non incrementing Printed Results 9AA02 9AA01 9AA00 9AA99 9AA03 Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields Purpose To automatically increment decrement fixed alphanumeric data fields Mode CREATE NOTE In the command format below incremental alphanumeric command parameters are shown in boldface type standard alphanumeric command parameters and optional non incremental parameters are shown in italics Due to space constraints the command parameters are separated into two lines During actual IGP PGL input DO NOT separate command parameters Format ALPHA R Cn V DIR UC DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SR SC VE STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D STOP idir Identifies this alphanumeric command as an Incremental Alphanumeric command enter 1 The optional increment direction parameter to specify an increment add or decrement subtract to the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement 41 Chapter 2 42 Command Codes STEPMASK Defines the increment amount s
56. and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The Australian 4 State bar code data field consists of four different sections the FCC Sorting Number Customer Data and Reed Solomon parity information The FCC is a two digit code specifying the format of the barcode see Table 15 The Sorting Number is an 8 digit code used to sort the mail item Customer Data is optional and is only allowed on certain formats as indicated by the FCC selected The IGP emulation automatically generates the Reed Solomon parity information and includes it in the barcode Check Digit No check digit is calculated for the Australian 4 State bar code The Reed Solomon parity information is automatically included 169 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Australian 4 State Command Format BARCODE AUSTPOST FCCnm INFO m DIR NLQ MAG BF n L DARK SH SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE AUSTPOST Designates bar code type Australian 4 State enter FCCn INFOn AUSTPOST Specifies the FCC code which defines the format of the barcode and its size If no value is specified the FCC defaults to a value of 11 Enter FCC then one of the values shown in Table 15 Specifies the format of the customer information field If no value is specified the information field defaults to a v
57. automatically using just one set of data sent from the host computer Incremental alphanumeric data fields can be applied to fixed static data page 41 or dynamic data page 44 Mode CREATE for fixed data or EXECUTE for dynamic data NOTE Throughout the discussion of incremental fields the term increment or incremental means the field is automatically updated by a specified amount or increment The field can actually be increased decreased in specified increments decrements within the command Comments Incremental fields can increase or decrease repeat at specified intervals before updating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of increments A maximum of 65 535 fields can be defined Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA command parameters as described in Table 5 The parameters are part of the Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data command or part of the Execute command when using incremental alohanumeric dynamic data The STEPMASK parameter performs the following three functions 1 It defines the increment amount step 2 It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field STARTDATA and 3 It provides a mask to link or unlink subfields of the data to be incremented independently The data provided in the STEPMASK field combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of these functions The inc
58. character columns rmode An optional parameter specifying the return mode of the printer following the Execute Form Mode Enter 1 2 3 4 or 5 to specify printer modes 1 through 5 respectively If this mode is not specified the printer remains in the mode effective at the end of the Execute Form Mode The return print mode is effective when new data is received following the Execute Form Mode MODE Specifies up to 8 different print modes to be used within the form beginning on the row defined by the SR parameter Enter the appropriate print mode number This mode will remain effective within the form until a new print mode is defined by another MODE SR sequence or the end of form is reached As described in your printer User s Manual print densities and maximum line lengths vary with each print mode Form elements such as boxes or vertical lines may be printed at varying densities or suffer horizontal compression due to a print mode change in the of the form SH Defines the starting row of the print mode used within the form The row number can range from 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command which refers to the SMODE command table of densities page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 121 Chapter 2 Command Codes Comments The PMODE command is useful for ensuring the printer is set for the proper print mode to print bar codes or alphanu
59. is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included 279 Chapter 3 Codes BFmL DARK SH SC D 280 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ra
60. n 1 1 OPTIONAL CCW CW 1 1 1 1 OPTIONAL 1 1 READABLE 1 i DATA i 1 FIELD 1 1 1 OPTIONAL 1 1 CHECK 1 DIGIT UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER 1 UPPER GUARD 91 GUARD GUARD 1 ges GUARD BAND QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE ke HEIGHT HEIGHT gt OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 1 UPPER GUARD BAND i Lm QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal zone HEIGHT os Sel LOWER GUARD BAND Li 1 zi SR SC POSITION o OE 1 LOWER GUARD BAND p l i INV QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START quier ZONE CODE CODE ZONE _ _ UPPER GUARD BAND l OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT hj in me J Figure 32 2 5 German l 2 5 and ITF 14 Structure 277 Chapter 3 278 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces
61. n3 n13 n 17 254 GLN Extension Component n3 an 20 30 Quantity n2 n 8 310 Net Weight Kilograms n4 n6 311 Length or 1st Dimension Meters n4 n6 312 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters n4 n6 313 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters n4 n6 239 Chapter 3 Codes Table 26 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued ia inier AD Content Format 314 Area Square Meters 4 315 Volume Liters n4 n6 316 Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 320 Net Weight Pounds n4 n6 321 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches n4 n6 322 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet n4 n6 323 Length Or ist Dimension Yards n4 n6 324 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches n4 n6 325 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet n4 n6 326 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards n4 n6 327 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches n4 n6 328 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet n4 n6 329 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards n4 n6 330 Gross Weight Kilograms 4 6 331 Length 1st Dimension Logistics n4 n6 332 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 333 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters n4 n6 Logistics 334 Area Square Meters Logistics n4 n6 335 Gro
62. on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters 185 Chapter 3 186 Bar Codes DARK SH SC D data field PDF LOC Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 18 except the SFCC and the first character and the last character in the data field must be either A B C or D The length of the data field is variable howe
63. or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however a maximum of 16 data characters is allowed The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 and A through F hex 30 through 39 Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Plessey FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font
64. power save mode 0 not in power save mode 1 Warning 1 warning state 0 no warning state 0 FEXP For Future Expansion Byte2 7 Print Head Open 1 print head open 0 print head closed 6 Paper 1 paper out 0 no paper out 5 Not used Always 1 4 Ribbon Out 1 ribbon out 0 no ribbon out 3 Cutter Fault 1 cutter fault 0 no cutter fault 2 ODV max retry fail 1 2 max retry fail O 2 no max retry fail 118 Printer Alert Status Byte Bit Status Description Byte 2 1 RFID max retry fail 1 2 max retry fail O 2 no max retry fail 0 TOF Detect Fault 1 TOF detect fault 0 TOF detect fault Byte3 7 Ribbon Low 1 ribbon low no ribbon low 6 FEXP For Future Expansion 5 Not used Always 1 4 FEXP For Future Expansion 3 FEXP For Future Expansion 2 FEXP For Future Expansion 1 FEXP For Future Expansion 0 FEXP For Future Expansion Byte4 7 Label Fed 1 label fed 0 no label fed 6 Label OK 1 label OK label not OK 5 Not used Always 1 4 Label Failed 1 label failed 0 label not failed 3 Label Present 1 label present 0 label taken 2 Label Cut 1 label cut 0 no label cut 1 FEXP For Future Expansion 0 FEXP For Future Expansion Byte 7 0 FEXP Bit 5 always 1 5 8 9 7 0 Response End Marker ETX character 119 Chapter 2 Command Codes Printer Identification Purpose To request the printer identificatio
65. printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 2 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 2 through 9 9 inches If any value less than 3 is selected then the PDF must be suppressed using the PDF Font parameter S The default value is 1 3 inches is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale 353 Chapter 3 Codes BFn DARK SH SC D data field 354 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC
66. the printer moves the paper a single line feed If the EVFU is selected and the memory is loaded a channel code sent from the host which is not a part of the assigned sequence currently in memory moves the paper a single line feed Line Spacing The printer can use any line spacing with the EVFU The EVFU determines the forms length according to the program specifications and the currently selected line spacing For example 14 inch paper with 10 Ipi line spacing would yield a 140 line form which can be defined by the EVFU Mixing line spacing on the same form unloads the EVFU EVFU Programming Sequence The EVFU provides 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines An error results if the EVFU form length exceeds the physical length of the page and the IGP PGL returns to the Normal mode The number of channels in an EVFU overrides the length of the form as it was defined in the CREATE mode therefore the EVFU must be equal to or longer than the form being used The EVFU programming sequence is listed below and explained in the following sections 1 Start load code 2 Line identification codes and 3 Endload code 480 EVFU Programming Sequence Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E The Start Load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for channel assignment storage Refer to Table 62 or Table 63 on page 483 and page 484 respectively for the appropriate start load code Channel Assignment The EVFU memory has the capacity
67. 010 inch each short bar must 050 inch 010 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is 0 0416 inch and 050 inch respectively with a clear vertical space ranging from 0 012 inch to 0 040 inch between bars Check Digit The sixth tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character for the 5 9 or 11 digit data field respectively The check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning 325 Chapter 3 326 Bar Codes POSTNET Command Format BARCODE POSTNET D R NLQ BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE POSTNET DIR NLQ BFmL DARK The Bar Code command enter BARCODE Designates bar code type POSTNET enter POSTNET Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter optimized to print barcodes at NLQ print density 180x96 This may cause line matrix printers to reverse motion when the form prints This parameter is ignored for other printer types Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for t
68. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 Jjojojojojojolol jo 2 jojojojoi 2 2 2 2 ojoJjoljo co j jojoi 2 2jojo 2 2 oljo 2 2 o jol nm f1O O Jo J JO FO J JO FO J JO NOTE Do not use your SFCC as a channel code when using the EVFU Clearing the EVFU Memory The following actions reset clear the EVFU memory 1 Sending only the start load code 2 Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code 3 start load code is received resulting in re initialization of the EVFU This restarts the EVFU load sequence When the EVFU memory is cleared the forms length returns to the previously set value 484 EVFU Example EVFU Example The following EVFU example is a 2 inch form at 6 Ipi line spacing Thus 12 lines on the form must be defined The form is repeated 3 times Paper instructions are disabled Assign Line Identification Codes Line ID Code Description Assigned Hex Code Start Load Start EVFU 1E Line 1 Top of Form 10 Line 2 Filler 11 Line 3 Filler 11 Line 4 Filler 11 Line 5 Vertical Tab 1B Line 6 First channel stop 13 Line 7 Filler 11 Line 8 Filler 11 Line 9 Second channel stop 12 Line 10 Filler 11 Line 11 Third channel stop 15 Line 12 Filler 11 Stop Load End EVFU 1F EVFU Format in Execute Mode The Execute command shown on page 486 derived from the Execute command format on page 73 illustrates how the EVFU
69. 14 0 15 0 12 4 13 0 13 2 13 4 14 0 Figure 2 CP DP Format Example 31 Chapter 2 Command Codes Command Codes 32 Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data Based upon the requirements of a specific application three methods are used to print alphanumeric data on the form fixed or prepositioned data overlay data and dynamic data Fixed Data Fixed data is entered during the Create Form mode as part of the form definition It appears as prepositioned information similar to other form elements The fixed data is printed on each form in the same location and can only be changed by changing the form definition Your company s name address logo or phone number are typical examples of alphanumeric data that can be fixed onto the form Overlay Data Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered during the Execute Form mode by positioning the information with line feeds and spaces into an exact location In general a page of data is overlaid onto a form similar to typing data in the appropriate blanks of a preprinted form Each page of overlay data is separated by form feeds to correspond to each form printed Customer names addresses and order numbers are examples of variable data that can be overlaid onto the form Dynamic Data Dynamic data is variable data entered by command during the Execute Form mode The dynamic data is entered into a location previously defined in the Create Form mode
70. 15 digits from 0 through 9 The first two digits MUST be 01 or an error is returned The value 01 is not encoded in the barcode data nor is the mod 10 checkdigit that is used for UCC EAN 128 symbols with AI of 01 However they show up in the printable data field If less than 15 is encoded the leading zeros following the 2 digit Al of O1 are encoded to make a 15 digit barcode A check digit mod 89 is automatically added The data characters are positioned in the barcode as the left data character and the right data characters Data Field for Composite UPC A Encodes a UPC A linear barcode up to 11 digits are accepted the check digit will be added by the printer If less than 11 digits are supplied the printer will left pad the data with zeros Sending data longer than 11 digits can result in an incorrect barcode Data Field for Composite UPC E Encodes a UPC E linear barcode up to 10 digits are accepted which should comply with the standards or an error will generate Data Field for Composite EAN 13 Encodes an 13 linear barcode up to 12 digits are accepted the check digit will be added by the printer If less than 12 digits are supplied the printer will left pad the data with zeros 256 GS1 Databar Data Field for Composite 8 Encodes an 8 linear barcode up to 7 digits are accepted the check digit will be added by the printer If less than 7 digits are supplied the printer will
71. 30 through 39 For UPC E eleven digits are expected Enter the number system character first by entering 0 followed by the five digit Manufacturer Number ending with the five digit Item Number The Manufacturing Number and Item Number sequences must conform to one of the number pattern sequences shown in Table 47 UPC E and UPC EO The IGP will compress the 11 characters of data down to the six encoded UPC E symbol characters Include the 2 or 5 digit add on data within the quotes at the end of this data field For UPC EO six digits are expected These six digits must be a valid compressed UPC E number Otherwise Error 96 will be generated PDF Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter UPC E data fields can be printed above or below the bar code symbol This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified If the PDF is not entered in the UPC E command format the data field automatically prints in OCR B LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable
72. 439 Define Month Names command 63 Delete command 412 example 412 Delete Font 64 Delete form 65 Delete logo 65 Delete macro 66 Design form 403 Directory 66 Directory command 411 example 411 Disable overlay set 428 Double Byte Character Set Multinational Character Sets 419 Download block character 426 user defined overlay set 426 Downloaded block characters examples 428 Downloaded font menus 430 Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields 376 Duplicating Incremental Bar Codes 376 Duplication horizontal 67 Duplication vertical 69 Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data 385 Dynamic Data Bar Code Fields 384 Basic Design 381 Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data 385 Dynamic Alphanumeric Fields 385 Dynamic data 32 Dynamic data Alphanumeric Data 23 Dynamic Data example 381 E EAN 13 224 Check Digit 225 command format 226 Data Field 225 example 230 Number System Character 225 Quiet Zone 225 Readable Data 225 Start Center Stop Codes 225 EAN 8 218 Check Digit 219 command format 220 Data Field 219 example 223 Quiet Zone 219 Readable Data 219 505 Start Center Stop Codes 219 structure 218 Electronic Vertical Format Unit 480 Ellipse 70 EMC Capability 24 EMC Capability printers without 25 Emulation switching 71 End load code 482 EVFU 482 End command codes 71 Enquiry command codes 71 Error codes 439 Errors alpha 444 bar code 450 45
73. 45 Chapter 2 46 Command Codes Example following program will produce the Incremental Alphanumeric data example above The program elements are also defined Refer to the command format on page 41 ALPHA 1 1 1 0 0 001 RPT3 RST9 AO1 I 3 1 0 0 001 RPT1 RSTO BO1 STOP where 1 1 1 0 0 001 RPT3 RST9 A01 Incremental alphanumeric command SR of 1 SC of 1 VE and HE are 0 001 stepmask increments by 1 RPT3 repeats each field value 3 times RST9 prints and increments each field 9 times before resetting identifies the start and finish of the alphanumeric string A01 is the starting value 1 3 1 0 0 001 RPT1 RST0 BO1 TEST 288 VDUP 3 6 ALPHA 1 5 6 5 4 4 STOP VDUP OFF END EXECUTE TEST IAF1 00002 45678 NORMAL Incremental alphanumeric command SR of 1 SC of 1 VE and HE are 0 001 stepmask increments by 1 RPT1 repeats each field value once RSTO prints and increments each field 0 times before resetting identifies the start and finish of the alphanumeric string B01 is the starting value Enters Create Form mode Repeats alpha string Alpha command Ends Alpha command Terminates Create Form mode Prints form 45678 45680 45682 Boxes Purpose Mode Format Produces any variety of rectangular boxes CREATE BOX LT SR SC ER EC RD STOP BOX LT SR SC ER EC RD The Box command en
74. 454 characters 574 characters 694 characters 814 characters 1048 characters 1302 characters 1556 characters 269 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 37 ECC 200 Rectangular Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Maximum Maximum 8 Byte Numeric Alphanumeric Data 8X 18 10 characters 6 characters 3 characters 8X32 20 characters 13 characters 8 characters 12X26 32 characters 22 characters 14 characters 12X36 44 characters 31 characters 20 characters 16 X 36 64 characters 46 characters 30 characters 16 X 48 98 characters 72 characters 47 characters Data Matrix Example Figure 29 illustrates a Data Matrix bar code generated by the following program CREATE DATAMATRIX BARCODE Bar Code command DATAMATRIX XD8 C18 R18 ECC200 ID5 10 10 Enters Create Form mode Data Matrix barcode x dimension width of 8 printer dots 18 columns and 18 rows Error Correction level 200 SR 10 SC 10 270 AIB2C3DAE5F6G7H819JO0 Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE DATAMATRIX 1 NORMAL Figure 29 Data Matrix Example Execute the form form count of 1 Barcode Barcode The Health Industry Business Communications has developed barcode called HIBC Health Industry Bar Code In a global setting HIBC identifies health industry products in any quantity of any lot or serial number with any expiration date
75. 49 49 53 STOP STOP The last two commands have added to the form definition PRACTICE now looks like Figure 67 COLUMN 49 44 49 Figure 67 Box Corner Example with Horizontal and Vertical Lines 394 Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text 10 Use the Create Form mode Alpha command to add some fixed alphanumeric text to the form Specify some compressed print the starting row SH and starting column SC for each alphanumeric string any vertically VE or horizontally HE expanded strings and the alphanumeric string itself which must be within the printable character quotation marks or asterisks for example Substitute your own name address etc in the appropriate areas If you do not want to include some of the data on your form do not enter the complete line Enter Format ALPHA ALPHA 31 22 0 0 ACME INC C AF m L T D R UC DARK POINT HSn SR SC VE HE D text D 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER 40 3 17 0 0 PART NUMBER 40 3 50 0 0 MFG DATE 45 3 17 0 0 DESCRIPTION 49 3 17 0 0 INTERFACE 49 3 50 0 0 VERSION C13 31 16 0 0 FROM C15 54 26 0 0 Call PRINTRONIX for more information C15 55 34 0 0 714 863 1900 STOP STOP NOTE The sample data entered above uses CP DP format such as 35 9 40 3 etc in the starting row SH parameters This precisely pos
76. 5 and ITF 14 278 Matrix 284 Maxicode 289 MSI 296 Telepen 339 UCC EAN 128 244 UPC A 346 UPC E 352 UPCSHIP 360 UPS 11 366 Readable Data Codabar 184 Recall command 126 Related documentation RFID 13 Repeat 126 Repeat command 126 Reset command 127 Reverse Print command 127 Reverse print errors 452 Reversed Print IGP PGL Emulation features 14 RFID 13 RFTAG PGL command code 141 Rotated Alphanumerics IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Royal Mail command format 330 example 332 SAVEDYN 73 Scale command 144 Scaling command 145 SD Capability 24 SD Capability printers without 25 Security Level PDF 417 302 Select Format command 147 Selectable Bar Codes IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Semicolon command 27 Set expanded font menu option 429 Set the Time or Date command 148 Setup command 148 Solving program errors 413 example 413 Spaces 29 Special Function Control Code Change 150 Special Function Control Code SFCC 27 Special information 13 Specifications magnification 163 Standard grid 467 Standard typefaces 489 Start Code BC412 Barcode 179 Start load code 481 EVFU 481 Start Center Stop Codes EAN 13 225 EAN 8 219 UPC A 346 Start Stop Code FIM 233 MSI 296 Planet 313 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 POSTNET 325 Start Stop Codes Code 128A 128B and 128C 207 Code 93 200 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 278 Matrix 284 511 PDF 417 302 Telepe
77. ALPHA format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the alpha command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters 45 Insufficient memory to store the ALPHA string No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for another alpha string The rest of the Alpha commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing of the form will then continue normally To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with alpha string elements that are no longer required 46 ALPHA X expansion HE and Y expansion VE must be zero When the expanded character parameters VE and HE are used within the ALPHA command both values must be either zero or non zero values Use vertical expansion and horizontal expansion with 12 point font size only If the elongated characters parameter E or the compressed characters parameter Cn is used in the ALPHA command the VE and HE values must be set to 0 47 ALPHA X expansion factor HE out of bounds The horizontal expansion factor is greater than the maximum allowed 444 48 49 Logo Errors ALPHA Y expansion factor VE out of bounds The vertical expansion factor is greater than the maximum allowed ALPHA compression factor Cn
78. All Data Field characters are numeric Table 38 shows the valid parameters for the all the fields The Tracking Code is 20 digits in length The Routing Code is optional but if it is included it must be 5 9 or 11 digits in length The maximum total input data is 31 numeric digits PGL encodes any length of input data into a 4 state customer barcode string consisting of 65 bars Table 38 Data Field Parameters Type Field Digits Tracking Barcode Identifier 2 Code Second digit must 0 4 Service Type Identifier 3 Mailer Identifier 6 or 9 Serial Number 9 when Mailer ID is 6 digits 6 when Mailer ID is 9 digits Routing Code Delivery Point Zip Code 0 5 9 11 Total 20 minimum 31 maximum STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result 275 Chapter 3 Codes Intelligent Mail 4 State Barcode Example CREATE INTELBARCODE 432 BARCODE INTMAIL 5 5 01234567094987654321012345678 STOP END EXECUTE INTELBARCODE NORMAL 276 Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 The structure for the 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 bar codes is shown in Figure 32 and described on the following pages QUIETI QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 0 r
79. Alphanumeric command 4 8 12 0 0 FROM This is fixed text on the form 6 3 12 2 2 ACME INC C15 7 3 16 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD C15 8 1 16 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 10 12 0 0 TO 14 8 11 0 0 S 0 19 8 11 0 0 S N 24 8 11 0 0 P N STOP Stop the Alphanumerics command HDUP OFF Stop the horizontal duplication END End the Create Form mode EXECUTE SAMPLE 1 Execute form 2 NORMAL EXECUTE SAMPLE 1 Execute again to print second form NORMAL FF 382 15345 Barranca Parkway L Irvine CA 92618 To INC 15345 Barranca Parkway L Irvine CA 92618 To Example Dynamic Data INC 15345 Barranca Parkway L Irvine CA 92618 To From INC 15345 Barranca Parkway L Irvine CA 92618 To Figure 63 Sample Form 383 Chapter 4 Form Examples Bar Code Fields Identify the location of the data fields for each of the six bar codes one location at each S O S N and P N field on the form The type of bar code and the human readable data information is also specified within the bar code commands Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed bar code information Each bar code must be designated separately The bar code commands are part of the Create Form mode therefore they must be entered in the Create Form mode before the END command However because each dynamic field is assigned a unique
80. BLOCKPERMALOCK share the same syntax BLOCKPERMALOCK applies only to the USR memory area For differences in functionality see Note 13 on page 133 format An optional parameter to specify the format for the passcode data Enter B for binary D for decimal and H for hexadecimal The default is decimal if format is not specified size A decimal number specifying the overall bit length of the memory bank mem bank Specifies which tag logical memory area that this command will be applied If omitted it defaults to the EPC memory area Other areas include Identification User Data Access area and Kill area Enter one of the following values EPC EPC 12 bytes data area default TID Tag identification 8 bytes area currently not applicable for RFWTAG USR User 32 bytes area ACS 4 bytes access code area KIL 4 bytes kill code area PC 2 bytes PC code area Gen 2 tags only start block optional decimal number that identifies the block to begin the write If this parameter is omitted then zero will be assumed to be the start block or the beginning of the logical memory area specified by mem bank byte length decimal number that indicates the byte length of the write when the starting block is not zero Note This field is required if the start block is used unless start block is zero then this field is ignored NOTE 1 If the optional parameters sta
81. Bits Channel A Hex Dec Code 00 0 NUL 01 SOH 02 STX 03 ETX 04 05 TOF 1 gt gt O UJ 09 LF OB VT oC FF oD CR 6E 110 n 6F 111 x x x px x xx ile l oioioioioIioIio Start Load End Load gt 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0O 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 07 7 o 0 0 0 01 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 X Undefined 0 or 1 NOTE The ASCII values in Table 62 assume that all undefined bits are set to 0 When the PI line is enabled data bit 8 is the PI line on a serial interface and data bit 8 is undefined on a parallel interface 483 Appendix E Paper Motion using the EVFU Table 63 EVFU Codes PI Line Disabled or Not Used ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec 10 16 11 17 12 18 13 19 14 20 15 21 16 22 17 23 18 24 19 25 1A 26 1B 27 1C 28 FS 1D 29 GS 1E 30 RS Start Load 1F 31 US End Load X Undefined 0 or 1 0 Low TOF 13 14 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
82. Bold 93779 85 Chapter 2 86 Command Codes Comments Example Font parameters in Normal and Execute modes do not affect the fonts that have already been established and saved on a form Font commands issued in the Create mode affect only the current form being created and not any of the fonts on other forms or for Execute or Normal mode text You can use any or all Font parameters listed in any order in a single Font command Do not list font parameters on separate lines Parameters and symbol sets not specified retain the previously selected value Parameters incorrectly specified retain the previously selected value All Font command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a NORMAL RESET CONFIG RESET or new CREATE command Multiple font commands within a single form will save the ast font command parameters specified Symbol sets can also be selected using the ISET or USET commands Refer to the Multinational and International Character Sets chapter 5 To change font width and height use the Compressed Print Density or Expanded Print commands described on page 52 and page 83 respectively The following command selects the Letter Gothic font 93779 with a right slant This font will continue to print until another Font command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered FONT FACE 93779 SLANT RIGHT The FONT NAME command also supports Andal fonts from four different And
83. C35 DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D Data Fiela D STOP Start Code Each number in the data field contains the bar that indicate the start 188 Code 35 Data Field Code 35 can accommodate 10 characters 0 9 The following table lists the character with it s module sequence Each character is composed of 6 bars of same kind which include 2 empty bars bars removed from their place and one start bar Data Field is written form left to right but barcode symbol is composed in an order of left to right which starts with the rightmost character in the data field to the leftmost character Bar E Empty Bar S Start Bar Space Character Module Sequence 0 I I I E E S 1 5 2 5 3 I E E 1I 1 S 4 5 5 I E I E 1 S 6 I I E E 1 S 7 5 8 5 9 5 Check Code The Code 35 has a mod 10 check character The check character is automatically calculated and inserted in the end of barcode symbol The check character verifies accurate scanning The start bar is included in the check character GuardBand Normally there are guardbands 0 10 inches both above and below the bars of the barcode Magnification There is only one pre defined magnification for Code 35 X1 which is the default magnification NOTE The User Defined variable ratio is not allowed for
84. CA20UG STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 15 7 5 5 V040898755 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 20 8 5 5 50002110 STOP END AIAG 2 NORMAL 863 1900 389 Chapter 4 Form Examples 00000001 1 2 UTA o _ QUANTITY PART NO SUPPLIER 000000002 2 NO AL ACME INC IRVINE CA 92713 714 863 1900 EO c S A0000000003 TYPE TO 100 M SUPPLIER TM SERIAL ACME MOTOR IN IRVI o PART NO AO 00000004 10 amt NU UM p A2 QUE UOI Figure 65 Auto Increment Fields Example am EEG ELLO DUE 390 Example Auto Increment Fields Form Exercise In the following example you will create and execute a form Using character scaling discussed in detail on page 144 on a 60 x 72 dot per inch dpi grid your form will include the following abox e asetofcorners e vertical lines e alphanumeric data e horizontal lines abarcode This exercise will help you become familiar with the IGP PGL by taking you through 14 steps to bui
85. Codes SH SC logoname ROT DISK STOP 98 Defines the starting row of the logo The SR and SC parameter specifies the location for the logo based on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the logo The SC and SR parameter specifies the location for the logo based on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Identifies a previously defined logo by name for use on the form Enter the logo name exactly as used to define and store the logo This logo name is not entered when the GFn parameter is used Optional parameter for images scanned in orientations other than upright Either CW for 90 degree clockwise rotation CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation or INV for Inverted characters 180 degree rotations or NOR for normal rotation If not specified the rotation will be the rotation when it is defined in NORMAL mode When specified this option will override the rotation option specified in NORMAL mode with LOGO command Optional parame
86. Control Code 150 Ud 151 Meals UMEN 153 Table of Contents 9 Ba Godes 157 OLEIN A utente niin ide 157 User Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios 159 User Defined Variable Ratios for Postal Barcodes 160 PDF Character Sizes PDF LOC 161 Magnification 163 Bar Codes ater usb 168 Australian 4 Stalte 5 een 168 Aztec Barcode aces Wai 174 BG412 BARGCODE eee atis rd dieti idera 179 Codab arz metes test tb to at E mosse code a 183 P EI 188 Code 39 denies 191 Code 93 cerne ed dtt teme ee tite petat 199 Code 128A 128B and 128 206 tot notru eden 218 eset edente ait EE Ete 224 Wu 231 3917128 t ART e 238 252 GST 261 nne eee eae ree 271 Intelligent Mail 4 State 273 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 German 1 2 5 and 14 277 ED AT 283
87. D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE MSI Designates bar code type MSI enter MSI n Designates the type of check digit combinations for the bar code Replace n with one of the following codes to specify the check digit A single digit modulo 10 followed by a second modulo 10 digit B single digit modulo 11 followed by a single modulo 10 digit C single digit modulo 10 D single digit modulo 11 DIR MAG MSI Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 in
88. Data Field OCR B STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command PLESSEY VSCAN X2 H12 DARK 32 54 Vert Dark PLESSEY Mag 2 H 1 2 at SR 32 SC 54 24688642 Data Field PDF A Upper Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE PLESSEY 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 27 SC 54 24688642 SR 32 gt c 1 d Figure 46 Sample Plessey Bar Codes 322 POSTNET The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 47 and Figure 48 and described on the following pages The POSTNET code can be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4 inch area across the length of the mail piece Return Address Area Postage Area ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA SR SC POSITION ELE Hmm 1 QUIET ZONE 1 1 QUIET QUIET 1 START BAR CODE DATA FIELD STOP 1S ZONE CODE CODE ZONE i UIET ZONE te rte aia Ae pee duis uu J CHECK DIGIT NOTE Illustration is not to scale Figure 47 POSTNET Structure NOTE Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation 323 Chapter 3 Codes Postage Area CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION lt is lt a lt ui c o o lt Q o m am
89. Example Dynamic 381 Example Auto Increment Fields 388 Form Exercise eaten nip pereat 391 Creating A Box And Corners 392 Adding Horizontal And Vertical 394 Adding Fixed Alphanumeric 395 Adding A Bar 397 nce da er dado ad ect 399 Creating A 090 401 8 403 Page Layout Considerations 2 2 403 Planning The Form 4038 Creating A Form And Adding Form Components 407 Directory 1 nennen nnne nene 411 6 bc e tuse teri 411 Del te Comrmarid ident it ter to eae Duda 412 cst EN 412 Solving Program Errors ssssssssseseeeeeeeneeeneen nnne 413 Exatmple tno tois BR Ou eee 4138 Table of Contents 5 Multinational And International Character Sets 415 Multinational Character 415 Supported Character 415 Character 416 Making Character Substitutions 2 416 Double Byte Character 419 Accessing Characters and Character
90. FIM PDF417 and Maxicode X1 n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a Planet and PostNet X1 n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a X1A n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a X1B n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a X1C n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a 167 Chapter 3 Codes Bar Codes The rest of this chapter describes each of the bar codes available with the IGP emulation Australian 4 State The Australian 4 State structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following pages r r 71 QuiETI QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION 1 ZONE gt gt 1 1 CCW CW OPTIONAL READABLE DATA I FIELD GUARD gt GUARD BAND BAND 1 1 QUIET 1 QUIET I ZONE ZONE HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT gt SR SC POSITION e mum e IE Em ame Em um mum mE me 1 1 GUARD BAND 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET EI OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION Ne e OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD i HEIGHT INV QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE GUARD BAND eee res J Figure 8 Australian 4 State Structure 168 Australian 4 State The Australian 4 State bar code supports the Australian Postal Service Australian 4 State bar codes are similar
91. Form mode commands design forms all form components and bar codes The forms are not printed in the Create Form mode forms are printed in the Execute Form mode after all form design is completed To begin form design access the Create Form mode using the Create command The Create command is always used to enter the Create Form mode to begin form design Remember that the CREATE command must be entered in UPPERCASE Each element has its own specific set of commands and parameters that determine size location and content Listed in alphabetical order Create Form mode commands are summarized in Table 2 and fully described on the referenced pages The following commands are included for compatibility and are not recommended for use CUT ENQUIRY SMODE and XON Print Boundaries Print area boundaries exist for the paper size selected All Create Form mode commands require you to identify the location for the components in your form Boundary checking for form elements is performed only when the form length is specified This ensures that forms can be created regardless of the type of paper you have loaded or margins you have set The IGP PGL checks the boundaries before the form is executed to assure that it fits on the loaded paper size If the debug option is used in the create statement the boundaries are checked against the current paper size Refer to Appendix C for more information regarding page boundary guidelines Table 2 Crea
92. Format BARCODE QRCODE DIR X D n Tn En Mn I5 Nn Rm BEn L DARK SR SC D Data Field D STOP Parameter Description QRCODE Designates bar code type QR Code DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a bar code Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the bar code is horizontally oriented X D n Optional parameter that designates the x dimension width of a single square data module in IGP dots or printer dots if option D is used Values range from 1 to 1000 printer dots The y dimension is calculated by converting the printer dots in the x direction to printer dots in the y direction The default value is 4 Tn Optional parameter that designates the QR code model There are three models of QR code Model 1 is the original model developed Model 2 is an enhanced form of the symbology Model 3 or Micro QR is a compact version of the symbology Set T to the following variables depending on the selected model 1 Model 1 2 Model 2 default 3 Micro QR 333 Chapter 3 334 Bar Codes En Optional parameter that designates the error correction capabilities of the bar code There are four levels of error correction available 0 High density Level L which provides 7 error correction capability 1 Standard Level M which provides 15 error correction capability
93. HIBC represents two kinds of information Primary and Secondary Identification Primary Identification represents product identity and Secondary Identification represents the attributes of Lot or Batch Code Serial Number and Expiration date Each structure has its own barcode data format HIBC can be encoded in Code 128 Code 39 or UCC 128 symbology HIBC Barcode Command Format BARCODE C3 9 or C128A or C128B or C128C HIBC DIR MAG Data Field PDF STOP HIBC Enter HIBC to print HIBC encoded barcode Check Digit A mandatory modulo 43 check digit is inserted at the end of data for both Code 39 and Code 128 symbology Data Field The data field is a variable length consisting of only the following characters 1 9 2 amp and space For barcode PDF is preceded with a Flag Character which is an identifier used to differentiate HIBC symbols from other non healthcare related barcode symbols A pair of asterisks encloses the human readable field including the check digit For example if the user enters PDF 123BJC5D6E71 the barcode data will print as A123BJC5D6E71G HIBC Encoded in UCC128 When encoding HIBC barcode in UCC 128 HIBC is essentially a UCC 128 barcode The encoding uses the same module 10 check digit and data format The only addition is an Application Identifier parameter For Primary Data Structure use AI 01 and for Secondary Data Structur
94. ICNT and the Incremental value as described in the Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command described on page 80 The optional incremental reset count parameter Enter IRST and the reset value as described in the Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command described on page 80 Optional parameter that specifies to recall the form from Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK To recall the form from the SD Card or Expanded Memory Cartridge enter EMC This option is not required since the printer automatically searches DRAM the Expanded Memory Cartridge and Flash See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 Optional parameter to use the EVFU to overlay data onto the form EVFU Data is not part of the Execute command It is shown in the command sequence to indicate that actual EVFU data can be entered following the Execute command Enter EVFU data as described in Appendix D and on page 76 cc AF m D ASCII text D The Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command Enter the dynamic alphanumeric data during the Execute Form mode as described in Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 77 cc BF m D data D The Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command Enter the dynamic bar code data during the Execute Form mode as described in Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 cc DFn D data D Refer to RFWTAG on page 128 cc AFn lt DFn gt Prints RFID tag data as ALPHA TEXT refer to RFWTAG page 128 for a
95. IRST or ICNT parameter value was found in the Execute command The value must range from 1 through 65 535 Not defined Incremental STEPMASK STARTDATA mismatched The STARTDATA value must be A Z or 0 9 when the STEPMASK value is a value from 0 9 Miscellaneous Errors 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 Data Matrix barcode sizing parameter illegal or too small for data Data Matrix barcode format ID parameter is illegal Data Matrix barcode ECC type is illegal PMODE or SMODE not the first command in the CREATE mode PMODE or SMODE syntax error PMODE or SMODE printer type PT parameter error PMODE or SMODE scaling parameter error PMODE or SMODE exit mode EM parameter error PMODE entries exceeded maximum 8 146 149 Not defined 458 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Multinational Character Set Errors 150 ISET character selection parameter n error An ISET character set selection parameter value between 0 and 31 or 1100 to 1103 was expected Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha character See Chapter 5 151 USET decimal input error in input parameter The USET command was expecting a decimal parameter and either received none or received an alpha character 152 USET character set n parameter error A USET character set selection parameter value between 1 and 8 was expected Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha character 153 USET subs
96. PCX raster data CC RASTEREND STOP NOTE The logos defined in CREATE mode are independent of the forms being defined at the same time The logo can be used by other forms and must be deleted by using the RESET or DELETE LOGO command cc The Special Function Control Code LOGO The Logo command enter LOGO LOGODEF The CREATE mode LOGODEF command enter LOGODEF logoname Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the logo Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable Logo Name characters All future references to this logo Delete Logo or Logo Call commands must use this name If a logo is defined with the same name as a logo already existing in memory the newly defined logo will replace the existing logo PCX The command denoting raster data in PCX format enter PCX TRIM Optional parameter that removes extra white space bounding the image which saves memory inside the printer Also helps position the image in an IGP PGL form Enter TRIM ROT Optional parameter for images scanned in orientations other than upright Enter either CW for 90 degrees clockwise rotation CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation or INV for inverted characters 180 degrees rotations This parameter is not for printing rotated logos but rather for handling scanned rotated images Logos are rotated automatically to match the current page orientation when they are called from an IGP PGL form being executed Comments
97. PGL functions e Inthe Create Logo and Create Form modes the printer produces graphics such as forms logos bar codes and alphanumeric data e Configuration mode allows you to select specific IGP PGL operations for running IGP PGL files on your printer e The Execute mode is the IGP PGL printing mode which controls when the actual printing of the bar codes and graphics occurs Quiet Mode In this mode the host passes all data to the LinePrinter emulation without any IGP PGL interpretation The IGP PGL is disabled and all IGP PGL commands are ignored The IGP PGL looks only for the LISTEN command Normal Mode Normal mode commands print data in a line printer format until a Special Function Control Code SFCC is detected Commands accessible in the Normal mode are summarized in Table 1 on page 17 and fully described on the referenced pages Some Normal mode commands can also be used in other modes Compressed Print Expand Ignore Select Format and Vertical Line Spacing which are Normal mode commands can also be used in the Execute Form mode the Multinational Character Set command can be used in the Normal or Create modes Carriage Return Form Feed Line Feed and Paper Slew commands also operate in the Normal mode NOTE All IGP PGL commands must be entered in UPPERCASE and each command line must be followed immediately by a line feed or carriage return with line feed terminator a paper motion command or an i
98. PGL in Create Macro mode where macros can be defined Macros are a collection of Create Mode commands that can be included within the Create Form mode as necessary NORMAL cc MACRO macroname DISK Commands MACROEND cc MACRO macroname DISK Commands The Special Function Control Code The Macro Create command enter MACRO Declares the macro name by which it will be referenced Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the macro Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable Macro Name characters All future references to this macro Delete Macro or Macro Call commands must use this name If a macro is defined with the same name as a macro already existing in memory the newly defined macro will replace the existing macro An optional parameter to specify where the macro is stored If not used then the macro is stored only in DRAM Enter DISK to store in Onboard PCB Flash Enter EMC to store the form to the SD card or External Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 Store as many Create Mode commands as desired PGL will not interpret the commands at this time but instead wait until they are requested in the Macro call MACROEND Declares the end of the Create Macro mode 103 Chapter 2 Command Codes Example The following macro HEADER defines a portion of the form to be declared within Create Mode form The macro will be stored in Extended Memory MACRO HEADE
99. PGL memory exists for storing the SETUP routine Insufficient memory to store the form The directory is full or no more room exists in the IGP PGL memory for another form When this occurs the IGP PGL automatically reverts to the Normal mode To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms that are no longer required Execute Errors 70 71 72 EXECUTE form count parameter FC error This error occurs when the parameter specifying the number of blank forms to print was entered incorrectly When this error occurs the IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode Form count can be from 1 through 65 535 EXECUTE DELETE form or file not found in the directory An attempt was made to execute or delete a form which does not exist in the forms directory When this error occurs the IGP PGL reverts to the Normal mode EXECUTE EVFU load error This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode while programming the EVFU If more channels than lines per physical page are specified during a load sequence this error is generated and the IGP PGL automatically reverts to the Normal mode 447 Chapter 6 448 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 EXECUTE EVFU terminator invalid This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode The EVFU LOAD is missing an END LOAD code If the line terminator cannot be deciphered an error is generated and the IGP PGL reverts to the No
100. PION command skips to a specified print line When data bit 8 is set low the PION command prints data characters PIOFF The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction Off command enter PIOFF When this command is sent 8 data bits are allowed for character data because data bit 8 is disabled as the paper instruction Subsequent occurrences of data bit 8 in the data stream cause printing from the extended character set Paper Instruction PI Enable Disable Purpose Enables or disables use of the PI line using a parallel I O device This command does not enable disable PI line sensing it enables or disables use of the sensed PI line Mode NORMAL Format cc EN PI or cc DIS PI cc The Special Function Control Code EN PI The Enable command enter EN PI When this command is enabled the IGP PGL senses PI line the 8 bits of data are interpreted as a paper instruction command and the PI line itself is ignored DIS PI The Disable PI command enter DIS PI When the Disable Pl command is sent the 8 bits of data are interpreted as printable characters and not as a paper instruction command 111 Chapter 2 112 Command Codes PCX Logo Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode where logos can be defined using the PCX file format Mode NORMAL CREATE Format NORMAL cc LOGO logoname PCX TRIM ROT DISK PCX raster data CC RASTEREND END Format CREATE LOGODEF ogoname PCX TRIM ROT T
101. Plessey Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER j GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 317 Chapter 3 318 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent each character The structure is four wide elements bars or spaces and four narrow elements Each character contains four data bits with each 0 bit made up of a narrow bar wide space arrangement and each 1 bit made up of a wide bar narrow space arrangement Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit If specified a logical division check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning Plessey Plessey Command Format BARCODE PLESSEY DIR MAG Hn m 1 4 DARK SR SC D data field D
102. Reserved 1098 Farsi CP 858 Azeri 1285 Euro 417 Chapter 5 Multinational Character Sets Table 51 Multinational Character Sets and Set Values continued OXX 1XX 2XX 3XX AXX 5XX exx 7XX Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc 17 Reserved Lith CP 773 18 Reserved Serbo Croatic 1 19 Reserved Serbo Croatic 2 20 Reserved CP 774 21 Reserved CP 775 22 Reserved ISO 8859 4 23 Reserved 24 31 User Defined Sets Table 52 Substitution Set Hex Values Character Substitution Hex Value Set U S ASCII 21 22 28 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E Danish C6 D8 C5 BO E6 F8 Dutch 80 81 English A3 Finnish A4 C4 D6 C5 E4 F6 E5 FC French EO FB E7 A7 F4 EA E9 F9 E8 EE German A7 C4 D6 DC E4 F6 FC DF Italian A7 BO E9 83 F9 EO F2 E8 EC Norwegian A4 C9 C6 D8 C5 DC E9 E6 F8 E5 FC Spanish 82 D1 D5 A1 E3 F1 F5 BF Swedish A4 C9 C4 D6 C5 DC E9 E4 F6 E5 FC Turkish 84 C7 E7 85 86 D6 DC 87 88 89 Fe FC 8A 418 OCR Character Sets Double Byte Character Set The Double Byte Character set accesses one of the four double byte character sets GB Big5 Hangul KSC5601 and Kanji SJIS listed in Table 53 Table 53 Double
103. STOP HORZ 2 10 11 4 79 5 1 6 4 79 1 8 6 4 79 STOP OFF EXECUTE LOGOGRID 1 469 D Page Boundaries Paper Selection and Maximum Values Most Create Form mode commands require you to identify specific form boundaries using the SH SC EH EC parameters This appendix addresses the page boundaries affecting IGP PGL products for both cut sheet page printers and continuous form printers All printers have maximum print boundaries according to the printer type and paper size selected Refer to your printer User s Manual for the specific page boundaries associated with your printer Table 60 shows the print boundaries for page printers using several different widths and lengths Note that while both cut sheet page printers and continuous form printers have specific maximum width values based on paper size continuous form printers are not bound by the same maximum page ength values on a continuous form printer if you specify a page length exceeding the actual paper size the form will continue to print until it is completed The maximum dot values such as those shown in Table 60 are necessary to determine the maximum printable area on your form for your printer when modifying top bottom margin settings or offsetting the values for left margin print positions The following pages explain how to determine the Top Bottom Margin and Left Margin requirements for your printer Create Form Mode
104. The Form Layout 7 BERENE ERE x APT as Sud 7 15 THU permet HH HR E HA et C L uM L LLLI LLLLLLELLTITLELITET I PEEEFERFT EE 0 THREE H L L Hd mM L HL ESEE TTT TT eee ERE LE GER ERR EE RR ER RR REED RT INGE RRS es ee i EETLIRSRBEENEESEHEEESHREBSEESEERER ELL 35 TII br capere ae eet melee n an La FE SERESUEPBFERPLEBLPEPPLL T REN eels TTT IIIT 50 tHE E ERE Te ants aan COREA RES 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 55 Figure 71 Sample Fo
105. There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included 245 Chapter 3 Codes BFmL DARK SH SC D 246 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with the maximum number of character
106. There are two ways to program the ACS memory area One is to write to the ACS memory area directly with RFWTAG The other is to use the LOCK option while writing to other memory banks If ACS is not previously locked then LOCK option will lock the memory bank and also write the passcode to ACS and lock ACS When write to ACS with RFWTAG ACS is not automatically locked To lock ACS use LOCKn with RFWTAG where the passcode n should be the same as the write data to ASC 8 There is only one passcode the content of ACS memory bank for each tag The same passcode is used to lock or unlock any memory bank in that tag 9 For LOCKn and UNLOCKn the passcode n which includes the dynamic format lt DFn gt does not accept incremental data This also applies to the ACS and KIL memory banks The write data to the ACS and KIL memory banks do not accept incremental data because the ACS memory bank contains passcodes for LOCK and UNLOCK operations and the KIL memory bank contains a killcode to kill a tag Incremental data do not apply to passcodes or killcodes 10 When LOCK lt DFn gt and UNLOCK lt DFn gt are used in the same form with the same dynamic data the passcode the dynamic format lt DFn gt needs to be a different dynamic number for LOCK and UNLOCK since it is designed with a unique dynamic number can be linked to only one object type In this case LOCK is linked to RFWTAG object and UNLOCK is linked to RFRTAG object Although bot
107. They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar code two characters are interleaved paired bars are used to represent the first character in the pair and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair German 2 5 and ITF 14 are special cases of Interleaved 2 5 bar codes While Interleaved 2 5 has a variable data field German 2 5 is restricted to 11 or 13 digits and ITF 14 is restricted to 13 digits Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Interleaved 2 5 can be printed with or without a check digit but German 2 5 and ITF 14 have the check digit automatically included Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 Command Format BARCODE 1 2 5 CD or I25GERMAN or ITF14 2 84 MAG Hn m BEn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE 1 2 5 CD Designates bar code type Interleaved 2 5 enter 1 2 5 To calculate and plot the optional modulo 10 check digit with the bar code symbol autom
108. advances the print position to the next line identified by the channel 12 code If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory a single line feed is executed when a VT code is sent 481 Appendix E Paper Motion using the EVFU End Load Hex 1F or 6F The end load code terminates the channel storage and saves the EVFU in memory Refer to Table 62 or Table 63 on page 483 and page 484 respectively for the appropriate end load code Channel codes in excess of 92 channels received prior to the end load code cause an error Using the EVFU Sending the appropriate EVFU channel code to the printer causes any data in the buffer to print and move the print position to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory To recognize a data byte as an EVFU instruction one of the following sets of criteria must be met 1 The PI line must be enabled and set high 2 Bits 7 and 6 can be set to 1 or 0 and 3 Data bit 5 must be 0 not set OR 1 The PI line must be disabled or low 2 Bits 7 and 6 must be 0 not set and 3 Data bit 5 must be 1 set Given these conditions the lower four bits of a byte specify the EVFU channel number Table 62 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes when the PI line is enabled Table 63 lists the EVFU channel and their equivalent data bytes when the PI line is disabled 482 Using the EVFU Table 62 EVFU Codes PI Line Enabled ASCII Data
109. also prevent the PDF to being reduced to an undesired size NOTE Please refer to the AIM Specification document for detailed information about this barcode RSS14 Example 1 CREATE RSS14 792 BARCODE RSS14LIM XRD8 8 10 5 011234567890123 PDF A STOP BARCODE RSS14STK XRD10 10 20 5 011234567890123 PDF A STOP END EXECUTE RSS14 1 01212345678901231 01212345678901231 5514 2 55 432 ALPHA 3 3 2 2 UPC EAN COMPOSIT 04 3 1 1 UPCACOMP 11 3 1 1 UPCECOMP 20 3 1 1 UCCACOMP 04 22 1 1 UCCCCOMP 11 22 1 1 EAN13COMP 20 22 1 1 EAN8COMP STOP BARCODE UPCACOMP X0 5 5 3 12345678901 Composite data for UPCA barcode STOP BARCODE UPCECOMP 12 3 1230000045 Composite data for UPCE barcode STOP GS1 Databar 259 Chapter 3 Bar Codes BARCODE UCCACOMP XRD2 2 50 21 3 12345678901 Composite data Height STOP BARCODE UCCCCOMP 5 22 12345678901 Composite data Height STOP BARCODE EAN13COMP 12 22 12345678901 Composite data STOP BARCODE EAN8COMP 21 22 1234567 Composite data for STOP END EXECUTE RSS 1 NORMAL for UCCA barcode userdef Linear for UCCC barcode Default Linear for EAN13 barcode EAN8 barcode UPC EAN COMPOSIT UCCCCOMP UPCACOMP BEES UPCECOMP UCCACOMP n ds i EE E X 7 n n TE 171 fil 5
110. be 0 99 999 The Al 11 production date has no limitations 01 310x and 13 The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The Al 310x metric weight must be 0 99 999 The Al 13 packaging date has no limitations 01 320 and 13 The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 320x english weight must be 0 99 999 The Al 13 packaging date has no limitations 01 310 and 15 The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The Al 310x metric weight must be 0 99 999 The Al 15 best before date has no limitations 255 Chapter 3 Codes Table 27 Various Encoding Methods and Characteristics for RSS 14 Expanded Al Element Strings Description 01 820x and 15 The AI 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 320x english weight must be 0 99 999 The AI 15 best before date has no limitations 01 310 and 17 The AI 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 310x metric weight must be 0 99 999 The AI 17 expiration date has no limitations 01 320 and 17 The 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 320x english weight must be 0 99 999 The 17 expiration date has no limitations Data Field for other RSS 14 Variations Format of the Data Field primary data All other RSS 14 types not including RSS 14 Expanded have primary data that is restricted to a maximum of
111. character Only hexadecimal characters are allowed The data must contain exactly 48 hexadecimal characters The data must be followed by a line terminator END Ends the BLOCKLOAD command Downloading A User Defined Overlay Set Purpose The OSET command allows the user to create a user defined overlay character set Mode PGL NORMAL mode Format cc OSETn ca fa END cc Represents the Special Function Control Code SFCC OSET The user defined Overlay Set command n Selects the overlay character set number The range is from 1 to 8 The overlay set number 1 through 8 corresponds to the ISET character set selection 16 through 23 426 Activating User Defined Overlay Set The ASCII character cell address in the current character set that will have its contents replaced by the character located in the font address fa The range is 33 through 255 decimal Locations 0 through 32 are control characters and the space character which are non replaceable characters The decimal address of the character code point in the character table that will replace the current contents of ca The value may range from 33 to 65 535 Refer to the Character Table Appendix C in the LP Programmer s Reference Manual to determine which locations are used or unused Addresses 0 32 are not allowed to avoid confusion between control characters and printable characters Multiple ca fa lines can be defined with a si
112. characters 165 characters 182 characters 200 characters not supported 3 characters 7 characters 11 characters 15 characters 20 characters 26 characters 32 characters 38 characters 62 characters 53 characters 61 characters 69 characters 78 characters 88 characters 98 characters 108 characters 119 characters 131 characters Table 35 ECC 140 Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 17 X 17 19 X 19 21 X21 23 X 23 25 X25 27 X 27 29 X 29 31X31 33 X 33 35 X 35 2 characters 6 characters 12 characters 17 characters 24 characters 30 characters 38 characters 46 characters 54 characters 64 characters 1 character 4 characters 8 characters 11 characters 16 characters 20 characters 25 characters 30 characters 36 characters 42 characters 1 character 3 characters 5 characters 7 characters 10 characters 13 characters 16 characters 20 characters 24 characters 28 characters Table 35 ECC 140 Characteristics GS1 Datamatrix Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 37 X37 39 X 39 41X41 43 X 43 45 X 45 47 X47 49 X 49 73 characters 84 characters 94 characters 106 characters 118 characters 130 characters 144 characters 49 characters 56 characters 63 characters 70 characters 78 characters 87 characters 96 characters 32 cha
113. code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the IGP The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Code 128A Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set 64 ASCII characters and 32 control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Code 128B Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set 96 ASCII characters and seven control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Code 128C Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent 100 pairs of numeric digits 00 through 99 and 3 control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol 207 Chapter 3 208 Bar Codes Data Field For HIBC barcode the data filed is a variable length consisting of only the following characters 1 9 A Z and space NOTE The He
114. continue normally To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with corner elements that are no longer required CORNER starting column SC gt ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the corner command is greater than or equal to the right ending column parameter CORNER starting row SR ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the corner command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter 443 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Alpha Errors 40 ALPHA leading and trailing delimiters mismatched The leading delimiter printable character of the actual text string was not matched with an ending delimiter before the line terminator was found 41 ALPHA starting row SR out of bounds The starting row parameter in the Alpha command will cause the text string to print either above or below the limits of the form NOTE Expanded print text strings expand up from the specified row This could cause an attempt to print the text string above the top of the form and generate the error message 42 ALPHA starting column SC out of bounds The starting column parameter in the Alpha command is either extending the alpha string beyond the left margin of the form or the starting column parameter plus the actual length of the text is extending the string beyond the right margin of the page 43 ALPHA string length gt 255 characters The string contains more than 255 characters 44
115. count of 1 NORMAL SC 20 a Pd 5 40 Figure 49 Sample POSTNET Bar Code 328 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX PostBar and Royal Mail KIX PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes like POSTNET are used for mailing applications However these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit except with the KIX format see below PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that comprise the bar code For PostBar you are responsible for encoding the address adding the start and stop codes and supplying the appropriate check digit Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm border on each side of the bar code Start Stop Code The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code Data Field For PostBar a variable length data field of digits 0 through 3 are allowed to represent the bars Full Height 0 Ascender 1 Descender 2 and Tracker 3 For Royal Mail the dat
116. data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an
117. data preceding a command is printed or ignored All IGP PGL commands begin with the Special Function Control Code SFCC and end with a valid line terminator When the command does not end with a valid line terminator it must end with the SFCC to form an inline command line This syntax applies only to the commands in Normal mode Example DIRECTORY DELETE LOGO ALL DIRECTORY Another inline command syntax is to replace the valid line terminator with the inline terminator command CR LF FF or LT and to enclose the entire command line with the SFON SFOFF command This syntax applies to all PGL commands Example SFON DIRECTORY LF DELETE LOGO ALL LF DIRECTORY LF SFOFF The following example is to use no motion line terminator LT to print two Normal mode texts on the same line with the different font SFON FONT FACE 93952 POINT 12 LT FONT FACE 92250 LTabcdefg LT SFOFF Line Terminator Each command line must be terminated by a line feed or a carriage return with a line feed or a paper motion command When an inline command is not followed by a valid line terminator it must also end with the SFCC The command line will not be accepted if not properly terminated Refer to your system User s Manual for your system keyboard and your printer configuration codes to determine which key s such as ENTER LINE FEED RETURN etc perform a line feed carriage return with line feed or form feed function Printable Char
118. enough room exists in the memory as indicated in the Dynamic Memory Available portion of the directory listing To print the directory open a file input the directory command exit the file and print For example Enter Format DIRECT FOM System Format DIRECTORY DIRECTORY PRINT DIRECT FOM System Format The Directory command can only be used when the IGP PGL is in the Normal mode Upon completion of the directory listing the IGP PGL returns to the Normal mode If the IGP PGL is not in the Normal mode input the Normal mode command before the Directory command Figure 74 shows a sample directory Form Directory Form Name Form Size Logos MAXI frm 7909 XO frm 2210 PRSYM frm 2210 frm 812 Logos on File Memory Used PLANE 1go 618 MK 1go 886 Forms Memory Used 13141 bytes Logo Memory Used 1504 bytes Total Memory Used 14645 bytes Dynamic Memory Available 4706048 bytes Figure 74 Directory Example 411 Chapter 4 Delete Command Delete Command 412 The Delete command deletes any individual form logo or macro from the Onboard Flash Memory The deletion of a form includes its directory entry and any alphanumeric or vector information associated with it The Delete command is used only when the IGP PGL is in the Normal mode Deletion of a logo includes its directory entry and its data in the logo storage area Deletion of a valid logo which is st
119. enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFmL DARK SH SC Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on
120. exercise 399 Logo call command 97 Logo errors 445 Logo grid 469 Logo mode create command 99 Logos IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Macro Call command 102 Macro Errors 458 Macro Mode Create command 103 Macros IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Magnification specifications 163 Magnification BC412 Barcode 182 Manual about 13 Matrix 283 Check Digit 284 command format 284 Data Field 284 example 288 Quiet Zone 284 Readable Data 284 Start Stop Codes 284 Maxicode 289 command format 289 Control characters 293 Data Field 289 example 294 Readable Data 289 Memory flash 24 Miscellaneous Errors 456 Miscellaneous errors 449 452 453 Mode Create Form 392 Execute Form 392 Modes of operation Create Form Mode 19 Create Logo Mode 21 Execute Form Mode 21 Normal mode 16 Quiet mode 16 Modes of operation IGP PGL 16 Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for S8CC 18 and SCC 14 UCC EAN 128 244 Modulo 103 Check Digit UCC EAN 128 244 MSI 295 Check Digit 296 command format 296 Data Field 296 example 299 Quiet Zone 296 Readable Data 296 Start Stop Code 296 Structure 295 Multinational character set charts 431 Multinational character set errors 454 Multinational Character Sets 415 accessing characters and character sets 419 Character address 416 Character set selection command ISET 423 character substitutions 416 double byte character set 419 International character sets 435 multi
121. field DFn previously defined 205 CIRCLE format or delimiter error in input parameters 206 ELLIPSE format or delimiter error in input parameters 207 ELLIPSE CIRCLE starting column SC out of bounds 208 ELLIPSSE CIRCLE ending column EC out of bounds 209 ELLIPSE CIRCLE starting row SR out of bounds 210 ELLIPSE CIRCLE ending row ER out of bounds 211 ELLIPSE CIRCLE border thickness LT error 212 Insufficient memory to store the ELLIPSE 213 Insufficient memory to store the CIRCLE 456 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 Miscellaneous Errors XML data stream element error XML data stream attribute error XML data stream data error XML data stream syntax error DIAGONAL format or delimiter error in input parameters DIAGONAL starting column SC out of bounds DIAGONAL ending column EC out of bounds DIAGONAL starting row SR out of bounds DIAGONAL ending row ER out of bounds DIAGONAL border thickness LT error Insufficient memory to store the DIAGONAL QRCode Invalid Barcode Model QRCode Invalid Error Correction Level QRCode Invalid Mask Number QRCode Invalid Data Entry Method QRCode Invalid Concatenation Mode QRCode Invalid Partition Number QRCode Invalid Total Partition Number QRCode Invalid Parity Data SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge is not installed or insufficient memory Illegal PC value not complying with EPC length RFWTAG PC
122. field needs to be followed immediately by EPC field The command is not supported Not defined PDF417 Invalid data in Macro Control Block RFID Block Permalock not supported for current Tag Type 457 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Macro Errors 240 MACRO name is not a legal file name or not found 241 Insufficient memory to store the MACRO 242 MACRO starting row SR is out of bounds 243 MACRO starting column SC is out of bounds 244 MACRO format error in input parameters 458 Compatibility Across Models Overview This appendix covers PGL command compatibility across different models All PGL commands and their parameters are processed regardless of model However some models have different features than others When a feature is not supported the command will be absorbed without any action This appendix will clarity commands that are processed versus those that are ignored NOTE Certain models such as T2N do not have the LinePrinter emulation These printers will not have the Quiet mode to pass data to the LinePrinter emulation Straight ASCII text can be printed only if the PGL is selected as the active and only emulation Certain commands such as CONFIG see page 54 and PAPER see page 107 have a significant number of different parameters that can be used Compatibility for these commands is provided in their respective command descriptions Checkmarked table cells in this section means ful
123. for 192 line forms The first line identification code channel code in the EVFU load data defines the first line on the form the second line identification code defines the second line on the form etc Each line must have a line identification code A single channel code is used repeatedly throughout a form to reserve blank lines between defined channel codes and to maintain the correct forms length These filler channels can be any channel number except channel code 1 which is reserved for the top of form and channel code 12 which is reserved as the vertical tab channel In the EVFU example which begins on page 485 filler channels are represented by a hex 11 code Calls are rarely made to filler channels because they do not specify a unique print position on the form Channel 1 The top of form code reserved as the first line on the form The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form After the memory is loaded a Form Feed code FF hex OC moves the paper to the next channel 1 top of form Channels 2 through 11 13 and 14 Used as general channel codes also referred to as line identification codes or as filler channels Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code When the operating program sends the channel code the print position moves to the line identified by the channel code Channel 12 Reserved as the vertical tab channel The vertical tab code VT hex 0B rapidly
124. for finding reading writing and deleting files This hierarchy is described below Printers with SD or EMC Capability For printers that support SD or EMC files can exist on one or more memory types SD EMC Onboard Flash Memory and DRAM The parameter DISK is used within different PGL commands to select Onboard Flash Memory as the permanent storage location The parameter EMC selects either Extended Memory Cartridge or SD card depending on the printer s capabilities A hierarchy for finding reading writing and deleting files is necessary and is described below Read NOTE For commands including EXECUTE MACRO and LOGO in create mode PRINT RECALL DIRECTORY FONT and XML data stream Regardless of which parameters are used all objects are first searched in DRAM When an SD card or EMC is installed the printer searches them along with Onboard Flash Memory regardless of the parameter EMC and DISK The search stops at the first occurrence when the file is found If the file is not found an error message is printed When the SD card or EMC is not installed only DRAM and Onboard Flash Memory are searched Printers without SD Capability Write NOTE For commands including CREATE LINK LOGO in normal mode SETUP MACRO in normal mode and FONTLOAD Regardless of which parameters are used all objects are stored in DRAM When an SD card or EMC is installed using the parameter EMC will also store the
125. for the Dynamic alphanumeric data must have been previously identified using the AFn L parameters of the alphanumerics command in the Create Form mode Inputting individual commands enters the new data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc AFn D ASCI text D sequence to complete as many data fields as you defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed 77 Chapter 2 78 Command Codes Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data Purpose Mode Format Incorporates the dynamic bar code data into a previously identified location of a form EXECUTE cc BFn D data field D cc The Special Function Control Code BFn Indicates a dynamic bar code field BF and its data n Enter BF and replace n with the number of the data field corresponding to the number used to identify the field when it was defined with the bar code command during the Create Form mode D The printable character quotation marks for example identifying the start and finish of the bar code data Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data fiel
126. form to add all the form components Modify the hand logo already on file as the HandCraft logo Use the Logo Grid in Appendix B and refer to Figure 72 which shows the dot positions of the hand logo with a boat added to the hand When dot positions or a range of dot positions are not specified the boat image in the hand emerges 3 Open a file named HNDCFT FOM to contain all the form information As shown in the following example use the Create Logo mode command name the logo HANDCRFT specify the logo height VL and width HL enter the dot positions used and end the Logo command Enter Format HNDCFT FOM System Format LOGO HANDCRFT 56 60 cc LOGO ogoname VL HL DISK 1 40 42 dot dott dot2 dot 2338 42 3 36 42 4 35 42 5 33 41 403 Chapter 4 404 Form Design 6 31 40 7 30 38 8 29 36 9 28 35 10 27 34 52 54 11 24 33 48 54 12 22 31 45 54 13 19 30 41 54 14 16 29 38 53 15 13 17 19 29 36 51 16 11 17 20 29 33 48 17 9 17 21 44 18 7 17 22 42 19 6 17 22 39 20 4 17 23 36 21 1 17 24 34 22 1 17 25 34 23 1 17 26 34 24 1 17 27 60 25 1 17 28 60 26 1 17 29 60 27 1 17 30 60 28 1 17 31 59 29 1 17 19 59 30 1 17 19 35 31 1 4 33 36 32 1 5 33 39 33 1 6 33 58 34 1 7 33 58 35 1 58 36 1 58 37 1 58 38 1 57 39 4 24 40 7 23 41 8 23 42 9 23 43 11 24 44 12 25 45 14 27 46 15 30 47 17 32 48 18 33 49 22 34 50 25 35 51 26 36 52 28 37 53 30 37 54 32 37 55 33 37 56 35 36 Planning
127. hex 30 through 39 The first character is interpreted as the number system character The left side of the data field or lower side on vertically oriented symbols can be encoded in either format A or format B as determined by the value of the number system character A bar code character is not produced for the number system character The number system character is derived from the left side data field encoding The right side of the data field or upper side on vertically oriented symbols and check digit are always encoded in format C Table 25 defines the left side data field format based on the number System character Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically in the OCR B font default unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter The human readable data field can be printed above or below the bar code symbol This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi
128. identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning 219 Chapter 3 Codes EAN 8 Command Format BARCODE n DIR SCB MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONTI STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE EAN8 Designates bar code type EAN 8 enter EANG Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern No center or right guard pattern exists DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented SCB This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length Enter SCB MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjus
129. inch box 72 5 characters at 12 08 cpi Stop box command End Create Mode 123 Chapter 2 124 Command Codes Printer Status Purpose Torequestthe printer status When the printer status command is sent to the printer data containing the printer status is sent back to the host Mode NORMAL Format cc STATUS cc The Special Function Control Code STATUS The printer status command Enter STATUS Comments 1 The printer status command will take effect when a snooper preparser is enabled Any of the following commands will enable the snooper for all ports You can also enable preparser by using the front panel Send the following command to the printer before sending the job CONFIG SNOOP STATUS PAR END CONFIG SNOOP STATUS ETH END CONFIG SNOOP STATUS SER END The STATUS command works if it is received from any port PAR ETH and SER are listed as compatible with old PGL commands To disable a snooper send the following command to the printer before sending the job CONFIG SNOOP OFF END 2 After the snooper is enabled the printer status command can be sent to the printer through any port 3 When the printer status command is sent to the printer a data string is sent back to the host through the serial port in the following format STATUS BUSY n 0 no data in buffer 1 data in buffer PAPER n 0 paper not out 1 paper out RIBBON n 0 ribbon not out 1 ribbon
130. is being used to control the forms length only the IGP PGL forms length parameter can be used in place of the EVFU The maximum number of EVFU channels is 192 e Changing the LPI unloads the EVFU 76 Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data Purpose Mode Format Incorporates the dynamic alphanumeric data into a previously identified location of a form EXECUTE cc AF m DJASCII text D cc The Special Function Control Code AFn Indicates a dynamic alphanumeric field AF and its data n Enter AF and replace n with the number of the data field corresponding to the number used to identify the field when it was defined with the Alphanumeric command in the Create Form mode D The printable character identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric data Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but will not be printed with the data ASCII text group of ASCII characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the standard ASCII printable characters except the character used as delimiters described in the D parameter The data appears on the form at the location identified by n NOTE Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with IGP PGL but it is recommended they are placed at the beginning Comments The location
131. is entered the host data can only be any IGP PGL command in NORMAL mode SETUPEND Finishes storing host data and returns the printer to the NORMAL mode Enter SETUPEND When SETUP is used for non XML driven form the formname is not given because the RESET command causes the setup routine to be executed the RESET command cannot be in the SETUP information or an infinite loop will occur If IGP PGL commands have not been added between the SETUP and SETUPEND commands the SETUP PTX file on the Onboard Flash Memory automatically deletes and no IGP PGL SETUP commands execute upon printer power up SETUP PTX is automatically created by the IGP PGL when the SETUPEND command is received When the SETUP PTX file is not in the Onboard Flash Memory no extra IGP PGL commands are performed on power up When SETUP is used for XML driven form the formname is given the DELETE FORM command frm used under SETUP to delete both FLASH or DRAM form cannot be the same name as the formname used in SETUP ALL cannot be used because XML form relies on the successful execution of frm which happens after the execution of the SETUP file nol 149 Chapter 2 150 Command Codes For XML driven form since both SETUP nol and LINK file Ink are stored only in FLASH the users can delete the flash files through the front panel option See the LINK command on page 94 for a description and example Example 1 for XML form SETUP TES
132. is used send a hex OC instead of FF to print multiple pages with new dynamic data INC 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 BOX 212 tos ANGELES CA 90051 95995 011233 P N HIRED UE AA 190204 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 To ABC CORPORATION 1234 ANYWHERE ST your TOWN 03498 AME SE 05997 456789 P N HARE AM 5 Example Dynamic Data INC 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 INC 101 BEACH RD AL 18v CA 97772 5 0 SOSH b 000535 P N LARA PAD 104523 ACME INC 15345 Barranca Parkway L Irvine CA 92618 1o 71 XYZ COMPUTERS 845 N ALLEN ST west BEND OR 87601 THE 05999 567890 P N UE AAU 103764 Figure 64 Dynamic Data Example 387 Chapter 4 388 Form Examples Example Auto Increment Fields The following program designed in accordance with current specifications for AIAG B 3 shipping label standards creates four automatically incrementing decrementing AIAG labels with alphanumeric and bar code data The printed output of this program is shown on page 390 AIAG BOX 1 31 2 1 55 2 66 5 STOP HORZ 1 38 5 1 66 5 1 44 9 1 40 1 49 10 1 40 STOP VERT 1 26 38 5 44 9 1 40 44 9 55 2 STOP ALPHA C15
133. length of the form If this error occurs the Vertical Duplication command is ignored and forms processing continues 64 65 66 67 68 69 Execute Errors CREATE scale factor parameter SCALE invalid Either a format error was detected or a parameter was specified incorrectly The vertical lines per inch can be specified as 1 to the target DPI The horizontal characters per inch can be specified only as 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 cpi If this error occurs the Scale command is ignored and forms processing continues CREATE page starting row PAGE SR out of bounds When you specify the position of the page parameters with the Page command in the Create Form mode the row position specified will place the page number above or below the boundaries of the form When this error occurs the IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode CREATE page starting column PAGE SC out of bounds When you specify the position of the page parameters in the Create command the column position specified will place the page number outside the form boundaries When this error occurs the IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode CREATE STOP command missing This error occurs when the IGP PGL receives a new function command an End command or a mode command without receiving a Stop command The IGP PGL will continue to process subsequent commands correctly Insufficient memory to store the SETUP program No more room in the IGP
134. lt variable gt lt label gt lt labels gt Listen Purpose Disables the IGP PGL from the quiet state and enables the IGP PGL for standard operation The Quiet command is explained on page 125 Mode NORMAL Format cc LISTEN cc The Special Function Control Code LISTEN The Listen command enter LISTEN NOTE When the IGP PGL is in the quiet state the currently selected line printer emulation commands are active Refer to your printer s LinePrinter Plus Emulation Programmer s Reference Manual for a description of these commands Logo Call Purpose Mode Format Selects and positions previously defined logo s The logo itself is actually defined separately in the Create Logo mode The logo may be defined in any supported format CREATE LOGO GFn SR SC logoname ROT DISK STOP LOGO The Logo Call command enter LOGO GFn The optional dynamic field for identifying the logo location on the form If this parameter is used the actual logo name cannot be entered here it must be entered dynamically in Execute Form mode see page 79 Dynamically entering the logo name permits changes to the graphics without redefining the form To use this field perform the following steps a Enter GF b Replace n with a number from 0 through 512 to identify the logo location on the form The SR and SC parameters are used to specify the exact location of the logo identified by n 97 Chapter 2 Command
135. n is not specified an error message will print 423 Chapter 5 Accessing Characters and Character Sets Using the ISET command in the Execute mode declares the character set for use in conjunction with the dynamic data within that Execute command Fixed form data specified in the Create mode is not affected by an ISET command in the Execute mode The character set selected will remain in effect until another character set is selected NOTE See the Fonts section in the Commands chapter page 84 for information on the SYMSET command Table 55 Alternate Character Sets Character Set Name Windows Symbol AS 1 ITC Zapf Dingbats 100 D1 ITC Zapf Dingbats 200 D2 ITC Zapf Dingbats 300 03 ISO 60 Danish Norwegian DN DN PS ITC Zapf Dingbats DS DeskTop DT DT ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 EC94 E1 E1 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 E2 E2 ISO 8859 9 Latin 5 E5 E5 ISO 8859 10 Latin 6 ISO 69 French FR FR ISO 21 German GR GR ISO 15 Italian IT IT Wingdings L WD Legal LG LG Math 8 M8 M8 Macintosh MC MC PS Math MS MS Microsoft Publishing PB PB PC 8 Code Page 437 PC PC 424 Character Set Selection Command ISET Table 55 Alternate Character Sets Character Set Name eis PC 8 D N Code 437N PD PD PC 852 Latin 2 PE PE
136. no rounding to 8 heaviest rounding The default value is 0 This option is currently applicable for non impact printers only 47 Chapter 2 Command Codes STOP Stop indicates the end of the Box command enter STOP and the IGP PGL will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP PGL will wait for another set of Box command parameters Example The following program and example in Figure 4 defines two boxes To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Note the position of the ending row and column line thickness is not included BOX 3 24 16 51 63 One box three dot rows thick 2 44 48 46 58 One box two dot rows thick STOP 6 ROW 24 48 ROW 46 COLUMN 58 lt q ROW 51 COLUMN al Figure 4 Box Example 48 Boxes CREATE XYZ 432 BOX 2 5 5 10 20 5 STOP END EXECUTE XYZ NORMAL 49 Chapter 2 50 Command Codes Cancel Purpose cancel the print job immediately when the command is sent to the printer When received printing will stop and any data received prior to the CANCEL command will be cleared from the buffers Mode NORMAL Format cc CANCEL cc The Special Function Control Code CANCEL The cancel command Enter CANCEL Comment 1 The cancel command will take effect only when a snooper preparser is enabled Any of the follo
137. not print with the data There are two different ways the Maxicode data field can be formatted Standard Data Field The modes 2 and 3 have their primary message structured as shown in Table 40 The data following the primary message is the secondary message and has a free format 291 Chapter 3 Codes Table 40 Standard Data Fields character Title Data Positions 0 2 Class of Service Numeric 3 5 Country Code Numeric 6 14 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US OR 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 15 16 Separator gt A 17 Secondary Message Free Format UPS Shipping Data Field This syntax begins with seven encoded data characters followed by a date yy The first four characters are the Message Header and the next five are the Transportation Data Format Header The format of the Message Header is Rs The Transportation Data Format Header is 01Gs yy where yy is the year and G s and R s are control characters The structure is shown in Table 41 Table 41 UPS Shipping Data Fields Title Data Positions 0 3 Message Header gt Rs 4 8 Transportation Data Format 01Gs lt yy gt Header 9 17 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US or 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 18 Separator Gs 19 21 Country Code Numeric 22 Separator Gs 23 25 Class of Service Numeric 26 Separator Gs 27 Secondary Message As per the UPS Guide To Barcoding
138. number the commands should not be duplicated Reopen the file and input the following commands before the END command line but after the HDUP OFF command NOTE The IGP PGL will horizontally or vertically duplicate dynamic bar code or alphanumeric data fields if required This will also duplicate the n parameter identifying the dynamic data fields If unique data fields are required do not duplicate the commands BARCODE First bar code command C3 9 H7 BF1 8 DARK 15 1 10 4 Upper left 5 0 field assigned 1 C3 9 H7 BF1 8 DARK 15 1 10 4 PDF O Print the data field in OCR A font STOP Stop the first bar code command BARCODE New bar code command C3 9 H7 BF2 8 DARK 20 10 4 Upper left S N field assigned 2 PDF O STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF3 8 DARK 25 5 10 4 Upper left P N field assigned 3 PDF O STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF4 8 DARK 15 1 47 4 Upper right 5 0 field assigned 4 PDF O STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF5 8 DARK 20 47 4 Upper right S N field assigned 5 PDF O STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF6 8 DARK 25 5 47 4 Upper right P N field assigned 6 PDF O STOP Stop the bar code command 384 Example Dynamic Data Dynamic Alphanumeric Fields Identify the location of the dynamic alphanumeric fields using the alphanumerics command Input the following alphanumeric command lines after the HDUP OFF command and before the Create Form mode END line A separate alphanumerics command sequence is used in order to assign unique n
139. o Q Q lt NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Figure 48 POSTNET Structure VSCAN or CCW 324 POSTNET Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends 4 75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece In addition a minimum quiet zone of 0 040 inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start and stop codes are referred to as framing bars in POSTNET The start and stop codes are each one tall bar one identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bar code scanning in a left to right direction only Data Field The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5 digit field 50 bars for a 9 digit data field or 60 bars for an 11 digit data field The bars are grouped in sets of five Each set of five bars comprised of two tall bars and three short bars represents one of the five digits of the zip code plus the four digit zip code extension If the Advanced Bar Code is used an additional two digit code is also added to make an 11 digit data field Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Each bar height is either a tall full or short half bar representing a 1 or 0 respectively Each tall bar must be 125 inch
140. object there The parameter DISK will either write to Onboard Flash Memory or SD EMC based on the Storage Select front panel menu When an SD card or EMC is not installed the parameter EMC will result in an error message The parameter DISK however will write to Onboard Flash Memory regardless of the Storage Select menu setting Delete NOTE For commands including DELETE FONT DELETE FORM DELETE LOGO DELETE LINK DELETE MACRO RESET and OPTIMIZE Regardless of which parameters are used all objects are deleted from DRAM When an SD card or EMC is installed the parameter EMC will also delete the file from that location The parameter DISK deletes the file from either Onboard Flash Memory or SD EMC based on the Storage Select front panel menu When the SD card or EMC is not installed the parameter EMC causes an error message to print The parameter DISK however will delete data from Onboard Flash Memory regardless of the Storage Select menu setting Printers without SD or EMC Capability When the EMC parameter is included with a PGL command printers without SD or EMC capability will access Onboard Flash Memory instead since the EMC is not supported on these printers 25 Chapter 1 Flash Memory Storage 26 2 Commands IGP PGL Command Standards IGP PGL commands have many options and a specific format that you must follow to obtain the desired results Certain elements are standard for all IGP PGL commands
141. of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data A single character data field to designate one of four available FIM patterns A B C or D Based on your application check with your Postal Service for more information enter one of the following FIM types A Used only on courtesy reply envelopes bearing a preprinted POSTNET bar code page 323 it requires a luminescent stamp or meter mark to be accepted in the facer canceler STOP FIM Example FIM B Used on Business Reply Mail Penalty Mail and Franked Mail without a preprinted POSTNET bar code and does not require luminescent indicia C Used on Business Reply Mail Penalty Mail or Franked Mail bearing a preprinted POSTNET bar code page 323 D Used on OCR readable mail usually courtesy reply window envelopes without a preprinted POSTNET bar code Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Figure 23 below illustrates a horizontal FIMB bar code generated by the following program without the POSTNET pr
142. of the same corresponding name will be retrieved from flash memory and executed in this order nol includes all the command in NORMAL mode frm includes all the command in CREATE mode and Ink includes all the command in EXECUTE mode nol is an optional file for printing XML forms but both frm and Ink are required for printing XML forms See the SETUP command on how to save nol files into flash memory See the CREATE command on how to save frm files into flash memory formname _ Identifies a previously defined form by name form name is not case sensitive PAGEn PAGEn is the same as the one listed in the EXECUTE command Refer to the EXECUTE command for a parameter description IRSTn IRSTn is the same as the one listed in the EXECUTE command Refer to the EXECUTE command for a parameter description Link DISK Enter DISK to save the LINK file into FLASH This parameter is required for the LINK command cc AFn D data D cc BFn D data D cc CFn D data D data The data will be the tag name defined in XML data file which will be replaced with the tag value defined in XML data file and be printed as print data on the label For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data cc IAFn idir STEP idir step RP Tn RSTn D STARTDATA D For incremental dynamic barcode data cc IBFn idir STEP idir step RP Tn RSTn D STARTDATA D For incremental dynamic radio frequency identific
143. or Density error 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 20 The optional compression parameter Cn which defines the horizontal pitch of the text was specified incorrectly The pitches currently available are 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 and 20 cpi Logo Errors 50 51 52 53 54 LOGO horizontal width HL gt 240 or dot col HL a The horizontal width of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 240 The IGP PGL automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs b A dot position specified in the logo program exceeds the specified horizontal width of the logo When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally LOGO vertical length VL gt 252 or dot row gt VL a The vertical length of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 252 The IGP PGL automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs b A dot row specified in the logo program exceeds the specified vertical length of the logo When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally LOGO hyphen syntax error in input parameters The beginning or ending dots are out of order or a parameter is missing The buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally Insufficient memory to create the LOGO No more room exists in IGP PGL memory to construct a logo for the size specified
144. or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented X D n Optional parameter designating the x dimension width of a single square data module in IGP dots or printer dots if the D option is used Enter X then the optional D parameter if necessary then a value from 1 through 1000 printer dots If the y dimension is not specified it is calculated by converting the printer dots in the x direction to printer dots in the y direction 261 Chapter 3 262 Bar Codes Y D n Cn Rn ECCn IDn BFmL Optional parameter designating the y dimension width of a single square data module in IGP dots or printer dots if the D option is used Enter Y then the optional D parameter if necessary then a value from 1 to 1000 printer dots If the x dimension is not specified it is calculated by converting the printer dots in the y direction to printer dots in the x direction Optional parameter that sets the number of columns in the symbol A value of 0 the default automates this process See Table 31 through Table 37 for the combination of columns and rows allowed and the maximum amount of data that can be encoded Optional parameter that specifies the number of rows in the symbol A value of 0 the default automates this process See Table 31 through Table 37 for the combination of columns and rows allowed and the maximum amount of data that can b
145. or boxes to 145 retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands 147 On Off SFOFF See Note on page 21 20 Modes of Operation Table 2 Create Form Mode Commands continued Command Mnemonic Description Page VERIFY VERIFY The command to verify data of a dynamic field 153 Create Logo Mode The Create Logo mode is used in the Create Form mode The Create Logo mode creates a logo design this predefined logo is then called into a form in the Create Form mode The logo must be defined before it is called Execute Form Mode The Execute Form mode prints forms created in the Create Form mode Execute Form mode commands are summarized in Table 3 and fully described on the referenced pages Carriage Return Form Feed and Line Feed commands also operate in the Execute Form mode Remember that the EXECUTE Form command must be entered in UPPERCASE and that a single line spacing or a line containing overlay data must separate an EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command NOTE Some systems pad the data stream with characters and spaces If the IGP PGL file on your system contains padded characters or spaces before the SFCC this data must be ignored before the IGP PGL can operate The Ignore Sequence IGON IGOFF command discussed on pag
146. or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 305 Chapter 3 306 Bar Codes D data field The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is not permitted The data field can contain any uppercase ASCII characters including carriage returns and line feeds The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 1024 bytes to minimize potential reading errors NOTE New lines i e carriage returns line feeds are allowed in the PDF417 data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input PDF417 Example STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Figure 41 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the following program CREATE PDF417 BARCODE Enter Create Form Mode Bar Co
147. out PRINT HEAD n n 0 print head down n 1 print head up COUNT n n the number of pages that remains to be printed Quiet GAP n 0 gap detected 1 gap not found HEAD HOT n n 0 head not hot n 1 head hot CUT COUNT n n number of times the cutter has cut PRINT DIST n n distance in inches printed by this print head PRCT COMPLETE n n percentage of last label that was printed when error occurred TOF SYNCED n 0 printer has not synchronized with TOF 1 printer has synchronized with TOF1 SENSED DIST n n sensed label length dots2 END The status response values depends on the printer model If the status value is not supported by a printer model it will return O for that status value Example The following example shows the format of the printer status command STATUS Quiet Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Quiet mode where all data passed to the LP emulation is unaffected by IGP PGL commands except for the LISTEN SFON SFOFF IGON IGOFF and PTX SETUP commands or another QUIET command Mode NORMAL Format cc QUIET cc The Special Function Control Code QUIET The Quiet command enter QUIET The IGP PGL remains in the quiet state until the Listen command is received Comments In the Quiet mode IGP PGL ignores all commands except LISTEN SFON SFOFF IGON IGOFF PTX_SETUP or another QUIET command All commands for the currently selected protocol in the LinePrinter will be inte
148. page NOTE Negative Left Margin configuration is a method of offsetting and printing an existing IGP PGL file which may otherwise require modification in order to orient the output on the page properly Use this option if your IGP PGL file was written for applications where the leftmost printable area is not designated as the first printable character column on the form B Maximum Character Column Maximum Horizontal Dot 511 Maximum Horizontal Print Area 510 dots Figure 77 Left Margin Example No Setting 474 Setting Left Margins A Bo Column a B Maximum Horizontal Dot Column ecomes Column 1 511 becomes 491 due to 20 offset Maximum Horizontal Print Area 490 dots Figure 78 Left Margin Setting 20 Example Becomes Column 1 Maximum Horizontal Dot Nonprintable area due to 20 left margin gt offset Maximum Horizontal Printable Area 510 dots Figure 79 Left Margin 20 Setting Example 475 Appendix D Paper Selection and Maximum Values 476 E Vertical Paper Motion Introduction There are three methods of advancing the print position with the IGP PGL which are explained in this appendix 1 Using line feeds or form feeds 2 Using the paper instruction line or 3 Using the Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU In impact printers print position is adjusted by vertical paper motion down the page Because no paper motion occurs during forms creation in non impact prin
149. page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 D data field PDF LOC FONT Code 39 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 20 except the SFCC The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable
150. pages Frc QuiETI QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 6 1 1 1 OPTIONAL I l DIGIT CCW i CW OPTIONAL i READABLE i i DATA FIELD OPTIONAL 1 7 CHECK DIGIT UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD Jt GUARD GUARD 4 GUARD BAND si QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT gt HEIGHT 1 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION cs ei UPPER GUARD BAND 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET mi LOWER GUARD BAND E OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND HEIGHT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE CODE ZONE Laa ee 1 INV E UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 58 UPCSHIP Structure 359 Chapter 3 360 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop co
151. parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included 201 Chapter 3 Codes BFmL DARK SH SC D 202 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page
152. parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 6 or 11 digits plus any add on data d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex
153. required for the interleaving process Consequently if an odd number of characters are entered in the data field a leading zero is added automatically The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Matrix FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by u
154. starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Notice the same starting row is used for all EXAMPLE characters and they are all aligned on the same baseline or bottom regardless of expanded or compressed parameters The string rotates around the point of intersection of the starting row and columns shown by the pinwheel E A rotated 10 cpi character establishes the baseline for all character sizes Alphanumerics ALPHA 36 37 4 4 36 41 2 3 36 44 2 2 36 46 1 1 M Single size character expanded font C13 36 47 0 0 P C15 36 48 0 0 L C17 36 49 0 0 E CW 36 60 2 2 CLOCK CW 42 60 4 4 WISE CCW 58 26 2 3 COUNTER CCW 45 5 26 2 2 CLOCK CCW 39 2 26 1 1 WISE INV 54 5 58 0 0 INVERTED R INV 54 5 49 0 0 REVERSE PRINT 45 48 0 0 E CW UC 45 48 0 0 e Lowercase converted to uppercase CCW 45 48 0 0 E INV 45 48 0 0 E STOP BES E XAnece ROW 39 2 gt COLUMN 37 COLUMN 49 COLUMN 48 ROW 45 mE E S I M 9 1 COLUMN 60 0313ANI ROW 54 5 ROW 58 COLUMN 58 COUNT ERCLOCK wise COLUMN 26 Figure 3 Alphanumeric Example 37 Chapter 2 38 Command Codes Alphanumerics Incremental Fields Purpose The incremental fields feature updates alphanumeric and bar code data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner
155. the Create Form mode STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the Execute command during the Execute Form mode Mode CREATE NOTE In the command format below incremental alphanumeric command parameters are shown in boldface type standard alphanumeric command parameters and optional non incremental parameters are shown in italics Format ALPHA E Cn WE n L T DIR UC DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SH SC VE HE STOP IAFn L Identifies this alphanumeric command as Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Field command The command parameter string identifies the incremental dynamic data field location on the form and defines the length of the alphanumeric data If these parameters are used the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters cannot be entered in the Create Form mode they are entered dynamically during the Execute Forms mode To use the incremental dynamic data field perform the following steps a 44 Enter IAF to specify an incremental alphanumeric dynamic data field Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the alphanumeric string location on the form The standard alphanumeric SF and SC command parameters specify the exact location of the field identified by n Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string STARTDATA ranging from 1 through 255 Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters in t
156. the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent See Note on page 21 Lines Diagonal DIAG Defines the location size and thickness of diagonal lines 90 Lines Horizontal HORZ Defines the location size and thickness of horizontal lines 91 Lines Vertical VERT Defines the location size and thickness of vertical lines 92 Logo Call LOGO Specifies the location of a previously defined logo 97 Logo Mode Create LOGODEF Defines vertical and horizontal length and dot placement for 99 logos Macro Call MACRO Specifies a macro to insert at a given horizontal and vertical 102 position within the form Multinational ISET Use a multinational character set or create a custom user 415 Character Set defined character set Page Number PAGE Defines the location for automatically incremented page 106 numbers Printer Mode PMODE Selects the print mode of the printer for the next set of data 121 and allows different print modes to be specified for use within the form Reset RESET Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP PGL memory or 127 the printer flash memory Reverse Print REVERSE Defines the location for white on black printing and selects 127 the background shade RFWTAG RFWTAG Specifies the RFWTAG command 128 RFRTAG RFRTAG Specifies the RFRTAG command 141 Scale SCALE Defines the vertical spacing and horizontal pitch for data 144 positioning in character or dot columns and rows Scaling SMODE Permits graphic elements such as corners
157. the type of media handling Enter MEDIA a space and either 0 for continuous mode 1 for tear off strip 3 for peel off mode 4 for cut mode paper is cut after printing each page 5 for rewind TAM MEDIA Specifies the type of media handling Enter MEDIA a space and either 0 for continuous mode 1 for tear off strip 3 for peel off mode 4 for cut mode paper is cut after printing each page T2N MIRROR Set the printer to print texts in mirror image Enter MIRROR NUM CODES Sets the number of the barcodes per page for the validator Same as the Number of Codes menu Enter NUM CODES a space and 0 for auto detect mode 1 through 99 specifies the number of barcodes on the page T5000r ODV only PAPOUT SENS Sets paper out sensor Same as the Paper Out Sensor menu Enter PAPOUT SENS a space and 0 for Transmissive or 1 for Reflective TAM T5000r PAUSE Sets the printer to pause offline after a specified number of physical pages printed Enter PAUSE a space and a number from 0 through 9999 0 no pause TAM T5000r PORTRAIT Prints in portrait mode Enter PORTRAIT v PRINT DIR Sets the printer print direction Enter PRINT DIR space and 0 to select Head First or 1 to select Foot First v REV SLEW IPS Specifies the slew speed in inches per second to allow the user to set the slew speed for reverse paper motion Enter REV SLEW IPS a spa
158. to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters 285 Chapter 3 Codes DARK SH SC D data field PDF LOC 286 Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors An even number of characters are
159. to change the starting data without changing the form definition program Additionally you can also change the increment parameters with each new job without changing the form definition program The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP bar code commands Use this command with the appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic incrementing of dynamic bar code data fields is required The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command format is shown and defined below Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type standard bar code command parameters and optional non incremental parameters are shown in italics BARCODE type DIR MAG Hn m IBEn L DARK SR SC PDF LOC FONT STOP IBFm L Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command The command parameter string identifies the incremental dynamic data field location on the form and defines the length of the bar code data If these parameters are used do not enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters in the Create Form Mode enter them dynamically during the Execute Form Mode To use the incremental dynamic data field a Enter IBF to specify an incremental bar code dynamic data field b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code string location on the form The standard bar code SR and SC command parameters
160. x 10 1378 1104 687 19 95 X 95 790 x 10 1511 1210 753 20 101 X 101 864 x 10 1653 1324 824 21 105 X 105 940 x 10 1801 1442 898 22 109 X 109 1020 x 10 1956 1566 976 23 113 X 113 920 x 12 2116 1694 1056 24 117 X 117 992 x 12 2281 1826 1138 25 121 X 121 1066 x 12 2452 1963 1224 26 125 X 125 1144 x 12 2632 2107 1314 27 131 X 131 1224 x 12 2818 2256 1407 28 135 X 135 1306 x 12 3007 2407 1501 177 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 17 Full Format Characteristics Layer 1 32 Layers Symbol Size 2222 8 29 139 139 1392 12 3205 2565 1600 30 143 143 1480 x 12 3409 2728 1702 31 147 X 147 1570 x 12 3616 2894 1806 32 151 X 151 1664 x 12 3832 3067 1914 178 Aztec Example CREATE AZTEC 792 BARCODE AZTEC FORMAT100 4 10 5 ABCDE511111 STOP END EXECUTE AZTEC 1 THERMAL BC412 BARCODE BC412 BARCODE The BC412 barcode was invented by IBM in 1988 to meet the needs of the semiconductor wafer identification application The word BC stands for binary code presence or absence of a bar and 412 means 4 bar modules in a total of 12 module positions in every character It is a one dimensional barcode that meets the following requirements small space easy scribing and robust decoding even if the barcode symbols are under poor light contrast It can achieve a density of 23 characters in less than an inch with a 3 3 mil bar width Comma
161. 0 1 2 or 3 An illegal FONT space value was used Only 0 1 2 or 3 constitute valid values Illegal FONT Block setting must be 0 1 2 or 3 Not defined PAPER CASSETTE command syntax error Invalid PAPER parameter error out of range or not supported Illegal FONT name format too long or not found Insufficient memory for font download Parameter out of bounds Not defined 455 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Bar Code Errors 180 Australian 4 state barcode invalid FCC 2 digits 181 Australian 4 state barcode invalid Sorting number 8 digits 182 Australian 4 state barcode invalid Customer Data 183 Aztec barcode invalid parameters or data 184 RSS barcode composite data or parameters are invalid 185 Not defined 186 Not defined 187 Not defined 188 Not defined 189 Not defined Miscellaneous Errors 190 RFID Command Syntax Error 191 Invalid RFID Data Length or tag field not supported 192 Out of Memory for RFID 193 Dynamic RFID data field RFn not previously defined 194 Non hexadecimal digit in HEX or EPC data field 195 Invalid Data Length for EPC 196 Writing RFID data on write protected tag 197 Writing RFID data beyond tag size 198 Dynamic RFID data longer than previously defined 199 Invalid RFID Data 200 Logo Length is longer than form length 201 Dynamic data field DFn not previously defined 202 VERIFY Command Syntax Error 203 Insufficient memory to store the VERIFY element 204 Dynamic data
162. 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 MSI X1 146 125 149 148 2 4 2 4 2 4 1 8 4 7 5 5 4 7 5 6 2 221 300 215 283 2 5 1 8 2 5 2 3 1 2 7 3 1 2 8 X3 320 425 300 422 2 2 2 2 3 1 9 2 3 1 8 2 3 1 8 X4 415 575 347 628 2 1 9 2 6 1 7 1 8 1 3 1 8 1 3 X5 517 726 450 696 1 9 1 9 2 3 2 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 X6 591 853 517 885 2 2 2 4 1 9 1 2 0 9 1 2 0 9 X7 689 954 602 1053 11 9 2 1 2 3 1 8 1 1 0 7 1 1 0 7 X8 738 1153 651 1154 2 1 9 2 5 1 9 0 9 0 6 0 9 0 6 Codabar X1 246 199 233 180 2 1 2 1 2 4 2 7 4 4 8 3 9 4 8 X1A 147 100 166 164 2 3 2 5 2 2 2 2 6 2 8 9 5 7 5 7 X1B 122 198 133 131 2 6 2 8 2 5 2 5 7 1 4 2 6 7 6 8 X1C 98 99 133 131 2 5 2 5 2 8 2 8 9 1 8 9 6 4 6 5 X2A 294 200 333 327 2 3 2 5 2 2 2 2 3 1 4 4 2 8 2 9 X2B 246 399 267 263 2 6 2 8 2 5 2 5 3 5 2 1 3 3 3 3 X4A 591 400 668 659 2 3 2 5 2 2 2 2 1 5 2 2 1 4 1 4 X4B 492 802 533 527 2 6 2 8 2 5 2 5 1 8 1 1 6 1 7 166 Mag nification Specifications Table 14 IGP Bar Code Specification Summary continued Magnification Narrow Element Width in 0 0001 inches Wide Narrow ratio Barcode Character Density cpi Parameter 553 dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300 dpi horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert Australian 4 State PostBar Royal Mail and INTMAIL X1 n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a X1A n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a n a BC412
163. 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 51 13 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 X4D 393 402 533 534 2 1 2 1 281 2 81 13 6 3 5 2 2 2 2 X4E 394 401 401 399 2 5 1 2 5 1 271 2 71 3 2 3 1 3 3 394 401 400 401 2 5 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 13 2 3 6 3 3 3 3 164 Magnification Specifications Table 14 IGP Bar Code Specification Summary continued Magnification Narrow Element Width in 0 0001 inches Wide Narrow ratio Barcode Character Density cpi Parameter 53 dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300 203 203dpi 300dpi 300 dpi horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert Code 93 Code 128 and UCC EAN 128 X1 148 158 165 135 4 3 2 4 3 2 43 2 4 3 2 6 2 6 5 4 6 8 1 5 246 150 265 135 1 1 1 1 3 7 6 3 6 6 8 2 311 285 300 285 4 3 2 4 3 2 43 2 4 3 2 2 9 3 2 2 9 3 2 X3 492 413 468 398 1 1 1 1 1 8 2 2 1 9 2 2 X4 644 569 635 568 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 4 1 6 1 4 1 6 X5 810 803 798 705 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 X1A 128 100 165 132 1 1 1 1 7 1 9 5 4 6 8 X2A 257 200 330 267 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 3 5 4 5 2 7 3 4 X3A 385 301 500 400 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 1 8 2 3 X4A 513 402 663 535 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 8 2 3 1 4 1 7 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 UPC and EAN X0 5 100 100 165 138 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4
164. 1 characters 180 characters 201 characters 2 characters 6 characters 10 characters 16 characters 22 characters 28 characters 36 characters 44 characters 52 characters 62 characters 72 characters 82 characters 94 characters 106 characters 118 characters 132 characters 267 Chapter 3 268 Bar Codes Table 33 ECC 080 Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 45 X 45 47 X47 49 X 49 333 characters 366 characters 402 characters 222 characters 244 characters 268 characters 146 characters 160 characters 176 characters Table 34 ECC 100 Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 18 X 13 15 X 15 17 X 17 19 X 19 21 X21 23 X 23 25 X25 27 X 27 29 X 29 31X31 33 X 33 35 X 35 37 X 37 39 X 39 41X41 43 X 43 45 X 45 47 X47 49 X 49 1 character 8 characters 16 characters 25 characters 36 characters 47 characters 60 characters 73 characters 88 characters 104 characters 121 characters 140 characters 159 characters 180 characters 201 characters 224 characters 248 characters 273 characters 300 characters 1 character 5 characters 11 characters 17 characters 24 characters 31 characters 40 characters 49 characters 59 characters 69 characters 81 characters 93 characters 106 characters 120 characters 134 characters 149
165. 16 Table 51 Multinational Character Sets and Set Values Making Character Substitutions OXX 1XX 2XX 3XX 4XX 5XX 6XX 7XX Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew Turkish Misc 1 NOTE Applies to Line Matrix printers only 00 US ASCII ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 DEC 256 Hebrew Data Gen Block Set 8859 2 Greek Old Turk 10cpi 01 German ASMO Cyrillic Latin2 852 ELOT 928 Hebrew DEC Italics Set 449 437 Greek New Turkish 02 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew IBM Scanblock DEC Turkish 10cpi 03 Danish ASMO Cyrillic Kamenicky ABY Latin 1 Siemens PGL Thai 708 8859 5 Greek Hebrew Turkish Sets 04 Norwegian MS DOS ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Win CP PTT CP710 Greek 1255 Turkish 05 Finnish MS DOS Code PC 437 ELOT 927 IBC CP720 Page 855 Slavic Greek Turkish 06 English Sakr 7 bit Slavic Greek 851 Bull CP714 Cyrillic 1250 Turkish 07 Dutch Aptec Ukrainian Code Page Greek 437 AS400 CP715 865 Turkish 08 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page Greek Unisys 860 8859 7 Turkish 09 Spanish Arabic Win CP Latin 1 Win CP NCR CP 864 1251 8859 1 1253 Turkish 10 Italian Arabic Latvian Latin 5 Greek 813 PST CP 1046 866 8859 9 Euro Turkish 11 Turkish Arabic CP 1048 Latin 9 Greek 869 Unis 1 Lam 1 8859 15 Euro Turkish 12 CP 437 Arabic Polish Code Lam 2 POL1 Page 853 13 CP 850 Win CP Win CP Info 1256 1250 Turkish 14 Reserved Farsi 1 Win CP Win CP 1252 1254 15 Reserved Farsi 2 Win CP Code 1257 Page 857 16
166. 1F 31 US 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 16 15 X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low NOTE The ASCII values in Table 61 assume that all undefined bits are set to 0 When the PI line is enabled data bit 8 is the PI line on a serial interface and data bit 8 is undefined on a parallel interface 479 Appendix E Paper Motion using the EVFU Paper Motion using the EVFU The Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU is an efficient method of skipping to a specified print position during repetitive printing tasks The EVFU affects the vertical placement of overlay data produced in the Execute Form mode General EVFU Programming The general EVFU programming procedure is as follows 1 Design a form determining spacing and channel assignments for each line 2 Sendthe programming sequence to the printer The following information applies when programming and using the EVFU PI Line The PI signal can be detected by the IGP PGL as the 8th data bit ina serial interface or a separate input line in a parallel interface Refer to the EN PI DIS PI command and the PION PIOFF command on page 111 and page 111 in the Commands chapter respectively Elongated Characters Elongated double high characters can be used within EVFU programs The EVFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two normal character lines Paper Runaway Protection If the EVFU is selected but not loaded when an EVFU command is sent from the host computer
167. 2 34 Command Codes RJUST CJUST NLZ DIR b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the alphanumeric string location on the form The SR and SC parameters are used to specify the exact location of the alphanumeric field identified by c Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string ranging from 0 through 255 d Dynamically enter the alphanumeric string itself in the Execute Form mode The length of the alphanumeric string must be equal to or less than the value assigned to the length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 77 e If the dynamic data field is used do not enter the text parameter Optional parameter which truncates the dynamic data field when it exceeds the maximum length defined by the L parameter When T is not used a data length error is printed instead Right text alignment where the starting column SC points to the right end of the text string If RJUST is not specified the default is left alignment Center text alignment where the starting column SC points to the center of the text string If CJUST is not specified the default is left alignment Suppresses the leading zero Optional parameter for rotating a character string Use the following codes to indicate the direction of character rotation and to specify an uppercase only character string a Enter CW for 90 degree clo
168. 2 High reliability Level which provides 25 error correction capability 3 Super high reliability Level H which provides 3096 error correction capability The default error correction capability is standard Level M which provides 15 error correction capability Optional parameter that designates the masking pattern to apply to the bar code data Applying a masking pattern to the data can improve the readability of the bar code because it can help create a more evenly balanced number of light and dark cells Valid settings for the masking patterns are as follows 0 No Mask default 1 Mask Pattern 1 2 Mask Pattern 2 3 Mask Pattern 3 4 Mask Pattern 4 5 Mask Pattern 5 6 Mask Pattern 6 7 Mask Pattern 7 8 Mask Pattern 8 Optional parameter that designates the data entry method There are two data entry methods Automatic and Manual The following values specifies the data entry method 0 Automatic default 1 Manual In automatic data entry mode the data type is automatically determined along with the appropriate block division The maximum block division is 200 characters In manual data entry mode the user must specify the data type and each data block must contain 200 characters or less Multiple data blocks must be separated by a comma character To use manual data entry mode perform the following steps 1 Enter 11 2 In the bar code data section enter the bar code data with on
169. 206 Check Digit 208 Code 128 Command format 208 Code 128A Data Field 207 Code 128B Data Field 207 Code 128C Data Field 207 Data Field 208 Quiet Zone 207 Readable Data 207 Start Stop Codes 207 Code 128B Data Field Code 128A 128B and 128C 207 Code 128B example 216 Code 128C Data Field Code 128A 128B and 128C 207 Code 128C example 217 Code 35 188 Code 39 191 command format 193 example 198 Code 93 199 Check Digit 200 command format 201 Data Field 200 example 205 Quiet Zone 200 Readable Data 200 Start Stop Codes 200 Command Delete 412 Directory 411 Command codes 32 Alphanumerics 33 Alphanumerics incremental dynamic data fields 44 Alphanumerics incremental fields 38 Alphanumerics incremental fixed data fields 41 Boxes 47 Cancel 50 Circle 51 Clock Element Format 52 Compressed print density 52 Configuration 54 Corners 58 CREATE 61 Dark printing 63 Data fields for alphanumeric and incremental data 32 Define Month Names command 63 Delete Font 64 Delete form 65 Delete logo 65 Delete macro 66 Directory 66 Duplication horizontal 67 Duplication vertical 69 Ellipse 70 Emulation switching 71 End 71 Enquiry 71 Execute Form mode 72 Execute form dynamic alphanumeric data 77 Execute form dynamic bar code data 78 Execute form dynamic logo 79 Execute form electronic vertical format unit 76 Execute form general format 73 Execute form in
170. 3 2 n a n a n a X1 195 152 163 133 1 1 1 1 n a n a n a n a X1 5 146 163 168 140 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 n a n a n a X2 395 299 295 268 1 1 1 1 n a n a n a n a 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 165 Chapter 3 Overview Table 14 IGP Bar Code Specification Summary continued Magnification Narrow Element Width in 0 0001 inches Wide Narrow ratio Barcode Character Density cpi Parameter 553 dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300 203 203dpi 300dpi 300 dpi horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert UPS 11 X0 5 148 150 167 131 4 3 2 4 3 2 43 2 4 3 2 6 2 6 1 5 5 6 9 X1 174 150 167 132 1 1 1 1 5 2 6 5 4 6 9 1 5 246 148 252 131 4 3 2 4 3 2 43 2 4 3 2 3 7 6 1 3 6 6 9 X2 348 301 333 264 1 1 1 1 2 6 3 2 7 3 4 523 452 500 396 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 7 2 1 8 2 3 X4 696 602 668 528 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 2 1 7 X5 870 750 835 660 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 0 9 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 X1A 147 150 167 131 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 6 2 6 5 5 6 9 X2A 295 301 333 264 1 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 3 4 X3A 443 452 500 396 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 2 1 2 1 8 2 3 X4A 590 603 668 528 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 5 1 2 1 7 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1
171. 31 8 2 0 0 PART NO C15 32 6 2 0 0 P 1 34 3 9 4 4 00000000001 0000000001 15 38 9 2 0 0 QUANTITY 15 39 6 2 0 0 0 40 5 8 4 4 100 C15 41 9 28 0 0 SPECIAL C15 42 6 28 0 0 C 1 43 9 34 4 4 00001 A20UG 45 10 2 0 45 7 7 2 2 040898755 C15 50 4 2 0 0 SERIAL C15 51 2 2 0 0 S 50 8 7 2 2 0002110 C15 54 5 4 0 0 ACME MOTOR INC IRVINE CA 92713 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 I DARK 34 7 5 5 000000002 A000000002 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 40 9 5 5 0100 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 I DARK 38 1 33 X00002 CA20UF STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 45 11 5 5 V040898755 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 50 9 5 5 50002110 STOP BOX 1 1 25 1 25 27660 5 STOP HORZ 714 863 1900 Example Auto Increment Fields 1 8 4 1 66 5 1 14 9 1 40 1 19 6 1 40 STOP VERT 1 26 8 4 14 9 1 40 14 9 25 2 STOP ALPHA C15 1 8 2 0 0 PART NO C15 2 6 2 0 0 P 1 4 3 9 4 4 00000000002 A0000000001 C15 8 9 2 0 0 QUANTITY C15 9 6 2 0 0 Q 10 5 8 4 4 100 C15 11 9 28 0 0 SPECIAL C15 12 6 28 0 0 C I 13 9 34 4 4 00002 A20UG C15 15 2 0 0 SUPPLIER C15 15 10 2 0 0 V 15 6 7 2 2 040898755 C15 20 2 0 0 SERIAL C15 21 2 0 0 S 20 5 7 2 2 0002110 C15 24 5 4 0 0 ACME MOTOR INC IRVINE CA 92713 714 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 I DARK 4 7 5 5 000000002 A000000001 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 10 9 5 5 Q100 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 1 DARK 8 1 33 X00002
172. 33 specification summary 163 Telepen 338 UPC A 345 UPC E 351 UPC EO 351 UPCSHIP 359 UPS 11 365 Basic Design 381 412 Barcode 179 Check Code 181 Command Format 179 Data Field 179 GuardBand 181 Height 182 Magnification 182 PDF 182 Start Code 179 Termination Code 179 Block character download 426 Box and Corners creating 392 Box errors 442 Boxes 47 50 Channel assignments EVFU 481 Character address Multinational Character Sets 416 Character Position Dot Position CP DP 31 Character set selection command ISET Multinational Character Sets 423 Character Sets extended 420 Character sizes PDF 161 Character substitutions Multinational Character Sets 416 Check Code BC412 Barcode 181 502 Check Digit Code 128A 128B and 128C 208 Code 93 200 EAN 13 225 EAN 8 219 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 278 Matrix 284 MSI 296 Planet 313 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 POSTNET 325 Telepen 339 UPC A 346 UPC E 352 UPCSHIP 360 UPS 11 366 Check Digit Codabar 184 Circle 51 Clear Zone FIM 233 Clearing EVFU memory 484 Clock Element Format command codes 52 Codabar 183 Check Digit 184 command format 184 Data Field 184 example 188 Quiet Zone 184 Readable Data 184 Start Stop Codes 184 Code 128 Command Format Code 128A 128B and 128C 208 Code 128A Data Field Code 128A 128B and 128C 207 Code 128A 128B and 128C
173. 39 50 Vertical Dark UPC A 5 digit add on H 1 2 SR 39 SC 50 1234567887655555 Data Field 5 digit add on data field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE UPCA 1 Executes the form form count of 1 NORMAL SC 50 Q SC 15 iy X EEZEMZZCMELAWNUENUENGENEDEAN CN u NT gt 1 eee UE 1 2345678876 3 2345 1 Figure 55 Sample UPC A Bar Codes with Add on Data 350 UPC E and UPC E0 UPC E and UPC EO The UPC E and UPC EO bar code structure is shown in Figure 56 and described on the following pages SR SC pud POSITION Normal 1 HEIGHT STOP CODE I CHECK DIGIT FIELD NUMBER SYSTEM PE TIONAL DIGIT SYSTEM READABLE OPTIONAL CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD DATAFIELD READABLE CHARACTER DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION l quiet ZONE t CHECK DIGIT CHARACTER SR SC CCW POSITION STOP CODE OPTIONAL READABLE lt DATA FIELD NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER START CODE FIELD 1 N NUMBER DEL SYSTEM CHARACTER ZONE Llc HEIGHT gt o NUMBER SYSTEM NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER FIELD CHARACTER 1 1 SYSTEM SR SC QUIET CHARACTER POSITION ZONE START CODE 1
174. 4 See NOTE 17 4B CODE B See NOTE 18 4C FNC 1 See NOTE 19 4D START A STOP lt m woz gt B C D E F G H m oA GG NOTE Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front panel see your User s Guide 212 Code 128 128B and 128C Table 23 Code 128B Character Set SP 20 54 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7 7C 21 22 3C 23 3D 24 3E 25 3F 26 40 27 41 28 42 5C 29 43 5D 2A 44 5E 2B 45 5F 2C 46 60 2 47 61 2 48 62 2 49 63 70 30 4 64 7 31 4 65 7 32 4C 66 FNC 3 See NOTE 33 4D 67 FNC 2 See NOTE 34 4E 68 SHIFT See NOTE 35 4F i 69 CODE C See NOTE 36 50 j 6A FUNC 4 See NOTE 37 51 6B CODE A See NOTE 38 52 6C FNC 1 See NOTE 39 53 6D START B STOP 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B mE LEE M d d M ceras rT 0 0 00 N x z c 1 gt C D E F G H J K L M N S o ON NOTE Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate charact
175. 417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode one to detect the error and one to correct for it a given security level can support half the number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words PDF Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be encoded PDF417 PDF417 Command Format BARCODE PDF417 MICRO or MACRO DIR Y D m Wn ASPECTA wj Rn BIN 3 S n BEn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE PDF417 Designates bar code type PDF417 enter PDF417 MICRO Selects Micro PDF417 See Table 43 on page 307 MACRO Selects Macro PDF417 This enables encoding of a Macro Control Block in the data field using escape sequences See Table 44 and Table 45 on page 310 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented X D n Optional parameter that designates the width of a narrow element in IGP dots or printer dots if option D is used The default is one IGP dot For horizontal barcodes this results in 2 72 inch For rotated barcodes this equal 3 120 inch Values range from 1 to 1000 printer dots Y D n Optional parameter that designates the hei
176. 43 IDF2 STEP 1 31323334353637383941424344454647484 94A4B4C4D4E4F 1 lt gt IAF2 lt DF4 gt IBF1 lt DF3 gt NORMAL 136 Example 7 RFID PGL Commands This example shows memory bank usage with LOCK and UNLOCK option where multiple RFWTAG and RFRTAG can be used and the passcode for lock and unlock can be in dynamic format SGTIN 432 SCALE DOT 203 203 RFWTAG LOCK lt DF6 gt D 96 EPC 96 DF1 H STOP RFRTAG UNLOCK lt DF6 gt D 96 EPC 96 DF2 H STOP FWTAG LOCKA1B2C3 H 32 KIL 32 DF3 H STOP RFRTAG UNLOCKA1B2C3 H 32 KIL 32 DF4 H STOP LOCK lt DF7 gt H 32 ACS 32 DF6 D STOP RFRTAG UNLOCK lt DF7 gt H 32 ACS 32 DF8 H STOP ALPHA AF1 24 POINT 400 60 16 6 AF2 7 POINT 600 60 16 6 AF3 6 POINT 800 60 16 6 AF4 8 POINT 1000 60 16 6 STOP VERIFY DF1 H DFl r n VERIFY DF2 H DF2 r n VERIFY DF4 H DF4 r n VERIFY DF5 H DF5 r n VERIFY DF6 H DF6 r n VERIFY DF7 H DF7 r n VERIFY DF8 H DF8 r n END 137 Chapter 2 138 Command Codes EXECUTE SGTIN FCNT3 DF1 313233343536373839414243 DF3 3435363738 DF6 3224115 DF7 A1B2C3 AF1 DF2 AF2 DF6 AF3 DF7 AF4 lt DF8 gt NORMAL Example 8 This example shows the usage of RFWTAG with PC field which needs to be followed immediately by RFWTAG with EPC field There is no restriction for RFRTAG
177. 6 box 442 corner 443 create 446 execute 447 font 455 horizontal line 440 incremental fields 453 logo 445 macro 458 miscellaneous 449 452 453 456 multinational character set 454 reverse print 452 vertical line 441 Errors solving 413 EVFU 480 channel assignment 481 clearing memory 484 end load code 482 General programming information 480 memory clearing 484 programming sequence See EVFU 480 start load code 481 EVFU example 485 Example Forms 377 506 Examples EVFU 485 Royal Mail 332 Example downloaded block characters amp overlays 428 Execute errors 447 Execute Form Command 392 Execute Form commands 22 Execute Form Mode 21 392 Execute Form mode 72 Not User Defined 471 Not defined 472 User defined 472 Execute Form mode Paper selection and maximum values 471 Execute form dynamic alphanumeric data 77 Execute form dynamic bar code data 78 Execute form dynamic logo 79 Execute form electronic vertical format unit 76 Execute form general format 73 Execute form incremental dynamic data 80 Execute form overlay data 82 Execute Mode form examples 377 Exercise Logo 399 Expanded and Compressed Character Print IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Expanded font menu option set 429 Extended Character Sets Accessing characters and character sets 420 F FIM 231 Clear Zone 233 command format 233 Data Field 233 example 235 Start Stop Code 233 Fixed alphanume
178. 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Code 93 data field Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 21 except the system SFCC PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data
179. 9 Uppercase 27 UPS 11 365 Check Digit 366 command format 366 Data Field 366 example 369 Quiet Zone 366 Readable Data 366 Start Stop Codes 366 structure 365 User defined overlay set activate 427 User defined overlay set download 426 User Defined set command USET Multinational Character Sets 421 User defined variable bar code ratios 159 User defined variable barcode ratios for postal barcodes 160 User defined Execute Form mode 472 Using the Setup command example 381 UTF 8 423 V Variable bar code ratios user defined 159 Variable postal barcodes ratios user defined 160 Variable ratio sample 160 VERIFY PGL command code 153 Vertical line errors 441 Vertical Lines Command 394 Vertical lines adding 394 Vertical paper motion introduction 477 Warnings 13 513 514 257369 001B
180. 94 or SFCC 5E TIFF Logo Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode where logos can be defined using a Tagged Image File Format TIFF Mode NORMAL CREATE Format NORMAL cc LOGO ogoname TIFF TRIM ROT DISK T TIFF raster data cc RASTEREND END Format CREATE LOGODEF ogoname TIFF TRIM ROT T TIFF raster data cc RASTEREND STOP cc The Special Function Control Code LOGO The Logo command enter LOGO logoname Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the logo Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable Logo Name characters All future references to this logo Delete Logo or Logo Call commands must use this name If a logo is defined with the same name as a logo already existing in memory the newly defined logo will replace the existing logo TIFF The command denoting raster data in TIFF format enter TIFF TRIM Optional parameter that removes extra white space bounding the image which saves memory inside the printer Also helps position the image in an IGP PGL form Enter TRIM ROT Optional parameter for images scanned in orientations other than upright Enter either CW for 90 degrees clockwise rotation CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation or INV for inverted characters 180 degrees rotations 151 Chapter 2 152 Command Codes Comments DISK Optional parameter to store the logo to Onboard Flash Memory Not allowed for logos defined in
181. 99 191 271 251 2 61 2 3 2 2 1 9 2 3 X2B 344 399 366 365 2 3 1 331 2 1 1 381 21 1 5 2 1 1 5 X2C 196 198 267 266 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 8 1 2 8 1 13 5 3 5 2 5 2 5 X2D 196 200 267 266 2 1 2 1 231 231 13 9 3 9 2 8 2 8 2 196 199 200 534 2 5 1 2 5 1 271 271 13 5 3 5 3 4 3 4 2 197 200 200 467 2 5 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 13 5 3 9 3 6 3 6 517 449 450 451 19 1 2 71 2 6 1 2 6 1 11 6 1 5 1 5 1 5 X3B 516 598 550 549 2 3 1 331 2 1 1 371 11 4 1 1 4 X3C 295 299 400 400 2 5 1 251 271 281 24 2 3 1 7 1 7 X3D 295 301 400 401 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 31 12 6 2 6 1 8 1 8 295 300 300 300 2 5 1 2 5 1 271 271 12 4 2 3 2 3 2 2 295 300 300 301 2 5 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 12 4 2 6 2 4 2 4 X4A 689 599 600 598 19 1 2 71 2 61 2 61 11 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 X4B 689 801 716 732 2 3 1 331 21 11 371 11 0 8 1 1 0 8 X4C 393 399 534 533 2 5 1 251 271 2 81 18 1 7 1 3 1 2 X4D 394 400 533 533 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 31 12 1 9 1 4 1 4 X4E 393 399 401 400 2 5 1 2 5 1 271 271 11 8 1 7 1 7 1 7 393 400 400 400 2 5 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 12 8 1 9 1 8 1 8 163 Chapter 3 Overview Table 14 IGP Bar Code Specification Summary continued Magnification Narrow Element Width in 0 0001 inches Wide Narrow ratio Barcode Character Density cpi Parameter 53 dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300 203 203dpi 300dpi 300 dpi horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert Interleaved 2 5 ITF 14 Ge
182. A Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode ROYALBAR 1 Execute the form with form count of 1 NORMAL SC 40 SRI0 h Figure 50 Sample Royal Mail bar code X1A Magnification Figure 51 illustrates a horizontal PostBar bar code generated by the following program CREATE POSTBAR Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command POSTBAR 10 40 PostBar bar code at SR 10 SC 40 with default MAG 1 10303023123102301031230123210212112210 Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE POSTBAR 1 Execute the form with form count of 1 NORMAL SC 40 SR 10 gt Figure 51 Sample PostBar code X1 Magnification QR Barcode QR Barcode The QR code is a two dimensional general purpose matrix bar code QR encodes Kanji characters and is a popular symbology in Japan QR code symbols are square and can be identified by their finder pattern of nested alternating light and dark squares The QR code is omni directional and is designed for high speed reading This bar code is capable of storing up to 7 089 numeric digits 4 296 alphanumeric characters 2 953 binary characters or 1817 Kanji characters in Automatic mode The data limit may be less if Manual mode is used If the data to encode is too large to fit in one bar code the data can be split up and encoded in up to 16 QR bar codes Command
183. ARACTER BEL NUMBER ZONE L___ 4 system CHARACTER e HEIGHT gt e HEIGHT gt Figure 54 UPC A Structure 345 Chapter 3 346 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module wide left quiet zone you are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed at the end of the bar code and typically identifies a periodical issue
184. ARY 31 2002 1 Hr Later February 01 2002 1 Month Later March 03 02 Configuration Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Configuration mode where changes to any or all of the IGP PGL configuration parameters via software control can be made instead of from the printer control panel Mode NORMAL NOTE A separate line is required for the CONFIG command the parameters and values and the END command Format cc CONFIG parameter value END cc The SFCC CONFIG The Configuration command enter CONFIG parameter value The parameter for which a configuration change is desired and the value associated with that parameter The available parameters and the values associated with these parameters are listed in Table 7 END Terminates the CONFIG command enter END NOTE All CONFIG parameters except RESET must be followed by a semicolon Any CONFIG parameters not entered in UPPERCASE and exactly as listed in Table 7 will result in an Error 156 Refer to the Error Codes chapter Checkmarked cells in Table 7 means full compatibility for all applicable models in the line matrix or thermal product lines If the columns are left blank the command is ignored for the given product line If individual models are listed the commands are supported only on those listed models Thermal models include T2N SL4M T4M and T5000r SL5000r T5000r In some cases specific options are required e g RFID RTC for rea
185. BLE i DATA FIELD 1 UPPER 1 1 LOWER LOWER GUARD 9 jt GUARD GUARD BAND Tw I QUIET j QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION e LUE ru 1 Normal LOWER GUARD BAND START DATA FIELD stop quiet CODE ZONE 1 l OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION INV 1 ZONE E UPPER GUARD BAND _ OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE 20 1 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND Figure 34 Matrix Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER j GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 283 Chapter 3 284 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar cod
186. BOATS return to the Normal mode remember the blank line before the NORMAL command exit the file using your system commands if necessary and print the document Enter Format EXECUTE HCBOATS cc EXECUTE formname PAGE FC DISK NORMAL cc NORMAL PRINT HNDCFT FOM System Format NOTE Always separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands by a line Figure 73 shows the finished form If Mr Handcraft would like to rearrange the words change line thickness of a box etc simply reopen the file and change the appropriate command lines Otherwise his salespeople have a new form for notes on custom orders 409 Chapter 4 Form Design c HandCraft Boats CUSTOMER HULL NO COLOR HandCraft Boats 123 Boat Way Boat Town CA 333444 714 555 0011 410 RIGGING DELIVERY DATE SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS DESCRIPTION Quality Boats Crafted By Hand wc Figure 73 Completed Sample Form Example Directory Command The Directory command lists the contents of the IGP PGL directory on the host system The directory command provides the following information e All form names currently defined All logo names currently defined e All macro names currently defined e TrueType fonts currently loaded e The association of logos to forms e The amount of memory used for form storage e The amount of dynamic storage space used and available Example A form will not execute unless
187. Bold Other font numbers correspond to optional typefaces Refer to the font instructions for typeface numbers Do not use this command to select OCR A and OCR B Instead use either the Cn parameter in the Alphanumerics command or use the Compressed Print Density command NOTE FACE 1 2 and 3 are for importing HP Soft Fonts Please contact your distributor for further information NAME BOLD BLOCK Selects a font by its file name Enter NAME a space and the file name of the font including its extension The maximum length of the name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the extension is 3 characters For example 93952 5 specifies Courier New Bold Intellifont and arial ttf would represent Arial TrueType If this parameter is used then the FACE parameter should not be used Selects a bold attribute Enter BOLD a space and ON or 1 to turn bold on or OFF or 0 for no bold attribute 15 used to select block fonts A value of zero turns the block fonts off and uses scalable fonts the default A value of 1 uses the block font set and a value of 2 uses the first alternate block font set Font SLANT Selects a slanting factor Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant Enter SLANT a space and RIGHT or 1 for a typical italic slant LEFT or 1 for a backward slant or OFF or 0 for no slant attribute SYMSET Selects a font symbol set other than the default ASCII sy
188. Byte Character Sets 11xx DBCS 00 GB18030 01 Big5 02 KSC5601 03 Kanji SJIS To select one of these sets using the SYMSET option in the font command or the ISET command use the appropriate value in Table 53 The GB18030 character set supports GB18030 quad byte encoding Accessing Characters and Character Sets OCR Character Sets Purpose Access OCR A and OCR B character sets Mode CREATE NORMAL and EXECUTE Format See Comments Comments In the Create mode you can access OCR fonts using the alphanumeric command Use the Cn parameter in the ALPHA command chapter page 33 for more information In the Normal and Execute modes you can access OCR fonts using the Compressed Print Density command Commands chapter page 52 NOTE OCR fonts are only available in 10 cpi 419 Chapter 5 LINE MATRIX 420 Accessing Characters and Character Sets Extended Character Sets Purpose Access extended character sets Mode CREATE NORMAL and EXECUTE Format See Comments Comments In the Normal and Execute modes you can access extended fonts using the ISET Command page 423 Character sets 32 through 64 are extended character bitmap fonts which are not expandable NOTE The extended character sets are bitmapped fonts and cannot be expanded beyond 2 x 2 They are also limited to the portrait orientation Data Bit 8 You can access individual characters usi
189. Code OPTIMIZE optimize command Enter OPTIMIZE Example The following example shows the format of optimize command OPTIMIZE 105 Chapter 2 Command Codes Page Number Purpose Defines where a page number is placed on a form and automatically increases the page number on each page Mode CREATE Format PAGE SA SC PAGE The Page Number command enter PAGE SR Defines the starting row of the page number Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 SC Defines the starting column of the page number Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 If the SR or SC extends beyond the page boundaries an Error 76 will occur in the Execute Form mode and default page number SR SC values row 1 column 1 are used Comments To begin automatically incrementing the page numbers the starting page number must be specified during the Execute command Example following command places the page numbers at row 60 column 70 on the form PAGE 60 70 106 Purpose Controls printer paper options such as page orientation intensity and ribbon use Mode NORMAL EXECUTE CREATE NOTE More than one op
190. DATOR Enter 2 CLEAR REPORT y Sets continuous mode Same as the Continuous CONT MODE Mode menu Enter CONT MODE a space and 0 v for standard or 1 for tear off Sets the printer to cut a page after a specified CUT number of pages Enter CUT a space anda number from 0 through 256 0 no cutting Sets the printer to cut only once at the end of the job TAM CUTONCE Enter CUTONCE The command is sent to the T5000r printer after the job in NORMAL after EXECUTE 107 Chapter 2 Command Codes Table 9 Paper Parameters Paper Parameter Description Line Matrix Thermal EJECT Prints all pages that are in the buffer Enter EJECT v ERROR RECOVERY Changes the error recover option from the front panel Allows creation of common PGL label formats Syntax PAPER ERROR RECOVER 1 0 v FEED Feeds the media in tenths of an inch Enter FEED a space and a number in the range of 100 to 100 A positive value will move the media forward a negative value will retract the media T5000r FEED Feeds the media in tenths of an inch Enter FEED a space and a number in the range 11 to 100 A positive value will move the media forward a negative value will retract the media TAM FEED SHIFT Adjusts the Tear off position in hundredths of an inch Enter FEED SHIFT a space and a number of 100 to 1280 The maximum positive shift is limited to the
191. DUP dup offset elements to be duplicated VDUP OFF VDUP The Vertical Duplication command enter VDUP dup Specifies the duplication number which is the number of times the entered form element s will repeat vertically Enter a value ranging from 1 through 255 offset Specifies the vertical offset to establish the vertical spacing between each duplication of the form element s specified in the body of the command Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The offset is from starting row to starting row VDUP OFF Terminates the Vertical Duplication command enter VDUP OFF If not entered the IGP PGL expects another form element to be defined for duplication A single VDUP command can define different types of elements for duplication Example The following example is a vertical duplication of one horizontal line The line is duplicated three times To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page VDUP 3 2 3 duplications with 2 char row spacing HORZ Command to duplicate vertically 1752715765 STOP Stops the command to duplicate element VDUP OFF Terminates the vertical duplication COLUMN 15 COLUMN 65 69 Chapter 2 Command Codes THERMAL Ellipse Purpose Produces an Ellipse Mode CREATE Syntax ELLIPSE LT SR SC ER EC STOP
192. E 25 D 0000123456 STOP END EXECUTE SGTIN 64 1 NORMAL Example 3 Header Filter Value EPC Manager Index Object Class Serial Number Same as Example 2 except it uses a dynamic method This example also shows how to program another RFID tag without redefining the data structure of the SGTIN 64 CREATE SGTIN 64 432 RFWTAG 64 2 DF1 B 3 DF2 D 14 DF3 D 20 DF4 H 25 DF5 D STOP ALPHA AF1 18 10 5 3 3 STOP END EXECUTE SGTIN 64 DF1 10 DF2 5 DF3 15383 DF4 ABCDE DF5 0000123456 AF1 lt DF5 gt NORMAL 134 Header Filter Value EPC Manager Index Object Class Serial Number Header Filter Value EPC Manager Index Object Class Serial Number Print serial number on label RFID PGL Commands EXECUTE SGTIN 64 DF1 10 Header DF2 5 Filter Value DF3 15383 EPC Manager Index DF4 ABCDE Object Class DF5 0000123456 Serial Number AF1 lt DF5 gt Print serial number on label NORMAL Example 4 This example shows how to program a roll of 1500 smart labels with SGTIN 64 values where the Header 2d Filter Value 5d EPC Manager Index 15383d Object Class 703710d or OxABCDE and the Serial Number starting from 0000000 to 0001499d CREATE SGTIN 64 432 RFWTAG 64 2 B 10 Header 3 D 5 Filter Value 14 D 15383 EPC Manager Index 20 H ABCDE Object Class 25 I D STEP1 0 Serial Number STOP END
193. E symbol exceeds the form width Dynamic ALPHA data field AFn not previously defined The dynamic alpha field number called for was not previously defined in the Create Form mode BARCODE symbol check digit CD out of bounds Dynamic Alpha BARCODE field longer than previously defined The BARCODE data provided exceeds the maximum length for the bar code selected SFCC decimal input error must be 01 255 The hexadecimal value on the ASCII chart for the Special Function Control Code is not valid Refer to page 150 to select a valid SFCC 451 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Reverse Print Errors 111 REVERSE format error in input parameters Re enter the command with proper format 112 REVERSE starting row SR ending row ER out of bounds Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element 113 REVERSE starting SC ending column EC out of bounds Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element 114 Insufficient memory to store the REVERSE element Insufficient memory space available for reversed print requirements Miscellaneous Errors 115 PDF417 barcode sizing parameter illegal or too small for data 116 PDF417 security level has illegal value or format 117 Unusable or illegal raster data 118 Unsupported raster image type 119 Unsupported raster compression type 120 Dynamic LOGO data field GFn not previously defined Dynamic logo field designated in the Execute Form mode was not defined in the Create For
194. ECTION 3 Modulo 7 CD any other value Leading Zero IGNORE CHAR 0 255 the selected ignore char any other value ignore mode off IGNORE TEXT 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T4M T5000r IGP100 COMPATBL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r LINE FEED DEF 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled v v LPI 1 1000 v v LEFT MARGIN Horz IGP Dots 60 dpi TAM T5000r OPTIMIZED RATIO 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r PGL NORMAL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r POWER ON IGP PGL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r 0 Disabled 1 2 3 4 5 for different POWER ON S MODE printer mode refer to the table for v printer mode 0 Data Processing PRINT QUALITY 1 High v 2 Best PRINTER PI LINE 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r PRINTER TYPE 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r REPEAT FORM OPT 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled TAM T5000r RESET N A v v SFCC 1 255 v v SLEW RANGE 0 15 Non Zero 16 TAM T5000r 56 Table 7 Configuration Parameters continued Configuration Configuration Value LM Thermal Parameter SKIP PREFIX 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled SLASH ZERO 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled STATUS or CANCEL Enabled T4M SNOOP OFF Disabled T5000r SO CHAR 0 255 MARGIN Vert IGP Dots 72 TR
195. ELD FIELD STOP CODE CENTER CODE START CODE d or5 DOT 1 SR SC quer ADD ON Position 1 zone CODE 1 CCW D quer l zone POSITION DIGIT OPTIONAL FIELD READABLE DATA FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD gt gt Figure 17 8 Structure 218 8 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping The IGP automatically produces the left quiet zone you must provide sufficient space on the form for the right quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data placed within the quotes at the end of the bar code typically
196. ENSITY 15 Clock Element Format Purpose Format Embeds Realtime Clock information in an ALPHA and or BARCODE data field lt Cl gt lt SIGN gt lt OFFSET gt lt DOT gt lt gt lt Cl gt The Clock Indicator character as defined by the CLOCK parameter in the ALPHA and or BARCODE commands See the ALPHA and BARCODE command descriptions for details lt SIGN gt Sign for the offset can be to add or to subtract OFFSET Offset to the selected clock type This is an amount of time to add to or subtract from the selected clock element value Also referred to as Sell By Date Clock Element Format DOT or COMMA The character indicates that this sequence will be printed and the given offset will be used The comma indicates that this sequence will not be printed It will only be used to specify the offset TYPE The clock element to display See the following table for available elements Table 6 Clock Element Types Type Description Range d Day of the month 01 31 n Month number 01 12 M Full Month name January December A Abbreviated month name Jan Dec y 2 digit Year number 00 99 Y 4 Year number 0000 9999 h Hour 12hr clock 01 12 H Hour 24hr clock 00 23 p AM PM designation AM PM m Minute 00 59 Second 00 59 When the CLOCK parameter is not specific the BARCODE ALPHA command the Clock
197. Format is treated as text The offset is the total of all offsets in the data field Adding months or years that result in days beyond the end of the new month will roll over into the following month For instance adding one year to Feb 29 will result in Mar 1st Or adding 1 month to Jan 31 2002 will result in Mar 3 Jan 31 1 Month Feb 31 Feb 2002 only has 28 days NOTE By default the time stamp on the label reflects the time the label bitmap page is drawn not the time when the label prints from the engine As a result there is a time lapse between when the label is drawn and when the label is printed Only in Tear Off and Peel Off mode does the time stamp on the label reflect the time when the label is printed by the engine 53 Chapter 2 54 Command Codes Example MONTH F define a new name for January JANUARY the rest of the months use default END CREATE CLOCK 0 ALPHA CLOCKS AF1 60 3 2 1 1 these Dynamic Alpha fields will CLOCKS AF2 60 4 2 1 1 be scanned for Clock data CLOCKS AF3 60 5 2 1 1 which must start with sign STOP END Set clock to Jan 31 2002 23 hr Minutes amp Seconds don t change SETCLOCK DA 31 MO 01 YE 2002 HO 23 EXECUTE CLOCK AF1 Today 40 M 40 d 40 Y Add 1 Hr to current time but don t print the hours AF2 1 Hr later 0 0 40 Y 4 1 H Add 1 month AF3 1 Month Later 1 0 d 0 y Result Today _ JANU
198. GP PGL Electronic Vertical Format Unit can be used to control vertical spacing of the overlay data In place of line feed commands input individually the EVFU can be programmed during the Execute Form mode to slew the overlay data page to the predetermined lines with a single command NOTE When using the IGP PGL the Dynamic Data command and Overlay IGP PGL commands may be issued on the same line as the overlay text to synchronize the printer with systems that count lines e g 1 See the IGP PGL command standard for inline command format on page 28 Expanded Print Expanded Print Purpose Selects font sizes other than the default font Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc EXPAND The Special Function Control Code EXPAND The Expanded Print command enter EXPAND VE Specifies the vertical expansion factor enter a value ranging from 0 through 139 Use vertical expansion with 12 point font size only HE Specifies the horizontal expansion factor enter a value ranging from 0 through 139 Use horizontal expansion with 12 point font size only NOTE Both VE and HE parameters must be zero or non zero One expansion value cannot be specified as 0 if the other is not VE or HE setting of 1 expands the appropriate plane but produces single size characters A VE and HE setting of O produces standard size characters Comments Example The Expanded Print command uses the 0 10 inch 10 cpi Gothic typeface a
199. Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal lines with user selectable thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned fixed information entered when the form is created can be overlaid onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or may be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of bar codes are available Australian 4 State Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 Subset A B and C Data Matrix EAN 8 EAN 13 FIM Interleaved 2 of 5 German 1 2 5 ITF 14 Matrix Maxicode MSI A through D PDF 417 Planet Plessey POSTNET USPS Intelligent Mail PostBar Royal Mail UCC EAN 128 UPC A UPC E UPCSHIP and UPS 11 UPC and EAN bar codes can also specify add on data See Table 11 on page 158 for a complete list of bar codes Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 139 times the standard character size up to 13 9 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 10 to 30 characters per inch cpi are available Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed characte
200. IAFn Executes the incremental dynamic alphanumeric data 81 Alphanumeric provided after the cc EXECUTE command Dynamic Data Incremental Bar IBFn Executes the incremental dynamic bar code data provided 81 Code Dynamic Data after the cc EXECUTE command Line Spacing LPI Defines the lines per inch printing format 90 Vertical Multinational ISET Selects one of the multinational character sets Chap 5 Character Set Normal Mode NORMAL Places the IGP PGL in the Normal mode where it does not 105 change the data stream but awaits the SFCC followed by an IGP PGL command Paper PAPER Controls printer paper options such as page orientation 107 intensity and ribbon use Reset RESET Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP PGL memory or 127 the printer flash memory Repeat REPEAT Repeats a form a given number of times including all the 126 dynamic data Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands 147 On Off SFOFF See Note on page 21 22 Alphanumeric Data Alphanumeric Data Based on the requirements of a specific application you can use one of three methods to print alphanumeric data on a form Fixed data Overlay data and Dynamic data These methods are described in more detail in the Commands chapter e Fixed data prints on each form in the same prepositioned location unless the location changes in the form definition Company name address logo and phone number are t
201. II Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen NUL U SP Space V W SOH A STX B li b C C C D D D D d D ENQ E F amp BEL G IG G G g G BS H H H H h H HT l LF J J J J j J VT K IK K K k K FF L L L L L CR M 0 N n N SI 0 O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC1 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2 R 2 2 R R r R DC3 S 3 3 S S 5 DC4 T 4 4 T T t 0 5 5 U U u U SYN V 6 6 V V w 7 7 W W w W CAN X 8 8 X X Y 9 9 Y Y y Y SUB z IZ Z Z 2 7 ESC 96A 4 FS B lt L GS 96M R RS D gt 9el N 96S US J __ O DEL T 2 NOTE Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for future control character pairs 343 Chapter 3 344 Bar Codes Telepen Example Figure 12 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Telepen bar code generated by the following program CREATE TELEPEN BARCODE TELEPEN 5 5 SAMPLE 1 PDF B STOP ARCODE ELEPEN VSCAN 10 5 AB12 amp DF B TOP ND EXECUTE TELEPEN 1 E 0 1 GUN W NORMAL SC 5 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code Command Telepen barcode at SR 5 SC 5 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command New Bar Code Command Verti
202. ION 27 60 0 0 PRICE 50 26 1 1 Quality Boats Crafted By Hand C17 48 14 0 0 HandCraft Boats C17 48 10 14 0 0 123 Boat Way C17 49 8 14 0 0 Boat Town CA 17 50 6 19 0 0 333444 17 51 4 14 0 0 714 555 0011 STOP STOP HandCraft Boats uses bar code type Code 128B C128B in many applications Use bar code C128B height Hn of 5 inch starting at row SR 49 column SC 59 code the West Coast Sales Region as WC and print the data field PDF below the symbol NOTE Due to space constraints the C128B command below is separated into two lines During actual input do not separate the command parameters Enter Format BARCODE BARCODE C128B H5 49 59 C128B DIR IMAG Hn m BF n L DARK SR SC D datafield D PDF PDF LOC FON T MAX STOP STOP NOTE The decimal point is not entered in the height parameter H5 above because values are expected in 10 inch increments Values from 4 to 99 4 inch to 9 9 inches are accepted 10 Add the logo and end the Create Form mode Use the Logo Call command specify the starting row SH at 12 and column SC at 18 as shown on the grid and call the logo by name HANDCRFT The starting row and column of the logo refer to the upper left corner of the grid used in the logo design Enter Format LOGO LOGO 12 18 SR SC logoname DISK STOP STOP END END Creating A Form And Adding Form Components 11 Execute the form HC
203. IT Figure 38 MSI Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER 14 GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 295 Chapter 3 296 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent each numeric character The structure is four wide elements bars or spaces and four narrow elements Each character contains four data bits with each O bit made up of a narrow bar wide space arrangement and each 1 bit made up of a wide bar narrow space arrangement Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit If specified the modulo 10 or modulo 11 or both check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning MSI Command Format BARCODE MSI n DIR MAG Hn m BEn L DARK SR SC D data field
204. MASK data For example a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA by 1 a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2 The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA is defined by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field and depends on the specific type of bar code the STARTDATA field cannot contain more characters than used in the STEPMASK field and can only contain the number and type of characters allowed by the bar code Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is defined by using the L value in the STEPMASK field L indicates linked but non incrementing data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA field Any alphanumeric character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a non incrementing non linked STARTDATA subfield The following examples illustrate incrementing of bar code data fields All cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset count parameter value of 0 Incremental bar code data is generated identically to incremental alphanumeric data except the IGP does not add leading spaces to bar code data NOTE In the following bar code examples the value of the data is shown automatically incrementing In practical applications the bar code itself would print corresponding to the incremented data as shown in the Auto Increment Fields Example in Chapter 2 371 Chapter 3 Incremental Bar Code Fields Value Des
205. MIC DATA 1 AF2 DYNAMIC DATA 2 lt 13 gt DATA FOR LINE 6 lt 17 gt lt 10 gt lt 12 gt DATA FOR LINE 9 lt 1B gt DATA FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL lt 15 gt DATA FOR LINE 11 Form Feed character cc NORMAL When the IGP PGL receives a channel call it searches for that channel from the current print position in the EVFU load sequence to the end of the EVFU load sequence If that channel is found the current print position becomes that channel on the same form If the channel is not found the search continues from the beginning of the EVFU load sequence to the current print position If this search is successful the current form is printed the next form is called and the current print position becomes the channel position in the EVFU If the channel called is not found in either search the channel call is treated as if it were a line feed 486 EVFU Example EVFU Channel Code Sent Line No Form Output 1E Start Load top of form Form 1 DATA FOR LINE 6 undefined hex 17 causes single line feed top of form Form 2 DATA FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL DATA FOR LINE 11 1 1 End Load Figure 80 Sample EVFU Form 487 Appendix E Paper Motion using the EVFU 488 Typefaces This appendix illustrates standard typefaces available with IGP PGL Standard Typefaces The standard fonts available depends on the printer Beside each typeface is the 5 digit value required in the FACE parameter of the FONT c
206. NOTE The CIRCLE command is currently applicable for non impact printers only CREATE XYZ 432 CIRCLE 2 55 55 72 STOP END EXECUTE XYZ NORMAL Figure 5 Circle Example 51 Chapter 2 52 Command Codes Compressed Print Density Purpose Mode Format Comments Example Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch cpi NORMAL EXECUTE cc DENSITY n cc The Special Function Control Code DENSITY Density command enter DENSITY n Selects the density in cpi OCR A or OCR B enter a value of 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 to specify the density in characters per inch the default is 10 cpi or 10A to select 10 cpi OCR A or 10B to select 10 cpi OCR B Print density formats of 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 cpi are available If you need to print at 30 cpi use the Alphanumerics command Cn parameter as described on page 33 Standard print density is 10 cpi After a Density command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified density until another Density command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered The Density command also permits the standard printer editing function carriage return editing After the Density command is entered data in the print buffer can be edited as described in your printer User s Manual The following command selects 15 cpi printing format until another Density command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered D
207. OGO line from the beginning of the TIFF raster data DISK In NORMAL mode use this parameter to store the logo to Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK Do not use this parameter in CREATE mode To store the logo in the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge enter EMC See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 row Identifies the row number for each row of dots in the logo Enter each row number on a separate command line Rows are numbered sequentially from top to bottom dot Identifies a single dot position in the row Enter each dot number used Dots are numbered sequentially from left to right dot1 dot2 Identifies a series of dot positions within the row including dot on the left end and dot2 on the right end Enter the series of dot rows Series of dot rows can be combined with single dot positions in the same command line END Terminates the Create Logo mode enter END STOP Ends the Create Logo command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 100 Logo Mode Create Comments The logo is defined by specifying the overall size and the rows of data used The actual number of logos you can create and store depends on the memory required for each logo The maximum logo size allowed is 252 rows high 3 5 inches and 240 columns wide 4 inches Values exceeding either of these dimensions will produce an error To maximize memory space do not define the vertical
208. OT use the comment feature on lines containing an SFCC e g commands used within NORMAL or EXECUTE mode Throughout this manual comments are provided in parenthesis beside most command lines for better understanding of IGP PGL operation but should not be included in your IGP PGL files See Form Examples on page 377 for some examples Storing Data To send data to the IGP PGL use a system command such as PRINT Entering data through the keyboard does not store data in nonvolatile IGP PGL memory Once stored in memory the data remains until deleted the IGP PGL is reset with the RESET command or until the printer is turned off IGP PGL files can be permanently stored to deleted from and retrieved from the Onboard Flash Memory by ending CREATE CREATE LOGO CREATE MACRO DELETE FORM DELETE LOGO DELETE MACRO EXECUTE and DIRECTORY commands with DISK For example the following command creates a form named ORDER and stores it in the Onboard Flash Memory cc CREATE ORDER DISK Executing a form or calling a logo will access the flash memory automatically if the object is not found in RAM NOTE While the printer does not contain a floppy disk drive the DISK command has been retained to provide backward compatibility with earlier printer models and command syntax Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression PGL logos support uncompressed and packed bits compression methods CCITT and LZR used for color compression
209. OW 35 9 gt SERIAL NUMBER COLUMN 50 COLUMN 17 ROW 40 3 PART NUMBER MFG DATE DESCRIPTION ROW 45 3 INTERFACE VERSION ROW 54 Call ACME MOTOR for more information 714 863 1900 ROW 55 COLUMN 26 ROW 49 3 COLUMN 34 Figure 68 Practice Form Example 396 Adding A Bar Code Adding A Bar Code 11 12 13 14 Change the form definition by adding bar code type Code 39 C39 one of the codes available on the IGP PGL First reopen the file Bar codes are defined in the Create Form mode therefore the Bar Code command must be entered before the End command line In the Bar Code command specify type C39 and 0 8 inch height Hn Use a dynamic bar code data field BF identified by the number n 1 with a length L of 5 The actual data will be provided dynamically in the Execute Form mode Specify the starting row SH 35 7 and starting column SC 39 and stop the command Enter Format BARCODE BARCODE C3 9 H8 BF1 5 DARK 35 7 39 9 0 DIR Hn m BFn L DARK SES SC STOP STOP To dynamically input alphanumeric data fields first identify the locations for the data in the Create Form mode as part of the form definition Enter the locations in the existing Alpha command sequence or use a new Alpha command In the Alpha command sequence enter the alphanumeric field AF the field number n length L st
210. PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE PLESSEY DIR MAG Designates bar code type Plessey enter PLESSEY Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected he
211. PI However when using the Normal font the PDF will be automatically sized to fit the length of the bar code symbol if necessary NOTE Vertical bar codes print only in standard 10 cpi font because OCR fonts cannot be rotated If an OCR type font is selected with a vertical bar code command the standard 10 cpi font is substituted automatically Table 12 IGP PGL Bar Code Specification Summary for 12 Mil Tip Impact Printers Magnification Average Narrow Character Description Element Width Ratio Parameter Density cpi mils Codabar x1 16 7 5 4 4 3 2 1 Code 39 X1 13 8 4 5 3 1 X1A 13 8 5 5 2 1 X1B 13 8 5 0 2 5 1 X2 31 0 2 3 2 3 1 X3 44 8 1 5 2 5 1 X4 58 6 1 2 2 4 1 Code 128A x1 13 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 Code 128B X1 5 20 7 5 0 4 3 2 1 Code 93 X2 27 3 3 3 4 3 2 1 UPS 11 X3 41 4 2 2 4 3 2 1 X4 55 2 1 7 4 3 2 1 Code 128 X1 13 8 13 2 4 3 2 1 UCC EAN 128 X1 5 20 7 9 9 4 3 2 1 GS1 128 formerly X2 27 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 UCC EAN 128 X3 41 4 4 4 4 3 2 1 X4 55 2 3 3 4 3 2 1 8 and 13 default 13 8 1 05 MAG 4 3 2 1 Interleaved 2 5 x1 13 8 8 1 3 1 German 1 2 5 X1A 17 2 7 1 2 6 1 ITF 14 X1B 13 8 10 4 2 1 Matrix X2 31 0 4 2 2 3 1 X2A 27 6 5 2 2 1 X3 44 8 2 8 2 5 1 X4 58 6 2 2 2 4 1 MSI A X1 13 8 7 6 3 1 MSI B X2 20 7 5 0 2 5 1 MSI C x3 27 6 3 8 2 3 1 MSI D X4 34 5 3 0 2 3 1 Plessey UPC A and E default 13 8 1 05 MAG 4 3 2 1 PostBar x1 n a n a n a Royal Mail X1A Australian Post
212. PRINTRONIX IGP PGL Emulation for T2 N Printronix Graphics Language Programmer s Reference Manual IGP PGL Emulation for T2N M Printronix Graphics Language Programmers Reference Manual PRINIRONIX Printronix Inc makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix Inc shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix Inc COPYRIGHT 2008 2013 PRINTRONIX INC All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corp IGP LinePrinter Plus LaserLine PGL ThermaLine and Printronix are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc T2N is a trademark of Printronix Inc This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifon
213. R EMC SCALE DOT 300 300 BOX 2 74 74 449 2474 STOP HORZ 2 262 74 2474 5 VERT 2 674 262 450 2 1874 262 450 2 1274 262 450 FONT FACE 91409 SYMSET 13 ALPHA 218 375 2 2 Invoice 218 855 2 2 Number 381 315 0 0 CODE 381 855 0 0 QUANTITY 381 1500 0 0 PRICE 381 2100 0 0 TOTAL STOP MACROEND 104 Normal Mode Normal Mode Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Normal mode of operation where the data stream is not changed but monitored for a Special Function Control Code followed by an IGP PGL command Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc NORMAL cc The Special Function Control Code NORMAL Normal mode command enter NORMAL Comments Normal mode is entered automatically when the printer is powered on with IGP PGL In Normal mode the IGP PGL uses the default font and line spacing values unless otherwise configured with explicit commands A blank line or overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command unless a form count is given for the EXECUTE Optimize Purpose Performs the same function as the front panel menu Optimize amp Reboot Optimizes the flash file in memory and then reboots NOTE The Optimize command is not supported on all printer models Some models do not require this function to reclaim flash If this command is not supported it will be absorbed Mode NORMAL Format cc OPTIMIZE cc The Special Function Control
214. R fonts from existing characters stored on the flash memory Mode NORMAL Format cc USET n Represents the Special Function Control Code USET The User Set command enter USET n Selects USET character set number enter a value ranging from 1 through 8 Represents the ASCII character cell hex address which will have its contents replaced with the character located in the font address fa The ca value must be one of the 16 hex values specified in Table 52 on page 418 fa Represents the hexadecimal value for the font address of a specified character in the Multinational character set page 431 which will replace the current contents of ca The fa value is the character substitution for the cell address ca The value of fa may range from hex 20 through FF END Ends the USET command Comments You can define up to 16 character substitutions for each of the eight user definable character sets It is not necessary to address all 16 spaces available for character substitutions with a single USET command The character sets in the USET command are numbered 1 through 8 The character set values in the Character Set Selection ISET command page 423 are numbered 24 through 31 and correspond to User Sets 1 through 8 The ISET command accesses and prints that custom character set The USET and ISET commands are related as shown in Table 54 Therefore ISET 24 selects the substitution set defined as
215. RFRTAG RFID only Scale SCALE v v Scaling SMODE v SFOFF d VERIFY VERIFY ODV only Execute Mode Commands This section covers Execute Mode commands Table 59 Execute Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Compressed Print DENSITY v Dynamic Alphanumeric Data E 7 Dynamic Logo GFn v v Expanded Print EXPAND v v Font FONT v v Hex Sequence HEXON Y On Off HEXOFF aoe 463 Appendix 464 Execute Mode Commands Table 59 Execute Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Incremental Alphanumeric v Dynamic Data Incremental Bar Code Dynamic IBFn v Y Data Line Spacing v 2 Vertical Multinational i Character Set ISET Normal Mode NORMAL 107 107 Reset RESET v v Select Format SFON vi On Off SFOFF gt O A 20 oot v gt Standard ASCII Character Set B7 B6 BITS P5 B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX ASCII CHARACTER 1 o E AR o 5 m E 2 m A o co o M A a RIS 81 a NN m lt lt Ke E zx E NN N
216. RIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER 40 3 17 0 0 PART NUMBER 40 3 50 0 0 MFG DATE 45 3 17 0 0 DESCRIPTION 49 3 17 0 0 INTERFACE 49 3 50 0 0 VERSION C13 31 16 0 0 FROM C15 54 26 0 0 Call ACME for more information C15 55 34 0 0 714 863 1900 AF1 7 38 7 19 3 4 3 AF2 11 43 20 2 2 AF3 31 47 3 20 2 1 4 33 51 3 20 2 5 BARCODE C3 9 H8 BF1 5 DARK 35 7 39 STOP END PRACTICE AF1 49114 AF2 106772 902 AF3 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR AF4 PARALLEL CENTRONICS BF1 49114 NORMAL PRINT PRACTC FRM 398 Adding A Bar Code FROM ACME INC 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 COLUMN 19 3 COLUMN 39 SERIAL NUMBER ROW 35 7 4 49114 MFG DATE ROW 43 106772 902 DESCRIPTION ROW 473 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR INTERFACE VERSION ROW 513 PARALLEL CENTRONICS Call ACME for more information 714 863 1900 Figure 69 Completed Practice Form Example Logo Exercise In this exercise you will generate a logo The following sample uses a hand logo Using dot scaling discussed in detail on page 144 on an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form a hand was drawn on a grid with each dot tabulated by row and column position If a grid coordinate occupies half or more of a dot position include that position in your logo program Grid samples are located in Appendix B Each dot position use
217. RINT The Print File command enter PRINT filename The filename to be printed Comments Do not use wildcard characters because the Print File command will attempt to print any file in the Onboard Flash Memory Example Example of how to print SETUP PTR PRINT SETUP PTR 116 Printer Alert Printer Alert Purpose Mode Format To set the printer alert condition After the alert condition is set and the condition event occurs the printer responds immediately with an alert message for the corresponding condition The alert message is sent back to the host NORMAL cc ALERT TYPE n DEST n SET n CLEAR n cc ALERT TYPEn DESTn SETn CLEAR n The Special Function Control Code The printer alert command Enter ALERT The condition type Enter TYPE a space and a letter from the following list paper out B ribbon out C printhead over temp D printhead under temp E head open power supply over temp G ribbon in warning direct thermal mode rewind full defaulted printer J cut error printer paused L batch job completed M label take head element out O runtime error P forced error b binary flags The destination to route alert to Enter DEST a space and a letter A serial port B ethernet data port C ethernet status port Return Status Port return port determined by FP setting Enable condition set alert Enter SET a sp
218. ROW 27 Each corner in the set is 5 dot rows thick 4 character rows high 6 character columns wide HORIZONTAL LENGTH 6 COLUMNS 9 VERTICAL LENGTH 4 ROWS t ROW 42 COLUMN 55 Figure 6 Corner Example CREATE CREATE Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Create Form mode where forms and form elements can be defined using the appropriate commands Mode NORMAL Format CREATE formname FL NOMOTION DISK cc The Special Function Control Code CREATE The Create Form mode command enter CREATE The optional debug character to check the program line by line for incorrect parameters and print boundaries using the current page size enter the slash symbol to debug the program No checks are made until the completed program is sent to the IGP PGL for storage when the form is executed by printing the file with the IGP PGL program Then the form name is entered into the directory and the program is evaluated If errors are detected the program will print line by line including the error on the line where the error occurs followed by the error free sections of the form Correct all errors and delete the slash Refer to Solving Program Errors on page 413 formname Defines the form name of the form being created The form name should be no more than 15 characters in length Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable form name characters If a form is created with the same name as a form already e
219. RTical line starting row SR ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the vertical line command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter VERTical line thickness LT error The thickness of the vertical line specified by the first parameter in the vertical line command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero Not defined 441 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Box Errors 20 BOX starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column specified by the third parameter in the box command places the box outside the form boundaries 21 BOX starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the box specified by the second parameter in the box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form 22 BOX ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column specified by the fifth parameter in the box command places the box outside the form boundaries 23 BOX ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the box specified by the fourth parameter in the box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form 24 BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the box command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the comman
220. Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information 367 Chapter 3 368 Bar Codes SH SC D data field PDF LOC FONT Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human
221. S SBCS text D cc BF n D data D cc GF n D logoname D cc IAF n idir STEPMASK RPT n RST n D STARTDATA D cc IBF idir STEPMASK RPT n RST n D STARTDATA D Overlay Data Form Feed character cc NORMAL NOTE This document only describes the command syntax usage for cc KFn Refer to this manual for other command parameters 497 Appendix G 498 cc KFn Purpose Incorporates the dynamic DBCS data into a previously identified location of a form Mode EXECUTE Format cc KF n D DBCS SBCS text D cc KFn Indicates a dynamic DBCS data field KF and its identification number n which was defined with the TWOBYTE command in the Create form mode D The separation symbol for identifying the starting and ending of DBCS data The requirement for this parameter is the same as that for D in the ALPHA command DBCS DATA The group of DBCS characters to be printed The DBCS string appears as the pre positioned information on the form beginning at the location identified n Contact Information Printronix Customer Support Center IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options i e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout check the User s Manual for instructions on how to prin
222. TXML DELETE LOGO epc300 tif DELETE LOGO PCXLOGO LOGO PCXLOGO PCX Raster Data HASTEREND END SETUPEND CREATE TESTXML 432 DISK SCALE DOT 100 100 LOGO 40 40 PCXLOGO STOP LOGO 40 292 epc300 tif STOP ALPHA AF1 16 POINT 140 180 14 11 STOP END LINK TESTXML DISK AF1 BUSINESS_PARTNER NORMAL Special Function Control Code Change Purpose Changes the current Special Function Control Code SFCC Mode NORMAL or EXECUTE Format cc SFCC n or cc SFCC cc The current Special Function Control Code SFCC Specifies the Special Function Control Code change command Enter SFCC the semicolon is required n Represents the ASCII numeric value for the new SFCC Replace n with an ASCII value from 0 through 255 n Represents the hexadecimal value for a printable character as the new SFCC Replace n with a hexadecimal value from 20 through 7F If representing the new SFCC in hexadecimal it must be enclosed in single quotes TIFF Logo Comments When the SFCC is changed using the SFCC command the change is effective immediately and the old SFCC is no longer recognized When printer power is turned off and on the SFCC returns to the configuration default The configuration default SFCC can also be re selected by sending the command cc SFCC Example The following example using both the ASCII and hexadecimal values changes the SFCC from the tilde to the caret SFCC
223. The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at seven digits plus any add on data d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data The characters of the bar code data are restricted t
224. The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit Two modulo 47 check digits are automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm Code 93 Code 93 Command Format BARCODE CODE93 DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE CODE93 Designates bar code type Code 93 enter CODE93 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional
225. UCCINC 3 NORMAL 249 Chapter 3 Codes PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER 4002 0119600001 PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER 4002 0119600002 PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER 4002 0119600003 Figure 27 UCC EAN 128 Example 2 250 GS1 128 The following example shows the use of dynamic data The ship to postal code Al 420 is used to encode 5 digit ZIP Codes CREATE UCCDYN 140 BARCODE UCC 128 BF1 8 3 20 PDF X STOP ALPHA DARK 1 20 0 0 SHIP TO POSTAL STOP END EXECUTE UCCDYN 1 42092614 NORMAL EXECUTE UCCDYN 1 42090210 NORMAL EXECUTE UCCDYN 1 42090028 NORMAL SHIP TO POSTAL 420 92614 SHIP TO POSTAL 420590210 SHIP TO POSTAL D 420290028 Figure 28 UCC EAN 128 Example 3 251 Chapter 3 252 THERMAL Bar Codes GS1 Databar NOTE GS1 Databar is formerly known as RSS Barcode The GS1 Databar barcode is a linear symbology that encodes the primary data UCC EAN 128 format In addition the RSS14 barcode can have an optional 2 D composite portion that encodes any secondary data the user wants to include such as additional Al element information This primary data portion follows the UCC EAN 128 format For all RSS14 variations except RSS Expanded the primary data portion is restricted to the Al application identifier of 01 Given a maximum of 15 digits it drops the Al of 01 and encodes
226. UE FORM SLEW 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled TRUNC DYN DATA 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled UPC DESCENDERS 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled UPPERCASE 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r UPCASE DOT 0 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r USER DEF RATIO 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled v TAM T5000r VAR FORM ADJUST 0 1 30 0 Add Nothing VAR FORM 1 Add v v 2 Add X Comments The IGP PGL configuration parameters available are defined in your User s Manual Any or all parameters can be used within one CONFIG command and they can be listed in any order List each parameter value a separate line terminating with the END command Default configuration values can be reset using the CONFIG command Parameters not followed by a value and parameters followed by any non zero value are interpreted as true or enabled values For carriage return and line feed definitions a zero value does not change the data stream However for non zero values a carriage return character or line feed character will be interpreted as a carriage return plus a line feed Parameters not listed in this command remain unchanged If a parameter error is detected for parameters other than 0 or 1 i e SFCC Top Bottom Margin Left Margin the value will default to the current configuration from flash memory 57 Chapter 2 58 Command Codes Example 1 The following command en
227. WOBYTE Command Syntax Thermal Create Form TWOBYTE Command Purpose Defines and positions DBCS data on a pre printed static field or as a dynamic data field TWOBYTE R E Cn KFn L DIR POINT SR SC VE HE D DBCS SBCS TEXT D STOP TWOBYTE The DBCS characters command enter TWOBYTE R The optional reverse printing white on black parameter Enter R to specify a black background E The optional elongated character parameter Enter E to specify elongated character printing Elongated characters are double height and single width If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0 or an error message will result Elongated character printing is also available with rotated DBCS characters Cn The optional horizontal CPI parameter for DBCS character pitch Where n can be the following 7 5 CPI n2 75 6 7 CPI n 67 6 0 CPI n 60 5 0 CPI n 50 n specifies the DBCS character pitch expressed in CPI If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to zero or an error message will result KFn L The optional dynamic DBCS data field parameter for identifying the DBCS string s dynamic number assignment and designating the number of DBCS characters allowed If these parameters are used the actual text cannot be entered during the Create Form mode it must be entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Dynamically entering data during the Execute mode permits changes to the DBCS text without
228. a 13 digit identification number for use on small items The symbol consists of five regions namely the left guard the left data character the check character the right data character and the right guard The mod 10 checkdigit is not encoded in the actual barcode but is included in the PDF data automatically by PGL RSS 14 Databar The RSS14 Databar barcode type uses of 01 and must come with 13 digits following the Al The symbol consists of a left guard 1st data character left finder pattern 2nd data character 4th data character right finder pattern 3rd data character and finally the right guard The height of the bars for the symbol is 33x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter RSS 14 Databar Truncated The RSS14TRU barcode type is the same as the RSS 14 Databar barcode except that the height of the bars for the symbol is only 13x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter RSS 14 Databar Stacked The RSS14STK barcode type is a RSS 14 Databar Truncated format in which the symbol is split into two rows The top row is 5x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter a row separator is 1x the vertical element and the bottom row is 7x the vertical element in height RSS 14 Stacked is used when the available space is too narrow for RSS Limited RSS 14 Databar Stacked Omnidirectional The RSS14OMNI barcode type is a full height RSS 14 Databar in which the symbol is split into two rows The top row is
229. a is restricted to alphanumeric characters through 2 and 0 through 9 If using the KIX format for Royal Mail lowercase characters a through Z are also valid Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The height of the bars Full Height has a maximum of 0 230 inches and a minimum of 0 165 inches Check Digit For PostBar you are responsible for encoding and check digit For Royal Mail a modulo 6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field KIX Format The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start stop code or the check digit 329 Chapter 3 Codes PostBar and Royal Mail Command Format BARCODE POSTBAR or ROYALBAR KIX NLQ MAG BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE POSTBAR or ROYALBAR KIX NLQ MAG Designates bar code type PostBar or Royal Mail enter POSTBAR or ROYALBAR Optional parameter to specify the KIX format for Royal Mail bar codes only enter KIX Optional parameter optimized to print barcodes at NLQ print density 180x96 This may cause line matrix printers to reverse motion when the form prints This parameter is ignored for other printer types Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default va
230. able data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified For German 1 2 5 fields of the data are separated by dots and spaces LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a
231. ables IGP PGL Auto Wrap disables Auto Eject and selects printing CONFIG AUTO WRAP 1 AUTO 0 LPI 6 END Example 2 The following command resets all control panel IGP PGL configuration parameters back to default values CONFIG RESET END Corners Purpose Defines corner sets Mode CREATE Format CORNER LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP CORNER The Corner command enter CORNER Corners expand down and to the right from the given row and column LT Defines the line thickness measured in dots Line thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1 72 both horizontally and vertically so that line thickness is equal in both directions Enter a value of 1 or greater SH Defines the starting row of the corner Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 SC Defines the starting column of the corner Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 VL HL STOP Corners Defines the ending row of the corner Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row in millimeters is s
232. ace and 1 to enable or to disable Enable condition clear alert Enter CLEAR a space and 1 to enable or 0 to disable Comment Currently only the condition type L batch job completed and b binary flags are supported 117 Chapter 2 Command Codes Example 1 The following example shows the format of printer alert command where the printer responds with an alert message BATCH JOB NOT COMPLETED before the job is completed and an alert message BATCH JOB COMPLETED when the batch job is completed The alert message is sent back to the host through Serial ALERT TYPE L DEST A SET 1 CLEAR 1 Example 2 The following example shows the alert command format in which the printer will respond with an alert message whenever one of the supported states change The alert message is sent to the host through the port selected by the Ret Status Port FP setting NOTE The CLEAR setting will have no effect on this alert type The response send will always be 10 bytes long The meaning of the status bytes is explained in the table below ALERT TYPE b DEST R SET 1 CLEAR 0 d Bit Status Description ByteO 7 0 Response Start Marker STX character Byte 1 7 Online 1 printer online 0 printer offline 6 Error 1 error 0 no error 5 Not Used Always 1 4 Processing 1 processing 0 not processing 3 Printing 1 printing 0 not printing 2 Power Save 1
233. acter To print alphanumeric and bar code data must be enclosed by a printable character a delimiter This delimiter is represented by D in the command format In this manual an asterisk is used in most examples as the printable character The parentheses are not entered Any printable character can be used as this delimiter except a slash or the SFCC The same printable character must be used at both the beginning and end of the text to be printed and cannot be used within the text 28 Spaces Spaces Spaces are used in the general command formats to visually separate individual command parameters Supply the appropriate information for the command parameter but do not enter the spaces in the command sequence they are shown simply as a visual aid to illustrate where one command parameter ends and another begins Command Parameters Most commands include a number of parameters Some are optional and some are required Each parameter must be separated by a semicolon unless noted otherwise Throughout this manual actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered and all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets but do not enter the brackets Parentheses indicate variable data You have a choice of what to enter but you must enter something Do not enter the parentheses themselves Form Name You must use a
234. acter N A 0 Represents a FNC1 character N A ESC1 ECE character 1 digit ESC2 ECE character 2 digits ESC 3 ECE character 3 digits 4 ECE character 4 digits 5 ECE character 5 digits ESC 6 ECE character 6 digits ESC Invalid N A Symbol Characteristics The following tables illustrate the maximum data capacities for the Aztec barcode for the Compact and Full Range Format with all possible layer values Table 16 Compact Format Characteristics Layers 1 4 Layers Symbol Size ceu Max Text Max Text Max 8 Byte 1 15 X15 17x6 13 12 6 2 19 X 19 40x6 40 33 19 3 23 X 23 51x8 70 57 33 4 27X27 76 x8 110 89 53 176 Table 17 Full Format Characteristics Layer 1 32 Aztec Barcode Codeword Layers Symbol Size Count x Size Max Text Max Text Max 8 Byte 1 19 X 19 21x6 18 15 8 2 23 X 23 48x6 49 40 24 3 27X27 60x8 84 68 40 4 31 X 31 88 x 8 128 104 62 5 37 X 37 120 x8 178 144 87 6 41 X 41 156x8 232 187 114 7 45 X 45 196x8 294 236 145 8 49 X 49 240x8 362 291 179 9 53 X 53 230 x 10 516 414 256 10 57X57 272 x 10 516 414 256 11 61X 61 316 x 10 601 482 298 12 67 X 67 364 x 10 691 554 343 13 71X71 416 x 10 793 636 394 14 75 75 470 x 10 896 718 446 15 79 X 79 528 x 10 1008 808 502 16 83 X 83 588 x 10 1123 900 559 17 87 X 87 652 x 10 1246 998 621 18 91 X 91 720
235. acter sets Data Bit 8 420 Extended Character Sets 420 Power Up character set selection 420 Accessing characters and character sets Multinational Character Sets 419 Activate user defined overlay set 427 Adding a Bar Code Bar Code adding 397 Advancing the print position introduction 477 Alpha errors 444 Alphanumeric Command 395 Alphanumeric Data 23 Dynamic data 23 Fixed data 23 Overlay data 23 Alphanumerics 33 Alphanumerics incremental dynamic data fields 44 fixed data fields 41 Alphanumerics incremental fields 38 using incremental alphanumeric data 38 Australian 4 State 168 command format 170 example 173 Auto Increment Fields example 388 Automatic Increment Decrement Capability IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Aztec Barcode 174 B Bar Code Australian 4 State 168 Aztec Barcode 174 BC412 Barcode 179 Codabar 183 Code 128A 128B and 128C 206 Code 35 188 Code 39 191 Code 93 199 Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields 376 EAN 13 224 EAN 8 218 errors 450 456 fields 384 FIM 231 German 1 2 5 277 GS1 Data Matrix 261 GS1 Databar 252 GS1 128 238 HIBC 271 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields 375 Incremental Fields 370 Intelligent Mail 4 State 273 Interleaved 2 5 277 ITF 14 277 2 5 277 Matrix 283 Maxicode 289 MSI 295 overview 157 PDF 417 301 Planet 311 501 Plessey 317 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 POSTNET 323 QR 3
236. acters 12 characters 24 characters 37 characters 53 characters 72 characters 92 characters 115 characters 140 characters 168 characters 197 characters 229 characters 264 characters 300 characters 339 characters 380 characters 424 characters 469 characters 500 characters 560 characters 596 characters 2 characters 8 characters 16 characters 25 characters 35 characters 48 characters 61 characters 76 characters 93 characters 112 characters 131 characters 153 characters 176 characters 200 characters 226 characters 253 characters 282 characters 313 characters 345 characters 378 characters 413 characters 1 character 5 characters 10 characters 16 characters 23 characters 31 characters 40 characters 50 characters 61 characters 73 characters 86 characters 100 characters 115 characters 131 characters 148 characters 166 characters 185 characters 205 characters 226 characters 248 characters 271 characters Table 32 ECC 050 Characteristics GS1 Datamatrix Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 11 X 11 18 X 13 15 X 15 17 X 17 19 X 19 21 X21 23 X 23 25 X25 27 X 27 29 X 29 31 X 31 33 X 33 35 X 35 37 X37 39 X 39 41 X41 43 X 43 45 X 45 47 X47 49 X 49 1 character 10 characters 20 characters 32 characters 46 characters 61 characters 78 characters 97 characters 118 characters 140 characters 164 characters 190 charac
237. al cartridges Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Korean and Japanese All Andal fonts support UTF 8 ASCII and DBCS data which cover most of the characters in Unicode 3 0 To select an Andal font with the FONT NAME command use one of the following commands FONT NAME anmdt ttf Traditional Chinese Andal FONT NAME anmds ttf Simplified Chinese Andal FONT NAME anmdk ttf Korean Andal FONT NAME anmdj ttf Japanese Andal Font Load Font Load Purpose Load binary TrueType Font ttf or Intellifont sf into RAMDISK or Flash memory Mode NORMAL Format cc FONTLOAD name size DISK data END cc The Special Function Control Code FONTLOAD The Font Load command enter FONTLOAD name Specify associated binary TrueType font or Intellifont data by name Enter the name of the font including its extension The maximum length of the name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the extension is 3 characters For example 93952 sf specifies Courier New Bold Intellifont and arial ttf would represent Arial TrueType size Enter the size in bytes of the binary TrueType font or Intellifont data DISK Optional parameter to store the binary data to Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK for Onboard Flash Memory Enter EMC for the SD card or External Memory Cartridge When DISK is not specified the font is stored on RAMDISK Refer to Flash Memory Storage on page 24 data The binary TrueType font or Intell
238. al Service Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation USPS Certified POSTNET 162 Magnification Specifications Magnification Specifications The magnification specifications for each bar code differ whether the bar code is printed horizontally or vertically and whether it is printed on a 203 dpi or 300 dpi printer Table 14 summarizes the specifications for each bar code Table 14 IGP Bar Code Specification Summary Narrow Element Width Barcode Character Density Mgnific tion in 0 0001 inches ratio cpi Parameter 553 dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300dpi 203dpi 203dpi 300dpi 300 203 203dpi 300dpi 300 dpi horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert horiz vert Code 39 and Telepen X1 196 199 183 200 2 1 1 281 261 251 13 9 3 3 3 7 3 5 X2 344 350 367 283 2 7 1 1913 251 281 11 9 2 3 1 9 2 3 x3 492 501 550 416 3 1 2 1 251 271 11 3 1 6 1 3 1 6 X4 738 600 667 550 2 2 1 241 2 7 1 2 91 1 1 2 1 1 2 X1A 320 149 150 151 19 1 2 71 261 251 47 4 5 4 6 4 6 X1B 172 199 183 182 2 3 1 331 2 411 381 14 2 3 4 1 3 X1C 98 98 133 133 25 1 261 2813 2 81 17 1 7 5 5 X1D 98 100 133 133 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 22 4 17 9 7 8 5 5 5 5 98 99 99 100 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 7 1 2 71 71 7 6 7 6 8 98 100 99 100 2 5 1 2 1 241 231 17 1 7 8 7 2 7 2 X1G 48 77 66 95 3 1 1 25 1 2 61 2 2 1 112 8 8 8 10 4 7 8 X1H 99 98 98 96 3 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 32 1 16 3 6 3 6 3 6 3 X2A 344 299 367 2
239. alth Industry Bar Code HIBC is encoded in either Code 128 or Code 39 symbology In a global setting HIBC identifies health industry products in any quantity of any lot or serial number with any expiration date HIBC represents two kinds of information Primary and Secondary Identification Primary Identification represents product identity and Secondary Identification represents the attributes of Lot or Batch Code Serial Number and Expiration date Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm For HIBC barcode a mandatory modulo 43 checklist is inserted at the end of the data Code 128 Command Format BARCODE C128A or C128B or C128C HIBC DIR Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT MAX STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE C128A C128B or C12BC HIBC Designates bar code type Code 128 enter C128A C128B or C128C The Health Industry Bar Code HIBC is encoded in either Code 128 or Code 39 symbology Enter HIBC In a global setting HIBC can uniquely identify any health industry product in any quantity of any lot or serial number with any expiration date HIBC represents two kinds of information Primary and Secondary Identification Primary Identification represents product identity and Second
240. alue of 1 Enter INFO then one of the values shown in Table 15 Table 15 FCC Codes Customer Information Fields and Maximum Bar Code Lengths 170 Customer Maximum Length FCC FCCn Information Valid Data Sorting Number INFOn Customer Data 11 87 45 or 92 n a Any 8 0 59 1 A Z a z 0 9 space 8 5 59 2 0 9 8 7 59 3 0 3 8 15 44 62 1 2 a z 0 9 space 8 10 44 62 2 0 9 8 15 44 62 3 0 3 8 30 NOTE For an INFOn value of 3 the digits 0 through 3 represent the following bars 0 Full Height 1 Ascender 2 Descender 3 Tracker Since this is a proprietary encoding the Customer Data is not included in the optional readable data field DIR Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure vertically Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented NLQ MAG Australian 4 State Optional parameter optimized to print barcodes at NLQ print density 180x96 This may cause line matrix printers to reverse motion when the form prints This parameter is ignored for other printer types Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts print
241. and horizontal length of the logo grid larger than is required to capture the design The printer produces a grid with 72 dots per inch vertically and 60 dots per inch horizontally Consequently a logo must be designed using this scale The Logo Call command page 97 in the Create Form mode brings the predefined logo into a form The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid Once created the logo is ready to be used in any form and will print at the size shown Example The following program produced the tape holder logo LOGO TAPEHOLD 36 40 1 12 18 2 10 20 3 9 22 4 8 24 5 7 25 6 6 26 7 5 26 8 4 25 9 4 25 10 3 24 11 3 24 VL 36 12 2 23 13 2 23 14 2 14 17 23 15 1 12 19 22 38 39 16 1 12 20 23 37 40 HL 40 17 1 11 20 23 37 40 18 1 11 20 23 36 40 19 1 11 20 23 36 40 20 1 11 20 23 35 40 21 1 12 20 24 35 40 22 1 12 19 24 34 39 23 1 14 17 25 33 39 24 1 28 31 39 2551239 26 2 38 27 2 38 28 2 37 2973 37 30 3 36 31 3 36 32 4 35 33 5 34 34 6 33 35332 36 9 30 END 101 Chapter 2 102 Command Codes Macro Call Purpose Selects and positions previously defined macro s within the form The contents of the macro itself are defined separately in the Create Macro mode The macro is a collection of Create Form mode commands and can be positioned at different offsets within the form Mode CREATE Format MACRO macroname SR SC MACRO
242. and in the EXECUTE mode Enter IDF to indicate this field is a bit field with dynamical assignment of increment or decrement data The step and startdata parameters will be supplied by the IDF command in the EXECUTE mode Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 512 to identify the field number of this bit field Dynamically enter the step and startdata parameters using the IDF command in the EXECUTE mode NOTE 1 The same field number cannot be used in both DFn and IDFn 2 If a field is defined as IDFn it must be referenced as IDFn later for consistency The same applies for DFn 3 If lt IDFn gt syntax is used for merging data into AFn or BFn neither DFn AFn or BFn will be incremented The increment only takes place in the DFn command where the STEP is specified format D datafield A letter specifying the format of the data field B binary D decimal hexadecimal Delimiter designating the start and end of static data for this bit field Replace D with any printable character except the SFCC and the slash character The static data of this static field It is a mandatory parameter of bit field with static data Identifies this field is an incremental bit field RFID PGL Commands STEP Specifies that the incremental data field will use the step method Enter STEP The STEP option replaces the STEPMASK option that is used in Alpha and Barcode idir Enter a plus sign or leave the fi
243. and will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form CORNER ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column specified by the fifth parameter in the corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries CORNER ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the corner specified by the fourth parameter in the corner command will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form CORNER horizontal length HL out of bounds The length of the horizontal arms of the corner specified by the seventh parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend outside the form boundaries CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds The length of the vertical arms of the corner specified by the sixth parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend above or below the boundaries of the form CORNER format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the corner command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the CORNER No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for another corner The rest of the corner commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then
244. annot be mixed with RFWRITE in the same form 2 Each field structure must be specified in a single line and in the order it appears in the RFID tag from MSB bits to LSB bits left to right The sum of all the field lengths must match the size of the tag 3 The host data are read in as ASCII characters They would be converted to binary representation for the base field on the field format Therefore if the converted value is larger than the maximum value that a field can hold an error will be reported If the data value is smaller than the specified field length on the other hand the field will be padded to the left with zero bits 4 Unlike the Alpha and Barcode command which use STEPMASK for incremental data RFWTAG uses the STEP which will increment or decrement at bit level 131 Chapter 2 132 Command Codes 5 432 IGP dots in the CREATE line specifies a 6 inch label 6 inches 432 IGP dots 72 dpi Use 144 for 2 inch labels and 288 for 4 inch labels 6 ACS and KIL are similar to other memory banks ACS contains the passcode which is used for LOCK and UNLOCK operations KIL contains the killcode which is used to kill a tag The user can write to or read from KIL memory bank but the functionality of killing a tag is not currently applicable Also once ACS and KIL are locked both cannot be written to or read from For other memory banks EPC USR and TID once locked they can be read from but not written to 7
245. ansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L 209 Chapter 3 Codes DARK SH SC D data field PDF 210 d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field pa
246. arcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 363 Chapter 3 5 8 5 9 364 Bar Codes UPCSHIP Example CREATE UPCSHIP BARCODE UPCSHIP H12 9 8 0014154401171 PDF STOP BARCODE UPCSHIP VSCAN 3 45 1141281029432 PDF A STOP END EXECUTE UPCSHIP 1 NORMAL 01 41544 01171 5 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command UPCSHIP Bar Code height 1 2 inches at SR 9 SC 8 Data Field Print Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command Vertical UPCSHIP Bar Code at SR 3 Data Field Print Data Field above the bar code Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 45 SC 45 SR3 1 14 12810 29432 O Figure 59 Sample UPCSHIP Bar Codes UPS 11 UPS 11 The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 60 and described on the following pages rF 71 I QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 0 r I OPTIONAL I CHECK l CCW DIGIT 1 1 OPTIONAL i READABLE i FIELD 1 UPPER 1 1 LOWER LOWER GUARD 91 jt GUARD GUARD 1 BAND Ho 53 QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE
247. are not expandable Supported Character Sets The Multinational Character Set provides the PGL with space for 32 character sets 96 characters each The character sets and their corresponding set values are listed in Table 50 along with the single extended character set Table 50 Multinational Character Sets and Set Values Character Set Value Character Set Value U S ASCII 0 Spanish 9 German 1 Italian 10 Swedish 2 Turkish 11 Danish 3 CP 437 12 Norwegian 4 CP 850 13 Finnish 5 Reserved 14 23 English 6 User Defined Sets 24 31 Dutch 7 French 8 415 Chapter 5 _ Multinational Character Sets Sets 0 through 13 are resident character sets Sets 14 through 23 are reserved spaces in font memory for future resident character sets If a value from 14 through 23 is called when attempting to choose a character set the character font will default to ASCII The last eight addressable character set values 24 through 31 are reserved for user defined sets You can create custom character sets from existing characters in font memory If you select a set value from 24 to 31 when no new character set has been created or assigned that value the character font will default to ASCII Refer to page 431 for printouts of the primary and extended character sets and their corresponding values To select one of these sets using the SYMSET option of the font command or the ISET command use the appropriate value as stated above C
248. area will be permanently locked Blocks 1 3 and 4 will remain unlocked and able to be written X H NOMOTION RFWTAG LOCKOCODOEOF H 32 ACS 32 H 0CODOEOF STOP RFWTAG BLOCKPERMALOCKOCODOEOF 128 USR 2 16 128 H 3038CE1CC3CAB40000000001000577EA STOP END EXECUTE X NORMAL RFRTAG Purpose Mode Format RFID PGL Commands To read the content of an RFID tag embedded in a smart label into a dynamic field This command cannot be mixed with the RFREAD command NOTE The RFRTAG command is supported only on Thermal printers CREATE RFRTAG UNLOCKnf format size j mem bank Bit Field STOP RFRTAG size Specifies the RFRTAG command enter RFRTAG A decimal number specifying the overall bit length of the RFID tag memory bank UNLOCKn format mem bank Optional parameter to unlock the data block so it can be overwritten later n is the passcode The acceptable values for n are 1 to FFFFFFFF in hex a 4 bytes data The value of n should be the same passcode used for the LOCK option to unlock the protected data block When the UNLOCKn option is used to unlock any memory bank which at the same is programmed to read the tag the operation UNLOCKn will not unlock ACS memory area The passcode n can also be in dynamic format For dynamic format enter LOCK lt DFn gt where DFn is the dynamic field defined in EXECUTE mode format is the optional parameter to specify the format for th
249. arranged around a unique finder pattern Maxicode is suitable for high speed scanning applications and is capable of encoding all of the 256 ASCII characters Readable Data The Maxicode bar code does not support a human readable form Data Field The data field of a Maxicode bar code is divided into a primary message and a secondary message The primary message has a fixed structure while the secondary message has a free format The maximum number of characters encoded in the message depends on the error correction mechanism used When the Standard Error Correction SEC method is in use see the Mn definition below a maximum of 84 symbol characters can be encoded Each segment in the secondary message is 21 characters long Maxicode Command Format BARCODE MAXICODE Z DIR BFr5L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE MAXICODE Designates bar code type Maxicode enter MAXICODE Mn Parameter that specifies the bar code mode Valid values are 2 3 4 6 and D Default value is 2 Table 39 defines the modes supported 289 Chapter 3 290 Bar Codes Table 39 Maxicode Bar Code Modes Mode Definition Primary and secondary messages employ SEC Primary message is a structured carrier message with a numeric postal code Primary and secondary messages employ SEC Primary message is a structured carrier message with an alphanumeric postal code Pr
250. arting row SR and column SC and any vertical VE or horizontal HE expansion To enter this alphanumeric data in the existing Alpha command sequence the data must be entered before the existing Alpha command STOP line Enter Format AF1 7 38 7 19 3 3 3 R Cn AFn L T D A UC DARK AF2 11 43 20 2 2 POINT HSn SR SC VE HE D text D AF3 31 47 3 20 2 1 AF4 33 51 3 20 2 1 Supply the dynamic data during the Execute Form mode following the EXECUTE PRACTICE line Use the SFCC specify the dynamic alphanumeric field AF bar code field BF the field number corresponding to those just entered in the form definition and the data itself This method can be repeated to supply new data to each form printed by separating the pages of data with a form feed Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 77 Enter Format AF1 49114 cc AFn D data D AF2 106772 902 AF3 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR AF4 PARALLEL CENTRONICS BF1 49114 cc BFn D data D Now the PRACTC FRM file contains all the following information the complete form program Print the form by printing the file The completed form is shown in Figure 69 CREATE PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 STOP CORNER 3308133573642 5207 397 Chapter 4 Form Exercise STOP HORZ 1 40 16 61 1 45 16 61 1 49 16 61 STOP VERT 1 49 40 45 1 49 49 53 STOP ALPHA 31 22 0 0 ACME INC 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTW
251. ary Identification represents the attributes of Lot or Batch Code Serial Number and Expiration date When encoding HIBC barcode in UCC 128 HIBC is essentially a UCC 128 barcode The encoding uses the same module 10 check digit and data format The only addition is an Application Identifier Al parameter For Primary Data Structure use 01 and for Secondary Data Structure use 22 or AI 240 To use UCC 128 to encode be sure to use the correct parameter to obtain the desired results DIR MAG Hn m Code 128A 128B and 128C Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order as specified Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical exp
252. at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character For HIBC barcode the data field is a variable length field consisting of only the following characters 1 9 A Z and space Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning For HIBC barcode a mandatory modulo 43 checkdigit is inserted at the end of the data PDF Unless requested the PDF is not included If included it is separated from the bars by a guardband The default font type used fo
253. atically enter CD I25GERMAN Designates German Interleaved 2 5 enter ITF14 DIR MAG I25GERMAN The mod 10 check digit is automatically included Designates ITF 14 enter ITF14 The mod 10 check digit is automatically included Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m
254. ation data cc IDFn idir STEP idir step RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D STEP Define the step increment or decrement Use this parameter for incremental dynamic data used in an XML driven form STARTDATA The data will be the tag name defined in XML data file which will be replaced with the tag value defined in XML data file and be printed as print data on the label The tag value will increment Comments The form count option FC ICNT FCNT used in the EXECUTE Example 1 command is ignored in the LINK command The form count of XML driven forms is determined by the _QUANTITY attribute in XML data stream For XML driven forms since both SETUP nol and LINK file Ink are stored only in FLASH the user can delete the flash files through the front panel option See the SETUP command for a description The following is an example of how the LINK command works with XML driven forms SETUP ROLL saved in FLASH as ROLL nol CONFIG TOP BOTTOM MARGIN O SLASH ZERO 0 HOST FORM LENGTH 0 END PAPER CUT O INTENSITY 0 ROTATE 0 SPEED IPS 4 LABELS 2 WIDTH 41 SETUPEND 95 Chapter 2 96 Command Codes CREATE ROLL 432 DISK saved in FLASH as ROLL fm ALPHA IAF1 10 5 5 3 3 AF2 10 10 5 3 3 15 5 3 3 This is an XML driven form STOP END LINK ROLL DISK Saved in FLASH as ROLL Ink AF1 STEP 1 employee AF2 company NORMAL The following is a complete XML data stream which will print thr
255. ational Character Sets and their corresponding set values Table 56 International Character Sets Character Set Set Value Character Set Set Value Standard Sets Arabic Sets US ASCII 00 ASMO 449 100 German 01 ASMO 449 101 Swedish 02 ASMO 708 102 Danish 03 708 103 Norwegian 04 MS DOS CP 710 104 Finnish 05 MS DOS CP 720 105 English 06 Sakr CP 714 106 Dutch 07 Aptec CP 715 107 French 08 CP 786 108 Spanish 09 Arabic CP 864 109 Italian 10 Arabic CP 1046 110 Turkish 11 Arabic Lam 1 111 CP 437 12 Arabic Lam 2 112 CP 850 13 Win CP 1256 113 Farsi 1 114 Farsi 2 115 1098 Farsi 1285 116 435 Chapter 5 _ Accessing Characters and Character Sets Table 56 International Character Sets continued Character Set Set Value Character Set Set Value Cyrillic Sets European Sets Code Page 866 200 Latin 2 8859 2 300 Cyrillic CP 437 201 Code Page 852 301 Cyrillic 113 202 Mazovia 302 Cyrillic 8859 5 203 Kamenicky 303 ISO 915 204 Roman 8 304 Code Page 855 205 PC 437 Slavic 305 7 bit Cyrillic 206 Slavic 1250 306 Ukrainian 207 Code Page 865 307 Bulgarian 208 Code Page 860 308 Win CP 1251 209 Latin 1 8859 1 309 Latvian 866 210 Latin 5 8859 9 310 CP 1048 211 Latin 9 8859 15 311 Polish Pol 1 312 Win CP 1250 313 Win CP 1252 314 Win CP 1257 315 CP858 EURO 316 Lith CP773 317 Serbo Croatic1 318 Serbo Croatic2 319 CP 774 320 CP 775 321 ISO 8859 4 322 Greek Sets Hebrew Sets DEC 256 Gre
256. aximum number of data can then be found by finding the proper table based on ECC type For each different valid matrix combination the maximum number of data are given for numeric alphanumeric and full 8 byte data You do not have to enter the maximum a pad character is automatically inserted into the barcode when necessary Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results GS1 Datamatrix NOTE Line Matrix printers produce less square modules for small module dimensions because of its non square resolution However when properly selecting the X and Y module dimensions for a specific resolution the resulting barcode is reliably and consistently read by 2D barcode readers Special Characters Using SO Table 29 and Table 30 illustrate the methods of encoding special characters and shows the special characters supported These special characters are identified by using SO The default value for the SO character is hex OE but this value can be changed using the printer s front panel see User s Guide for details Examples are given with the SO character represented by for clarity Table 29 Special Character Encoding All ECC Levels Special Characters Method Example Control Characters 0 31 lt SO gt lt 0 gt _ NUL BEL G Any ASCII value 0 255 SO d 3 digit ASCII 10 d010 ASCII value SO SO
257. bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 2 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 2 through 9 9 inches If any value less than 3 is selected then the PDF must be suppressed using the PDF Font parameter S The default value is 1 3 inches m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale 226 DARK SH SC D EAN 13 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 12 digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is en
258. barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error 281 Bar Codes Chapter 3 STOP I 2 5 Example Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Figure 33 illustrates a horizontal and vertical 2 5 bar code generated by the following program CREATE I25 BARCODE I 2 5 DARK 49 27 24688642 PDF A STOP BARCODE Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Code I 2 5 at SR 49 SC 27 Data Field Upper Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command I 2 5 VSCAN H12 DARK 44 52 24688642 PDF STOP END EXECUTE I25 1 NORMAL SC 27 SR 49 gt 282 24688642 MANAI Figure 33 Sample l 2 5 Bar Codes Vertical Dark I 2 5 H 1 2 at SR 44 SC 52 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 52 SR 44 gt Matrix Matrix The structure for the Matrix bar code is shown in Figure 34 and described on the following pages 773 7775 QuiETI I QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 9 6 r 1 1 OPTIONAL cow Perski 1 OPTIONAL READA
259. barcode symbology to tell the barcode reader how a character should be interpreted Switch code is the user input data 0x25 to subsetA 0x26 to subsetB and 0x27 to subsetC which needs to be preceded with the SO Shift Out OxOE character to tell which subset to switch to and will be replaced with the corresponding start code during the data parsing There are three different commands to invoke a C128 barcode in PGL They are C128A C128B and C128C However these commands do not set the initial subset as you might expect Instead the default behavior is that the subset is automatically switched so that the number of printed characters is minimized by using subset C to print pairs of numerals as a single character and by avoiding unnecessary subset changes The default behavior is called automatic mode In automatic mode no switch codes are included in the data by the user to force one of the subsets to be active The starting subset as well as any subset switching are selected by the printer automatically Manual mode is started if the subset switching codes are inserted in the data sent to the printer In automatic mode the starting subset selection criteria are long strings of number pairs will cause a start in set C a letter punctuation or an unpaired number will cause a start in set B and a control character will cause a start in set A After starting in one set a switch will be automatically be made by PGL if the numbe
260. by three digits The default SO character is 14 OxOE hex however the examples in this document will use a backslash 92 0 5 hex for clarity The SO character is configurable on the control panel The Macro PDF417 Control Block is located at the end of the data field following the normal PDF417 user data The parameter uses the following format as shown in Table 44 Table 44 Mandatory Macro PDF417 Fields Field Description 928 Macro Block Control Header Indicates the start of a Macro block 0 99998 Segment Index Each barcode in a Macro PDF sequence must have a unique segment index that indicates the position of the barcode within the sequence nnn nnn File ID A variable number of escape sequences containing values from 000 to 899 Each barcode in a Macro PDF sequence must have the same File ID assigned to it Zero or more optional Fields may follow the File ID See the next section for a description of the optional fields 922 Terminator The barcode that represents the last segment of a Macro PDF sequence should have the 922 escape sequence at the end of the Macro Block A Macro PDF sequence may contain zero or more optional fields Except for the Segment Count field these fields describe global file attributes of the Macro PDF sequence and therefore do not need to be present in all segments The optional fields if present should be placed after the File ID and have the la
261. cal Telepen barcode at SR 10 SC 5 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 mp 5810 9 zz Sample 1 AB12 amp A Figure 53 Sample Telepen Bar Codes The UPC A bar code structure is shown in Figure 54 and described on the following pages SR SC START CODE CENTER CODE STOP CODE POSITION cue T QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA Quiet Normal ZONE FIELD ZONE HEIGHT NUMBER SYSTEM c LN NES MENU CHARACTER f t CHECK DIGIT NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK DIGIT FIELD CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD NUMBER SYSTEM SR SC CHARACTER FIELD POSITION ES unquam ian QUIET quiet NE ZONE HEIGHT RIGHT DATA LEFT DATA 1 ide fec Gor PONES m CHARACTER CHECK DIGIT FIELD 1 em ev SR SC MR NUMBER y ZONE CCW ADD ON I POSITION 14 SYSTEM CW CHARACTER START CODE NUMBER 1 QUIET SYSTEM SR SC ZONE 4 K CHARACTER POSITION CHARACTER FIELD STOP CODE CHECK gt FIELD OPTIONAL RIGHT READABLE DATA DATA CODE FIELD FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE CENTER CODE DATA FIELD CHECK 1 FIELD STOP CODE NUMBER QUIET 4 SYSTEM ZONE CHECK CHARACTER L START CODE FIELD CH
262. can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm UPS 11 Command Format BARCODE UPS11 DIR MAG Hr m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPS11 Designates bar code type UPS 11 enter UPS11 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG UPS 11 Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including
263. cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset count parameter value of 0 The three vertical dots illustrate the natural progression for each column and unit of data based on the incremental count and its impact on linked and unlinked data fields STARTDATA STEPMASK Printed Results Value ABC123 000001 ABC123 ABC124 ABC999 ABD000 222999 000 Description Linked subfields ABC and 123 RPT 1 RST 0 39 Command Codes Chapter 2 Value Description STARTDATA 1ABC123 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 011001 subfields 1 and 123 while fixed data ABC is non incrementing Printed Results 1ABC123 RPT 1 1ABC124 RPT 0 1ABC999 2ABCOO0 Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Two separate unlinked subfields STEPMASK 001 1 and 3 while fixed data 1 and 2 is non incrementing Printed Results ABC123 RPT 1 rU RPT 0 ABI129 ABJ120 Value Description STARTDATA 1 Single numeric field with leading STEPMASK 0001 spaces RPT 1 Printed Results Em 0 2 10 Value Description STARTDATA AA98 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 0101 subfields AA and 98 with leading space _ fixed data is Printed Results _ 98 incrementing ES RPT 1 E RST 0 1AA00 40 Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields Value Description STARTDATA
264. ccurs on the data field line of the bar code BARCODE symbol s exceeds the form width The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print beyond the right margin This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code BARCODE variable ratio 0 or not ascending BARCODE PDF not allowed or error LOC A or B FONT N P Q R T XorS The alternate font was selected for a barcode an invalid parameter was used or the selected height of the barcode cannot fit a PDF Either the alternate font was selected for a barcode or an invalid parameter was used Acceptable parameters must be for the normal font for the OCR A optional font X for the OCR B optional font or S to suppress printing of the data field P for 12 cpi Q for 13 cpi R for 15 cpi T for 17 cpi V for 20 cpi Dynamic BARCODE symbol exceeds the form length The bar code command with a dynamic data field exceeds the limits of the current form length Dynamic data must be inserted at Top of Form Dynamic data must immediately follow the EXECUTE command before any overlay data Dynamic BARCODE data field BFn not previously defined Dynamic data field designated in the Execute Form mode was not defined in the Create Form mode Dynamic ALPHA BARCODE LOGO field AFn BFn GFn error must be 0 512 Dynamic alpha field number AFn bar code field number BFn or logo field number GFn must range from 0 through 512 Dynamic BARCOD
265. ce and number from 1 to 10 TAM T5000r ROTATE Specifies the page rotation Enter ROTATE a space and either 0 default for portrait 180 for inverted portrait 90 for landscape and 270 for inverted landscape 109 Chapter 2 Codes Table 9 Paper Parameters Paper EN Line Parameter Description Matrix Thermal Specifies the page size width and length in 1 1000ths of inches Enter SIZE a space and the y width a comma and the length value If the width or length should remain unchanged enter a 0 instead SIZE Specifies the slew speed in inches per second SLEWUIPS Enter SLEW IPS a space and number from 1 to 10 T5000r Specifies the print speed in inches per second SPEED IPS Enter SPEED IPS a space and a number from v 1 to 10 Sets the printer to tear off media handling and forces the printer to pause after a specified number of pages The paper must be completely torn before the printer can resume normal operation Enter TEAR a space and a number from 0 through 256 0 no tear TEAR T5000r Specifies the type of paper being used Enter TYPE TYPE a space and 0 for thermal transfer paper or 1 for direct thermal paper Specifies the width of the form in tenths of an inch SIDA Enter WIDTH a space and number from 1 to 9999 NOTE The range for the SLEW IPS REV SLEW IPDS and SPEED IPS option
266. cessing Characters and Character Sets 5 Chapter 2 ra He ITALIAN Set 01234567 01234567 Ur 00700 amp monouul OO TY OO r 3e 25 600930 OnWNOs uw gt BX AN MOH OOoOrnvre ECO gt gt LODHOYIAEZO ON OD VAM 9 eek cl t lt 2 N O0 O0 Or ECO gt No gt 20 c lt 2 lt gt gt Q m QUotopD2 3X Ntw n mIgq 2 2990 00 nx eK ECO 0 gt gt G moouuocorm 4 5 valrzzo T s N vakt et EN i O lt 2 lt gt 5 gt gt gt 4 9 DLS r MXR QOCU 2 5zx Nu rnm 5 0CMHOOWLOTHIXYIEZO N VaR 21 c a CHNMTMOORMACMOOWL 434 International Character Sets International Character Sets The International Character Sets supported are listed in Table 56 Select these sets from the configuration menu Select Font option or through the SYMSET option of the FONT command or the ISET command See Table 56 for a list of the Multin
267. ch is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 340 DARK SR SC D data field PDF Telepen b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a va
268. ch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than 297 Chapter 3 Codes DARK SH SC D data field PDF LOC 298 d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field
269. ches the physical length of the installed media RFWTAG Purpose Mode Format The RFWTAG command is used to program an RFID tag embedded in a smart label using structured data format The data structure of an RFID tag can consist of one or more bit fields Each bit field specifies its own field length the data format the field type plus additional options if the type is incremental and finally the field value CREATE RFWTAG LOCKn formatj size jmem bank start block byte length Bit Field STOP RFWTAG Specifies the RFWTAG command enter RFWTAG LOCKn format or PERMALOCKnf format or BLOCKPERMALOCKn format Optional parameter to lock the data block to prevent it from being overwritten By default the data are not locked initially n is the passcode The acceptable values for n are 1 to FFFFFFFF in hex a 4 bytes data When the LOCKn option is used to lock any memory bank which at the same time is programmed with the write data the same passcode will be written on ACS memory bank The ACS memory bank will also be locked if ACS is not locked at the time of the operation If ACS is already locked at the time of the operation the RFID PGL Commands passcode needs to match the current content of ACS so that the memory bank lock takes effect The passcode n can also be in dynamic format For dynamic format enter LOCK lt DFn gt where DFn is the dynamic field defined in EXECUTE mode LOCK PERMALOCK and
270. cifies 4 vertical lines To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page VERT 2 36 53 61 2 50 53 61 2 60 53 61 2 70 53 61 COLUMN 36 COLUMN 50 ROWS53 gt 4 ROW61 93 Chapter 2 94 Command Codes Link Purpose Prints forms created in the CREATE mode used exclusively for XML driven forms NOTE The Link command is not supported on all printer models Mode Format NORMAL cc LINK formname PAGEnj IRS Tn DISK EVFU Data cc AFn D ASCII text D cc BFn D data D cc DFn D data D cc AFn DFn cc BFn lt DFn gt cc GFn D logoname D cc KFn D DBCS data D cc IAFn idir STEP RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D cc BFn idir STEP RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D cc DFn idir STEP RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D Overlay Data Form Feed character cc NORMAL LINK Enter LINK The rest of the parameters are exactly the same as the one listed for EXECUTE except for the incremental data use STEP instead of STEPMASK This command is exclusively for XML driven forms When the LINK command is used the command line LINK and the data following it up to NORMAL will be saved into flash memory under the same file name with the extension Ink When XML data stream prints the form with the same name the files nol frm and Ink
271. cify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included 361 Chapter 3 Codes BFn DARK SH SC D data field 362 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 13
272. ckground E The optional elongated character parameter Enter E to specify elongated character printing Elongated characters are double height and single width If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0 or an error message will result Elongated character printing is also available with rotated DBCS characters Fn The optional font size parameter use the following select font size default F16 F16 selects 16x16 matrix font cells physics size is 8 F24 selects 24x24 matrix font cells physics size is 12 495 Appendix G Pn KFn L DIR SR SC VE 496 Optional parameter for pitch between characters If n is not specified one default n is automatically assigned based on the actual horizontal expansion factor When option Compatbl Mode is set to None 12 When option Mode is not set to None 12 1 2 The optional dynamic DBCS data field parameter for identifying the DBCS string s dynamic number assignment and designating the number of DBCS characters allowed If these parameters are used the actual text cannot be entered during the Create Form mode it must be entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Dynamically entering data during the Execute mode permits changes to the DBCS text without redefining or recreating the form To use this field perform the following steps a Enter b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify DBCS stri
273. ckwise rotation b Enter CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation c Enter INV for inverted characters 180 degree rotation The default orientation prints character strings in the standard horizontal format NOTE Alpha rotation parameters CW CCW INV require more memory to implement than the default orientation Thus characters selected for rotation may appear in the default orientation Selecting a smaller font will correct the problem UC DARK POINT Alphanumerics Enter UC to specify uppercase only characters When uppercase only is specified all lowercase alpha character codes are converted automatically to uppercase Consequently do not specify uppercase only characters if lowercase characters are required Optional parameter to produce bolder text Enter DARK or D D is also allowed in the ALPHA command only More information about dark printing is provided on page 63 Optional parameter that changes the units for the vertical and horizontal expansion values Enter POINT When the POINT parameter is present the VE value defines the font height in 1 72 of an inch i e points If the HE value is non zero it defines the character width in 1 72 of an inch otherwise the character width is the standard width for the chosen height Cannot be used with elongated E and compressed Cn parameters HSn or HSDn Horizontal Spacing The value n indicates the SH SC number of extra dots to ad
274. ckwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented NLQ Optional parameter optimized to print barcodes at NLQ print density 180x96 This may cause line matrix printers to reverse motion when the form prints This parameter is ignored for other printer types BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The data field must be numeric and contain exactly 11 digits The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters DARK Optional parameter to produce da
275. codes for example and places the printer in Mode 2 upon receipt of new data after the form is executed CREATE EXAMPLE PMODE L 2 4 1 STOP Example 2 In the following horizontal compression examples starting and ending row and column information is provided for reference and does not reflect the exact location on the page Character scaling is used The example below illustrates a 6 inch wide box in L150 Mode 2 the next example illustrates the same box compressed in L150 Mode 4 and the last example illustrates a modified box command to produce a 6 inch wide box in L150 Mode 4 PMODE L 2 2s STOP BOX 2 20 5 22 65 STOP END EXECUTE BOX CREATE BOX PMODE L 2 4 1 STOP BOX 272075722765 STOP END EXECUTE BOX Create Mode command PMODE command for L150 return to Mode 2 Begin Mode 2 at form line 1 Stop PMODE command Box command 6 inch box 60 characters at 10 cpi Stop box command End Create Mode Create Mode command PMODE command for L150 return to Mode 2 Begin Mode 4 at form line 1 Stop PMODE command Box command 60 char spaces but now in Mode 4 12 08 cpi Stop box command End Create Mode See PMODE L 2 4 1 STOP BOX 2 20 5 22 77 5 STOP END EXECUTE BOX Create Mode command PMODE command for L150 return to Mode 2 Begin Mode 4 at form line 1 Stop PMODE command Box command 6
276. command allows IGP PGL programs developed for other printers to be automatically scaled for execution on MVP and P3000 Series printers so that the printed output appears the same as the original output CREATE SMODE pt sm SMODE The Scale command enter SMODE pt Defines the printer type Enter one of the Printer Type codes shown in Table 10 to select the type of printer sm Defines the scale mode Enter one of the Scale Mode codes shown in Table 10 to select the scaling mode and corresponding dot density em Optional parameter to define the exit mode This optional parameter is useful when the normal print mode is different from the print mode used for IGP PGL graphics The exit mode returns the IGP PGL to a specified printer mode after the form is printed Enter a new Scale Mode code according to the printer type selected from Table 10 Comments Dot density varies by printer mode Selecting a different printer mode selects a different horizontal and vertical dot density This varying density can affect graphic elements created in one particular mode but printed in a different mode Be sure that graphic elements designed in the IGP PGL Create Form Mode are defined using a base density of 60 x 72 dpi so that the SMODE command will produce the desired results 145 Chapter 2 Command Codes The following application rules must be considered when using SMODE a When used in the Create Form mode the SMODE comman
277. command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column of the horizontal line specified by the fourth parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the horizontal line command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the HORiZontal line No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for another horizontal line The rest of the horizontal line commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with horizontal line elements that are no longer required HORiZontal line starting column SC ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the horizontal line command is greater than or equal to the right ending column parameter HORiZontal line thickness LT error The thickness of the horizontal line specified by the first parameter in the horizontal line command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero N
278. converted to the new format If the data comes from an AFn or BFn the original format is S format 4 Below is the possible syntax for header and trailer string 1 VERIFY DF2 H Head Header only 2 VERIFY DF2 H Head Tail Header amp trailer 3 VERIFY DF2 H Tail Trailer only 4 VERIFY DF2 H Head Header only To insert the CR LF character add r and n as CR LF characters such as VERIFY DF2 H Head Tail r n his will display Head tag data gt Tail lt CR gt lt LF gt If the user wants to display r or n as normal text character do the following VERIFY DF2 H Header r n this will display Header r on the screen where double back slash WV 0 5 0 5 will be replaced with one back slash V 0x5C The characters r and n can be inserted anywhere in the header string and trailer string To summarize r gt 0x0D CR gt Ox0A gt back slash VERIFY Example 1 This example requests the printer to send to the host the content of the RFID tag in hexadecimal format both before and after the RFWTAG command writes data to the tag Also the label is not moved CREATE VERIFY 432 NOMOTION RFRTAG 64 64 DF1 H STOP VERIFY DF1 H TagBefore RFWTAG 64 2 B 01 6 D 29 24 H 466958 17 H ABC 15 D 1234 STOP RFRTAG 64 64 DF2 H STOP VERIFY DF2 H TagAfter END EXECUTE VERIFY 1 NORMAL TagBe
279. cremental dynamic data 80 Execute form overlay data 82 Expanded print 83 font 84 Font load 87 Form Length 88 Ignore Sequence 89 Line Spacing 90 Lines horizontal 91 Lines vertical 92 Link 94 Listen 97 Logo call 97 Logo mode create 99 Macro Call 102 Macro Mode Create 103 Normal mode 105 Optimize 105 Page number 106 Paper 107 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 111 Paper Instruction PI Enable Disable 111 PCX Logo 112 PNG Logo 114 Print File 116 503 Printer Alert 117 Printer Identification 120 Printer Mode 121 Printer Status 124 Quiet 125 Recall 126 Repeat 126 Reset 127 Reverse Print 127 Scale 144 Scaling 145 Select Format 147 Set the Time or Date 148 Setup command 148 Special Function Control Code Change 150 TIFF Logo 151 Command format German 1 2 5 279 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields 373 ITF 14 279 2 5 279 Matrix 284 Maxicode 289 MSI 296 PDF417 303 Planet 314 PostBar and Royal Mail 330 POSTNET 326 Telepen 340 UCC EAN 128 245 UPC A 347 UPC E 353 UPCSHIP 361 UPS 11 366 Command Format BC412 Barcode 179 Command parameters 29 Command standards IGP PGL 27 Commands alphanumerics 395 Corner 392 Create Form Mode 19 392 Execute Form Mode 392 504 Execute Forms 22 Hex Character Encoding 89 Horizontal Line 394 Normal mode 17 Plessey 319 PostBar 330 Royal Mail 330
280. cription STARTDATA ABC123 Linked subfields ABC and 123 STEPMASK 000001 RPT 1 RST 0 Printed Results ABC123 124 999 000 227999 000 Value Description STARTDATA 1ABC123 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 011001 subfields 1 and 123 while fixed data is non incrementing Printed Results 1ABC123 RPT 1 ia di RPT 0 1ABC999 2ABCOO0 Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Two separate unlinked subfields STEPMASK 001XX1l ABC and 3 while fixed data 1 and 2 is non incrementing Printed Results ABC123 RPT 1 RPT 0 ABI129 ABJ120 372 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP bar code commands Use this command with the appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic incrementing of fixed bar code data fields is required The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command format is shown and defined below Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type standard bar code command parameters and optional non incremental parameters are shown in italics BARCODE type DIR MAG Hn m V DARK SR SC STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D PDF LOC FONT STOP idir STEPMASK RPTn RSTn Identifies this bar code command as Incremental Bar Code command enter I The optional incr
281. ction only Data Field The bar code data produces a single field of 60 bars for an 11 digit data field The bars are grouped in sets of five Each set of five bars comprised of three tall bars and two short bars represents one of the five digits of the zip code plus the four digit zip code extension If the Advanced Bar Code is used an additional two digit code is also added to make an 11 digit data field Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Each bar height is either a tall full or short half bar representing a 1 or respectively Each tall bar must be 125 inch 010 inch each short bar must be 050 inch 010 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is 0 0416 inch and 050 inch respectively with a clear vertical space ranging from 0 012 inch to 0 040 inch between bars Check Digit The twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character The check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning 313 Chapter 3 Codes Planet Command Format BARCODE PLANET DIR NLQ BF L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE PLANET Designates bar code type Planet enter PLANET DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clo
282. ctors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 8 Example EAN 8 Figure 18 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 8 bar code generated by the following program CREATE EAN8 BARCODE EAN842 H9 DARK 33 15 123456722 PDF STOP BARCODE Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Code EAN 8 2 digit add on H 0 9 SR 33 SC 15 Data Field 2 digit add on Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command EAN8 2 VSCAN H10 DARK 33 55 123456722 PDF STOP END EXECUTE EAN8 1 NORMAL SC 15 SR 33 22 12345670 Vertical Dark EAN 8 2 digit add on H 1 0 SR 33 SC 55 Data Field 2 digit add on Data Field Printabl
283. d 454 173 174 175 179 180 181 182 183 184 Font Errors Insufficient memory for font download Parameter out of bounds Not defined Australian 4 state barcode invalid FCC 2 digits Australian 4 state barcode invalid Sorting number 8 digits Australian 4 state barcode invalid Customer Data Aztec barcode invalid parameters or data RSS barcode composite data or parameters are invalid Font Errors 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 179 FONT command or FONTLOAD parameter error The FACE parameter or FONTLOAD command is either missing a space between the parameter and its value or a semicolon is missing between font parameters Illegal FONT typeface value must be resident An illegal FONT typeface value was used FONT typeface values range from 90000 through 99999 or 0 through 9999 Illegal FONT bolding factor must be ON 1 or OFF 0 An illegal FONT bolding value was used ON or 1 or OFF or 0 must be entered Illegal FONT slant must be LEFT 1 OFF 0 or RIGHT 1 An illegal FONT slant value was used LEFT or 1 OFF or 0 or RIGHT or 1 must be entered Illegal FONT point size must be 4 999 An illegal FONT point size was used Valid values range from 4 through 999 Illegal FONT symbol set value An invalid SYMSET parameter value was used Valid parameter values are 0 through 31 and 1100 to 1103 Illegal FONT space value must be
284. d Input a blank line the Special Function Control Code and the Normal command to instruct the IGP PGL to return to the Normal mode after execution Enter Format EXECUTE LEFTHAND cc EXECUTE formname PAGE EDISK NORMAL cc NORMAL Use system commands to exit the HNDLGO FOM file and print The finished program and logo should look like the following sample If error messages occur refer to Solving Program Errors on page 413 LOGO HAND 56 60 1 40 42 2 38 42 3 36 42 4 35 42 5 33 41 6 31 40 7 30 38 8 29 36 9 28 35 10 27 34 52 54 401 Chapter 4 Logo Exercise 11 24 33 48 54 12 22 31 45 54 13 19 30 41 54 14 16 29 38 53 153 29 3651 16 11 29 33 48 17 9 44 18 7 42 19 6 39 20 4 36 21 1 34 22 1 34 33 1 34 24 1 60 25 1 60 26 1 60 27 1 60 28 1 59 29 1 59 30 1 35 ah 1236 32 1 39 32 1 58 34 1 58 35 1 58 36 1 58 37 1 58 38 1 57 39 4 24 40 7 23 41 8 23 42 9 23 43 11 24 44 12 25 45 14 27 46 15 30 47 17 32 48 18 33 49 22 34 50 25 35 51 26 36 52 28 37 53 30537 54 32 37 55 33 37 56 35 36 t END CREATE LEFTHAND SOLIN S LOCO 45 33 HAND STOP END EXECUTE LEFTHAND lt ROW 45 NORMAL 402 Page Layout Considerations Form Design In this exercise you will produce a complete form by sketching it out on a grid in the same way the logo was designed Again this exercise uses character scaling on an 8 1 2 x 11 inch 60 x 72 dpi page Refer to pa
285. d between each character HS the value is in 60 DPI dots HSD the value is in printer dots This parameter is used only for proportional fonts Defines the starting row of the alphanumeric data Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the alphanumeric data Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the vertical expansion factor to enlarge characters vertically Enter a value from 0 through 139 Zero specifies the standard font no expansion A VE value must be entered Use vertical expansion with 12 point font size only Elongated E and compressed Cn characters cannot be used with a vertical expansion other than Zero 35 Chapter 2 36 Command Codes Comments Example HE Defines the horizontal expansion factor to enlarge characters horizontally Enter a value from 0 through 139 Zero specifies the standard font no expansion An HE value must be entered Use horizontal expansion with 12 point font size only Elongated E and compressed Cn characters cannot be used with a horizontal expansion other than zero D The printable character identifying the start and fin
286. d but will not be printed with the data data field Enter the characters for the bar code data The type of characters allowed in the data varies with the type of bar code Refer to the data field descriptions for the selected bar code types The data appears on the form at the location identified by NOTE Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with IGP PGL but it is recommended they are placed at the beginning Comments The bar code location must have been previously identified using the BFn L parameters of a bar code command in the Create Form mode Then use the appropriate bar code command to enter the bar code data in that location Inputting individual commands enters new bar code data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc BFn D data field D sequence to complete as many bar code data fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed Execute Form Dynamic Logo Execute Form Dynamic Logo Purpose Mode Format Comments Incorporates the dynamic graphic logo into a previously identified location of a form EXECUTE cc GFn D logoname D cc The Special Function Control Code GFn In
287. d for repeated forms printing is to use the form feed character Rather than sending a series of Execute Normal commands which slows the process by performing an open print close form sequence the form feed character instructs the IGP PGL to start a new page with new EVFU dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the form The EVFU Data Dynamic Data Overlay Data Form Feed Character sequence can be repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the original Execute command Remember when a form count is not specified a single line spacing or a line containing overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command To Execute Forms Rapidly In order to save reloading time the IGP PGL remembers the last form executed However a form must be loaded if it was not the last form executed if it was used with a CREATE command since the last EXECUTE or if any logo has been created When the form to be executed is found in memory it is loaded and execution resumes otherwise the FORM NOT FOUND error is printed Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode The Execute Form mode has two print formats The standard execute command format shown on page 73 is used for executing non incremental data and incremental fixed data An incremental Execute command format containing two additional parameters is used for executing incremental dynamic data and is discussed on page 80
288. d logo used in this example was previously defined and stored and thus is not shown in the form program The box surrounding the form represents the paper size 378 Example Create Commands Example Create Commands CREATE BASICFRM BOX LT SR SC ER EC 15 191 25525 STOP ALPHA R 1 E Cn AFn L DIR UC DARK POINT H8n SR SC VE HE D ASCIITEXT D 3 3 0 0 STATIC ALPHA DATA AF1 18 4 3 0 0 DIR SR SC VE HE CW 8 4 1 1 PRINTRONIX R 15 5 2 2 IGP STOP CORNER LT SR SC ER EC VL HL 1 18 2 23 7 2 2 STOP HDUP 5 1 VERT LT C SR ER 1 17 18 22 STOP HDUP OFF VDUP 5 1 HORZ LT R SC EC l 18 17 21 1 STOP VDUP OFF LOGO 10 13 HAND PREVIOUSLY DEFINED AND STORED STOP END BASICFRM AF1 DYNAMIC ALPHA DATA OVERLAY DATA NORMAL 379 Chapter 4 Form Examples OVERLAY DATA STATIC ALPHA DATA DYNAMIC ALPHA DATA 79 A Figure 62 Basic Create Form Example 380 Example Using The Command Example Using The Setup Command The following example demonstrates how the margins landscape orientation 8LPI and double wide font are automatically SETUP at power up SETUP TOP BOTTOM MARGIN 1 LEFT MARGIN 10 END PAPER ROTATE 90 LPI 8 Example Dynamic Data The process of executing dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data fields is explained in the following exercises Each stag
289. d must be identified individually However you can use a hyphen between the starting and ending columns to indicate a section of consecutive dots For example this hand logo requires dots in row 1 columns 40 42 shown in Figure 70 below A sequential row order is not required 399 Chapter 4 Logo Exercise A logo is created and stored as an element in the definition of a form For example to use a logo first design it in the Create Logo mode then add it to a form in the Create Form mode then execute the form with the logo in the Execute Form mode The following logo exercise includes all three of these steps 5 10 5 20 25 1 35 40 5 50 55 o 55 20 75 5 10 15 28 25 35 45 55 60 DOT POSITIONS DOT POSITIONS Row Column Row Column 1 40 42 31 1 36 2 35 42 32 1 39 3 36 42 33 1 58 4 35 42 34 1 58 5 33 41 35 1 58 6 31 40 36 1 58 7 30 38 37 1 58 8 29 36 38 1 57 9 28 35 39 4 24 10 27 34 52 54 40 7 23 11 24 33 48 54 41 8 23 12 22 31 45 54 42 9 23 13 19 30 41 54 43 11 24 14 16 29 38 53 44 12 25 15 13 29 36 51 45 14 27 16 11 29 33 48 46 15 30 17 9 44 47 17 32 18 7 42 48 18 35 19 6 39 49 22 34 20 4 36 50 25 35 21 1 34 51 26 36 22 1 34 52 28 37 23 1 34 53 30 37 24 1 60 54 32 37
290. d must be the first command on the line or an error will occur b Allinput parameters of the element being defined starting ending row line thickness bar code height etc will be scaled according to the dot density of the scale mode selected c graphic elements such as vertical horizontal boxes etc except for logos will be scaled d All alphanumeric strings with expanded characters not normal 10 cpi characters will be scaled e Allinput parameters of a bar code except horizontal span will be scaled Table 10 Printer Modes and Densities Printer Type Printer Type Scale Mode Printer Dot Density Code Selected Code Mode H x V dpi S MVP and 100 x 96 MVP 150B 60 x 72 60 x 64 50 x 48 100 x 72 L L150 100 x 96 60 x 72 60 x 64 72 5 x 72 80 x 72 3 P3000 90 x 96 60 x 72 60 x 48 72 5 x 72 80 x 72 6 P6000 60 x 144 60 x 72 60 x 48 60 x 72 60 x 72 9 P9000 90 x 96 60 x 72 60 x 48 60 x 72 60 x 72 ARWNH 146 Select Format NOTE MVP and MVP 150B printers must be in Scale Mode 2 and Printer Mode 2 to produce readable bar codes L150 printers must be in Scale Mode 4 and Printer Mode 4 to produce readable bar codes except for UPC A EAN 8 and EAN 13 which require Mode 5 to produce readable bar codes Example The following scaling command selects a P9000 pr
291. d string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters 25 Insufficient memory to store the BOX No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for another box The rest of the box commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with box elements that are no longer required 26 BOX starting column SC gt ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the box command is greater than or equal to the right ending column parameter 27 BOX starting row SR ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the box command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter 28 BOX line thickness LT error The thickness of the box specified by the first parameter in the box command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero 29 Box radius index out of range The optional parameter round corner radius index specified by the last parameter in the box command is out of range 442 Corner Errors Corner Errors 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 CORNER starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column specified by the third parameter in the corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries CORNER starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the corner specified by the second parameter in the corner comm
292. data above is incorporated into the Execute command All other Execute command parameters are shown in italics Optional parameters are shown in brackets Figure 80 illustrates the printed output from this data The boldface line below the EXECUTE command represents the hexadecimal EVFU load sequence which identifies the channel codes at which overlay data will be placed on each form The example hex values correspond to the line identification codes listed above Channel codes not described above as Filler channels are assigned unique hex codes Calls to these channels will print overlay data at specific positions on the form The two AF lines also shown in italics represent the dynamic data While the EVFU does not affect dynamic data positioning data placement is defined by the ALPHA statement when the form was created the commands are shown to specify where they would occur in relation to the EXECUTE command the EVFU load sequence and the overlay data The four lines of EVFU overlay data shown in boldface type follow the two lines of dynamic data This overlay data is positioned on the form according to the specified channel codes called The superscript hexadecimal numbers enclosed in lt gt symbols represent calls to the four unique EVFU channel codes 485 Appendix E Paper Motion using the EVFU cc EXECUTE formname ICNTn IRSTn DISK 1E 10 11 11 11 1B 13 11 11 12 11 15 11 1F AF1 DYNA
293. data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress the PDF entirely To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 355 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 47 Eleven Digit Compression 1 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X X X 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 tg _ first two digits of
294. data in an ASCII format and does not want control codes such as line feed or carriage return to be part of the binary data The command HEXOFF will disable this feature and return the IGP to normal data processing Mode NORMAL CREATE and EXECUTE Format cc HEXON or cc HEXOFF NOTE A line terminator is not required in the Hex Character Encoding Sequence cc The Special Function Control Code HEXON Hex character encoding enabled enter HEXON HEXOFF Hex character encoding disabled enter HEXOFF Comments HEXON and HEXOFF can be used anywhere in the data stream Ignore Sequence Purpose Enables the IGP PGL to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On IGON command is entered All characters are ignored until the Ignore Sequence Off IGOFF command is entered Mode NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE Format cc IGON or cc GOFF NOTE A line terminator is not required in the Ignore Sequence cc The Special Function Control Code IGON Ignore Sequence On command Enter IGON IGOFF Exits Ignore Sequence Enter IGOFF Comments IGON and IGOFF can also be used anywhere in the data stream NOTE Commands in PTX SETUP are not ignored 89 Chapter 2 90 Command Codes Line Spacing Purpose Defines the lines per inch printing format Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc LPI n cc The Special Function Control Code LPI The Vertical Line Spacing command enter LPI n Selects the line spacing in ent
295. de A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Telepen Table 46 Telepen Character Set ASC
296. de command PDFA417 XD3 YD9 S0 37 21 PDF417 width height security level SR 37 SC 21 ACME MOTOR SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO DIMENSIONAL BAR CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 STOP END EXECUTE PDF 1 NORMAL SC 21 SR37 M Ends Bar Code command Terminate Create Form Mode Execute the form Figure 41 Sample PDF417 Bar Code PDF417 Micro PDF417 Micro PDF417 is a multi low symbology which may be utilized by applications needing to encode a moderate amount of data in a two dimensional symbol up to 150 bytes 250 to alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric digits and when minimizing symbol size is a primary concern Micro PDF417 is identical to PDF417 in terms of its encodation modes error correction method and symbol character sets However Micro PDF417 replaces PDF417 s 17 module wide start stop patterns and left right row indicators with a unique set of 10 module wide Row Address Patterns which were designed both to reduce overall symbol width and to facilitate linear scanning at row heights as low as 2X Unlike PDF417 Micro PDF417 may only be printed in certain defined combinations of r number of rows c number of columns and k number of error correction codewords up to a maximum of four data columns by 44 rows See Table 43 on page 307 for the possible combinations of rows and columns the maximum allowed data amount and the error correction
297. defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer
298. des contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements The UPCSHIP barcode must contain exactly 13 digits of numeric data Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is inserted automatically into the bar code to verify accurate scanning UPCSHIP UPCSHIP Command Format BARCODE UPCSHIP DIR MAG Hn m DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPCSHIP DIR MAG Designates bar code type UPCSHIP enter UPCSHIP Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must spe
299. description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however a maximum of 14 data characters are allowed if a one character check digit field is specified a maximum of 13 data characters are allowed if a two character check digit field is specified The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the paramete
300. dicates the dynamic logo field Enter GF and replace n with the number of the field corresponding to when it was defined with the Logo Call command during the CREATE form mode D The printable character identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric data Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC ora character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but will not be included in the logo name logoname Enter the logo name If the logo is not found in DRAM the flash memory is searched The logo location must have been previously identified using the GFn parameters of a logo command in the Create Form mode Then use the appropriate logo command to enter the logo data in that location Inputting individual commands enters new logo data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc GFn D logoname D sequence to complete as many logo data fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed NOTE There are no incremental logos 79 Chapter 2 80 form1 Command Codes Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data Purpose Mode Incorporates incrementa
301. digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The barcode data The UPCSHIP barcode requires exactly 13 characters of data The available characters are 0 through 9 hex 30 through hex 39 The modulo 10 check digit is automatically included in the barcode UPCSHIP PDF Opt
302. e Defines the vertical line spacing and the horizontal pitch of the form for data positioning specified by character row and column or dot row and column Mode CREATE Format SCALE DOTT horz or SCALE CHARE pi cpi or SCALE MM SCALE The Scale command enter SCALE DOT Specifies the dot scale Enter DOT horz vert Gives resolution for the dot parameter Default is 60 dpi horizontal by 72 dpi vertical CHAR Specifies the character scale Enter CHAR MM Specifies the scale will be in millimeters Enter MM The optional vertical line spacing parameter in lines per inch for character scaling Enter any integer value from 1 through 1000 The default is 6 For line matrix printers enter 6 8 9 or 10 cpi The optional horizontal pitch parameter in characters per inch for character scaling Enter 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 The default is 10 cpi Comments If the character scale is selected starting row column or ending row column parameters are specified by character row and column The lines per inch value for a character scale form can be set to any integer value from 1 through the target DPI Characters per inch cpi horizontally can be either 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 For example on a printer with a maximum print width of 80 columns an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form at the 6 Ipi 10 cpi default has 66 rows and 80 columns in the character scale Refer to your printer User s Manual to determine your maximum pri
303. e each character encoded is separated by a narrow space Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Matrix Command Format BARCODE MATRIX CD DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE MATRIX CD Designates bar code type Matrix enter MATRIX To calculate and plot the optional modulo 10 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Matrix Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User
304. e of the following type preface Alphanumeric e Numeric e Binary The total number a decimal of 4 columns of binary characters must be specified e K Kanji character QR Barcode Example 42 0123456 B0006qrcode The above data is parsed as follows e 3 data blocks e First data block is alphanumeric 42 e Second data block is numeric 0123456 e Third data block is binary qrcode 6 bytes Cn Optional parameter that designates the use of concatenation If the data to be encoded is too large to fit in one bar code the data can be split up and encoded in multiple bar codes Up to 16 QR bar codes can be used to store a single data When data is split among multiple QR codes the total number of bar codes or partitions must be specified along with the sequence number of each partition A parity data is provided to ensure that the data has been properly concatenated The valid values for concatenation mode are as follows 0 Normal no concatenation default 1 Concatenation Nn Required parameter for concatenation mode that specifies the partition sequence number for this bar code The valid value for this parameter is 1 to 16 Pn Required parameter for concatenation mode that specifies the total number of bar code partitions The valid value for this parameter is 1 to 16 Rn Required parameter for concatenation mode that specifies the parity data for the original bar code data The va
305. e 89 is provided for this purpose Similarly at times you may also need the IGP PGL to ignore host originated paper movement commands carriage return line feed form feed etc in lengthy data streams Select Format SFON SFOFF discussed on page 147 is provided for this purpose In addition the Quiet command page 125 can be used to pass data unchanged to the printer 21 Chapter 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Table 3 Execute Form Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Compressed Print DENSITY Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch 52 cpi Dynamic AFn Executes the dynamic alphanumeric data provided after 77 Alphanumeric Data the cc EXECUTE command Dynamic Bar Code BFn Executes the dynamic bar code data provided after the 78 Data cc EXECUTE command Dynamic Logo GFn Executes the dynamic logo data provided after the 79 cc EXECUTE command Expanded Print EXPAND Expands fonts vertically and horizontally 83 Font FONT Selects a specific typeface bold slant italic factor and 84 symbol set Hex Sequence HEXON Enables the IGP to interpret all data as hex characters 0 9 89 On Off HEXOFF A F Any data not sent as hex digits is ignored until the HEXOFF command is sent Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP PGL to ignore all characters after the 89 On Off IGOFF Ignore Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent See Note on page 21 Incremental
306. e Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 55 12345670 SR 33 gt Figure 18 Sample 8 Bar Codes 22 5 Chapter 3 Codes EAN 13 The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 19 and described on the following pages orien START CODE CENTER CODE STOP CODE 22 ees QuiET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET Normal ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE HEIGHT SYSTEM RF __ CHARACTER x cd ars is E m CHECK DIGIT OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK FIELD DIGIT CHARACTER DATA FIELD DIGIT SR SC POSITION xam 77 TNT T INV QUIET 1 quiet ZONE i ZONE HEIGHT RIGHT DATA LEFT DATA 1 L FIELD FIELD STOP CODE CENTER CODE START CODE SR SC Ne M NUMBER IN7 771 SYSTEM DIS CHARACTER 1 quer l SR SC ZONE 1 POSITION l LEFT lt FIELD CHECK 1 DIGIT gt FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE CENTER DATA CODE FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE DATA CHECK FIELD FIELD l quer ZONE NUMBER L N j SYSTEM EDU CHARACTER je HEIGHT gt HEIGHT gt Figure 19 EAN 13 Structure 224 13 Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module
307. e Guide Intelligent Mail 4 State Command Format NOTE Parameter names are italicized Square brackets enclose optional parameters do not type the brackets Parenthesis enclose variable data do not type the parenthesis Other text is type as shown BARCODE INTMAIL D R NLQ BFn L DARK SR SC D Data Fiela D STOP INTMAIL Intmail has a predefined magnification width The height of the Full Height bar is 0 145 inches with 0 020 inch margin and cannot be adjusted by the user Human readable data field is not allowed 273 Chapter 3 274 Bar Codes DIR NLQ BFmL DARK SH SC Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter optimized to print barcodes at NLQ print density 180x96 This may cause line matrix printers to reverse motion when the form prints This parameter is ignored for other printer types Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the barcode data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a n
308. e Shift JIS character printing respectively The differences among those printers are as follows PGL Hangul KS supports KSC code table for Korean character code points used only in South Korea PGL Hanzi GB supports GB code table for simplified Hanzi character code points used in People s Republic of China It also supports GB18030 encoding but the resident font is GB2312 character set PGL Kanji Shift JIS supports Shift JIS code table for Kanji character code points used in Japan Printers that support Andale options Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean and Japanese Each of these supports Unicode UTF 8 encoding but does support not DBCS encoding The above differences only affect the DBCS code points but the command syntax and the behavior are similar 491 Appendix G 492 NOTE for THERMAL PRINTERS A thermal DBCS PGL printer has a default DBCS scalable font with supported code table For example a PGL Hangul printer has a Hangul scalable font with KSC code table Users are able to download additional DBCS scalable fonts into printers by using the FONTLOAD command in the normal mode If more than one DBCS scalable font exists users may select a different DBCS font by using the FONT command in the create mode and ISET or SYMSET command to select DBCS character set to print DBCS characters with ALPHA or TWOBYTE command For thermal printers refer to the FONTLOAD and FONT command syntax within this manual T
309. e encoded Optional parameter that specifies the error correction level Enter ECC then one of the following values 0 50 80 100 140 or 200 Levels 0 through 140 use increasing levels of convolutional error coding Level 200 the default uses Reed Solomon block error correction and is the recommended level of error correction Optional parameter that specifies the format ID This field only has meaning for ECC 000 through ECC 140 and is ignored for ECC 200 This specifies the type of data that is encoded in the symbol Enter ID then a value from 1 through 6 The default value is 3 Table 28 shows the type of data encoded for the various format IDs Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n DARK SH SC D data field GS1 Datamatrix c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than d The informa
310. e includes printing the program however the total program may be entered as one unit Each stage offers the option of choosing features applicable to specific needs Basic Design The SAMPLE program below shown in Figure 63 is a basic design in CP DP format and defined by standard Create Form mode command sequences The label is duplicated twice horizontally on an approximate form size of 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 inches 390 dots with three bar code locations specified per label The result is two forms two labels per form four labels printed on one 8 1 2 x 11 inch page On the next few pages you will add bar code data dynamic alphanumeric data and dynamic bar code data Then you will execute and print the complete form Figure 64 When entering command lines remember to correctly terminate each line with a line feed or carriage return with line feed Use your system commands to open a file for the label program When you have finished exit the file if necessary for your system and print 381 Chapter 4 Form Examples CREATE SAMPLE 390 Create Form form length is 390 dots HDUP 2 37 2 horizontal dupes 37 columns apart BOX Box command 2 3 5 9 30 35 STOP Stop the Box command HORZ Horizontal Line command 1 14 5 9 35 1 19 5 9 35 1 24 5 9 35 STOP Stop the Horizontal Line command CORNER Begin Corner command 2547 11 9 33 1 2 2 2 96 117 13 67 337 1 2 2 STOP Stop the Corner command ALPHA Begin
311. e number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm UPC E and UPC EO UPC E and 0 Command Format BARCODE type n DIR MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE lype DIR MAG Designates bar code type UPC E or UPC E0 enter UPC E or UPC EO Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code Enter plus 4 and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts
312. e passcode data Enter B for binary D for decimal and H for hexadecimal The default is decimal if format is not specified Specifies which tag logical memory area that this command will be applied If omitted it defaults to the EPC memory area Other areas include Identification User Data Access area and Kill area Enter one of the following values EPC EPC 12 bytes data area default TID Tag identification 8 bytes area USR User 32 bytes area ACS 4 bytes access code area KIL 4 bytes kill code area 2 bytes PC code area Gen 2 tags only 141 Chapter 2 142 Command Codes Bit Field A line description of a bit field must have one of the following syntax formats length DFn format length DFn format A decimal number specifying the bit length of a field within a tag The maximum length is 64 bits for binary or decimal format For hexadecimal format the bit length can be up to the maximum bit length specified for the corresponding memory bank Indicate dynamic data field to store the read result Replace n witha number ranging from 1 to 512 to identify the field number of this particular field A letter specifying the representation format of the field data binary D decimal hexadecimal NOTE 1 Multiple RFRTAG commands are allowed in the same form but the same DFn field cannot be defined multiple times 2 The DF f
313. e right edge of the mail piece Bars must be 5 8 inch 1 8 inch tall the top of the bars must be no lower than 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece and may touch the top edge of the mail piece The bar code baseline must be within 1 8 inch from the bottom edge of the clear zone NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area SR SC POSITION Optional Line Top Line Optional Line Line Above Last Last Line NON ADDRESS DATA NAME OF RECIPIENT INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE DELIVERY ADDRESS POST OFFICE STATE ZIP Figure 21 FIM Structure 231 Chapter 3 Codes SR SC POSITION INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE Top Line NAME OF RECIPIENT Line Above Last DELIVERY ADDRESS Last Line POST OFFICE STATE ZIP lt lt N tc lt 2 2 amp 5 c S Q 9 Optional Line NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Figure 22 FIM Structure VSCAN or CCW NOTE Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation 232 FIM Clear Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank 1 4 inch wide 5 8 inch tall clear zone reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
314. e the logo from the SD card or External Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 NOTE The space of files deleted from flash are not reclaimed for general use within the flash file system until an Optimize amp Reboot operation is performed It is not recommended to frequently store or delete files to flash If the Optimize amp Reboot operation is not available in the menu system then deleted files are reclaimed by the printer for general use 65 Chapter 2 66 Command Codes Delete Macro Purpose Mode Format Deletes the macro identified by the macro name from memory NORMAL cc DELETE MACRO macroname DISK DELETE MACRO The Delete Macro command macroname Identifies the macro to be deleted You can delete all macros by entering ALL as the logo name DISK If no parameter is entered the macro deletes from RAM only Enter DISK to delete the macro from Onboard Flash Memory Enter EMC to delete the macro from the SD card or External Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 NOTE The space of files deleted from flash are not reclaimed for general use within the flash file system until an Optimize amp Reboot operation is performed It is not recommended to frequently store or delete files to flash If the Optimize amp Reboot operation is not available in the menu system then deleted files are reclaimed by the printer for general use Directory Purpose Mode Format Comm
315. e thickness LT of 1 one line in column C 22 and the other line in column 58 Each line will start at row SR 28 and end at row ER 44 9 Enter Format VERT VERT 1 22 28 44 9 LT C SR ER 1 58 28 44 9 STOP STOP 7 To add the horizontal lines define one line and then duplicate that line using the Vertical Duplication command The line will have a single line thickness LT be in row R 30 4 starting in column SC 14 and ending in column EC 66 With vertical duplication the line will be duplicated dup 6 times with 2 5 row offset offset spacing between each duplication The Vertical Duplication command must be input the horizontal line being duplicated must be input and the Vertical Duplication command must be turned off Enter Format VDUP 6 2 5 VDUP dup offset HORZ HORZ 1 30 4 14 66 LT R SC EC STOP STOP VDUP OFF VDUP OFF 407 Chapter 4 408 Form Design 8 Allthe text shown on the grid is fixed into position on the form with a single Alpha command sequence The starting row starting column and text can be taken right from the grid and put into the program Enter Format ALPHA ALPHA 14 31 3 2 HandCraft Boats R E Cn AFn L T D A UC DARK 18 14 0 0 CUSTOMER POINT HSn SR SC VE HE D text D 18 51 0 0 PHONE 20 14 0 0 HULL NO 20 49 0 0 RIGGING 22 14 0 0 COLOR 22 43 0 0 DELIVERY DATE 25 31 1 1 SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS 27 17 0 0 ITEM 27 34 0 0 DESCRIPT
316. e use AI 22 or Al 240 To use UCC 128 to encode HIBC be sure to use the correct Al parameter to obtain the desired results 271 Chapter 3 Bar Codes HIBC Barcode Example 2 432 BARCODE C128B HIBC X1 H10 5 5 A123BJC5D6E71 PDF B STOP BARCODE C3 9 HIBC X1 H10 15 5 A123BJC5D6E71 PDF B STOP END HIBC BARCODES NORMAL HIBC BARCODES 272 HAE ERI A123BJC5D6E71G A123BIC5D6E71G Figure 30 HIBC Barcodes Intelligent 4 State Barcode Intelligent Mail 4 State Barcode Intelligent Mail 4 state is a barcode symbology introduced by USPS to support the US Mail 4 state customer barcode It is also known as the USPS OneCode Solution or USPS 4 State Customer Barcode This barcode is identified by four different types of bars Full Height fixed height e Tracker a small center section e Ascender extends from the top of the Full Height limit to the bottom of the Tracker limit e Descender extends from the top of the Tracker Limit to the bottom of the Full Height limit Full Bar Ascender Tracker Descender Region Region Descending Region Figure 31 Intelligent Mail Barcode Bar Types Customer Data must be in numeric format only PDF is not allowed for Intelligent Mail Barcode Additional information regarding use of this barcode can be obtained from the USPS publication ntelligent Mail Barcode Technical Resourc
317. eboot operation is not available in the menu system then deleted files are reclaimed by the printer for general use Delete Form Delete Form Purpose Mode Format Deletes the form identified by the form name from memory NORMAL cc DELETE FORM formname DISK DELETE FORM formname DISK The Delete Form command Identifies the form to be deleted You can delete all forms by entering ALL as the form name If applicable the form deletes from both RAM and FLASH Enter DISK to delete the form from Onboard Flash Memory Enter EMC to delete the form from the SD card or External Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 NOTE The space of files deleted from flash are not reclaimed for general use within the flash file system until an Optimize amp Reboot operation is performed It is not recommended to frequently store or delete files to flash If the Optimize amp Reboot operation is not available in the menu system the deleted files are reclaimed by the printer for general use Delete Logo Purpose Deletes the logo identified by the logo name from memory Mode NORMAL Format cc DELETE LOGO ogoname DISK DELETE LOGO logoname DISK The Delete Logo command Identifies the logo to be deleted You can delete all logos by entering ALL as the logo name If applicable the logo deletes from both RAM and FLASH Enter DISK to delete the logo from Onboard Flash Memory Enter EMC to delet
318. ect OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Australian 4 State Australian 4 State Example CREATE TEST Enter Create Form mode BARCODE Bar code command AUSTPOST FCC62 INFO1 9 8 Australian 4 State bar code FCC 62 INFO 1 SR 9 SC 8 00141544adc0grell7 Data Field 8 digit Sorting Number 10 alphanumeric customer data PDF A Printable data field above bar code
319. ed character density NOTE The User Defined variable ratio is not allowed for this barcode BFmL DARK SR SC Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale com
320. ee copies of the above form where employee and company are the tag names The tag names will be replaced with the tag value 1234567 and IBM The tag value will print as print data lt xml version 1 0 standalone no gt IDOCTYPE labels SYSTEM label dtd gt labels FORMAT ROLLJOB QUANTITY 3 JOBNAME job1 lt label _FORMAT ROLL gt variable namez employee 1234567 variable variable name company gt IBM lt variable gt lt label gt lt labels gt Example 2 The following is an example of how the LINK command works with XML driven forms for RFID label CREATE EPC 144 DISK SCALE DOT 203 203 RFWTAG 64 64 IDF1 H STOP RFRTAG 64 64 DF2 H STOP ALPHA POINT 90 60 16 8 EPC IAF1 16 POINT 90 160 16 8 STOP END LINK EPC DISK IDF1 STEP 1 employee AF1 DF2 NORMAL The following is a complete XML data stream which will print three copies of the above form where employee is the tag name The tag name will be replaced with the tag value 1000000007788506 The XML tag value is also the RFID tag write data in this example The RFID read data will print on paper as ALPHA field Listen lt xml version 1 0 standalone no gt IDOCTYPE labels SYSTEM label dtd gt labels _QUANTITY 3 _JOBNAME job1 gt lt label gt variable name employee gt 1000000007788506
321. ek 400 Hebrew Old 500 ELOT 928 Greek 401 Hebrew New 501 Greek 3 402 Hebrew DEC 502 ABY Greek 403 Latin 1 Hebrew 503 ABG Greek 404 Win CP 1255 504 ELOT 927 Greek 405 Greek 851 406 Greek 437 407 Greek 8859 7 408 Win CP 1253 409 Creek 813 EURO 410 Greek 869 EURO 411 436 International Character Sets Table 56 International Character Sets continued Character Set Set Value Character Set Set Value Turkish Sets Data General Turkish 600 DEC Turkish 601 IBM Turkish 602 Siemens Turkish 603 PTT Turkish 604 IBC Turkish 605 Bull Turkish 606 AS400 Turkish 607 Unisys Turkish 608 NCR Turkish 609 PST Turkish 610 Unis 1 Turkish 611 Code Page 853 612 INFO Turkish 613 Win CP 1254 614 Code Page 857 615 Azeri 616 437 Chapter 5 _ Accessing Characters and Character Sets 438 6 Error Codes IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes The IGP PGL provides coded error messages to assist in debugging programs The printer will print an error message number and the program line which contains the error when an error is detected To help determine exactly where the error occurred use the following debug command sequence CC CREATE FORM NAME The slash places the IGP PGL in a debug mode and the program prints line by line with the error number and message printed below the specific error in the program The error free portions of the form will print following the program After correcting the erro
322. eld blank to increment default Enter a minus sign to decrement step A decimal number specifies the amount to increment decrement each time the form is executed The increment is at bit level and will automatically wrap based on the field size RPTn The optional incremental repeat count parameters to specify the number of times a particular field value is repeated before it is incremented The default repeat count parameter n is 1 which will increment the field value each time it prints The repeat count can range from 1 to 65535 RSTn The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed before it is reset to the starting value By default there is no reset count The reset count parameter n can range from 1 to 65535 startdata Defines the value of the field or the starting value of the incremented field If the field is dynamic the value will be specified later in the EXECUTE mode The data must be specified within a pair of delimiters D The delimiter D cannot be a or SFCC character since the will comment out the rest of the line and SFCC is reserved for PGL commands If R or S is used as delimiters the data pattern must not comprise of the keywords in the incrementing options Since the delimiters could be different from one value to another proper care must be taken to avoid one of the letters mentioned above NOTE 1 The RFWTAG command c
323. ement direction parameter to specify an increment add or decrement subtract to the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement Defines the increment amount step number of character positions in the data field and provides a mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Refer to Incrementing Bar Code Data on page 370 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values The optional incremental repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value will repeat before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before increasing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it is printed The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging f
324. en Command Format BARCODE TELEPEN 0 6 MAG Hn m BEn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE TELEPEN Designates bar code type Telepen enter TELEPEN DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments plus dots enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 in
325. end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a nine position bar no bar pattern of tall full bars of uniform height Minimum height must be 5 8 inch 1 8 inch Bar height may be longer to wrap around the top of the envelope Minimum bar width is 031 inch 008 inch Spacing pitch between each bar no bar must be 1 16 inch Bar tilt slant can vary 5 degrees relative to line perpendicular to the top edge of the envelope FIM Command Format BARCODE FIM DIR Hn m BF DARK SE SC D data field D STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE FIM Designates bar code type FIM enter FIM DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 2 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 2 through 9 9 inches If any value less than 3 is selected then the PDF must be suppressed using the PDF Font parameter S The defa
326. ending on the repeat count with the same dynamic data after a NORMAL or FF command is encountered Incremental data will be automatically incremented decremented after each form There are no limits to the number of times the REPEAT command can be used within any given EXECUTE sequence Overlay text will not be repeated Reset Reset Purpose Mode Format Deletes all forms and logos from IGP PGL memory The Reset performs the following tasks Prints any objects in the current page e Selects the portrait orientation e Deletes all forms and logos resident in memory e Sets the font to the default Gothic 12 10 e Releases all user defined character mappings e Runs the SETUP PTX file if present NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE cc RESET cc The Special Function Control Code RESET The Reset command enter RESET Reverse Print Purpose Mode Format Defines an area of the form where form elements are reverse printed white on black CREATE REVERSE DARK SE SC ER EC STOP REVERSE The Reverse Printing command enter REVERSE DARK Optional parameter to select a denser black background Enter DARK or D to select the denser background More information about dark printing is provided on page 63 SH Defines the starting row of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command
327. enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress the PDF entirely To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the 13 horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP STOP is not entered an error message results gt Table 25 Left Side Data Field Format Format for Left Side Data Field Positions Number System Character Value 12 11 10 9 8 7 O Oo RA OOD gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt U U gt gt gt gt gt gt UU gt gt UU UU gt
328. enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 321 Chapter 3 Codes Plessey Example Figure 46 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Plessey bar code generated by the following program CREATE PLESSEY Enter Create Form mode BARCODE Bar Code command PLESSEY DARK 32 27 Dark Bar Code PLESSEY at SR 32 SC 27 24688642 Data Field PDF X Printable
329. ents Prints the following information 1 all defined forms and logos 2 logo assignment to forms and 3 memory usage and availability for DRAM Onboard Flash Memory and SD EMC if available NORMAL DIRECTORYEDISK or EMC cc The Special Function Control Code DIRECTORY The Directory command enter DIRECTORY DISK or EMC Optional parameter to specify the forms and logos stored in permanent memory Enter DISK for Onboard Flash Memory or enter EMC to include the SD card or Extended Memory Cartridge As many forms and logos as printer memory allows may be stored in IGP PGL memory If the memory is full the form will not print available space in the memory must be at least the size of the form being executed For more information refer to the Directory Example on page 411 Duplication Horizontal Duplication Horizontal Purpose Mode Format Defines both the number of times form elements are duplicated horizontally and the spacing between each duplication CREATE HDUP dup offset elements to be duplicated HDUP OFF HDUP dup offset The Horizontal Duplication command enter HDUP Specifies the duplication number which is the number of times the entered form element s will repeat horizontally Enter a value ranging from 1 through 255 Specifies the horizontal offset to establish the horizontal spacing between each duplication of the form element s specified in the body of the co
330. eprinted bar code POSTNET is discussed on page 323 CREATE FIMB ALPHA Enter Create Form Mode Alpha command 23 11 0 0 ACME MOTOR INC 25 11 0 0 ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE 27 11 0 0 P O BOX 200 29 11 0 0 USCITY CA 12345 6789 STOP BARCODE FIM DARK 15 22 B STOP END EXECUTE FIMB 1 NORMAL Ends Alpha command Bar Code command Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 15 SC 22 Data field selecting FIMB Bar Code Ends FIMB Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Executes the form form count of 1 235 Chapter 3 Bar Codes 5 22 ACME MOTOR INC ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE P O BOX 2000 USCITY CA 12345 6789 236 Figure 23 Sample FIMB Bar Code Figure 24 illustrates a horizontal FIMC bar code generated by the following program and bears the preprinted POSTNET bar code CREATE FIMC Enter Create Form Mode ALPHA Alpha command 23 11 0 0 ACME MOTOR INC 25 11 0 0 ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE 27 11 0 0 BOX 2000 29 11 0 0 USCITY CA 12345 6789 STOP Ends Alpha command BARCODE Bar Code command FIM DARK 17 525 Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 17 SC 25 C Data field selecting FIMC Bar Code STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command POSTNET DARK 33 3 15 Dark POSTNET Bar Code at SR 33 3 SC 15 927149559 POSTNET data field STOP Ends POSTNET Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE
331. er Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Codabar Command Format BARCODE CODABAR CD DIR MAG Hn m BF L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE CODABAR CD Designates bar code type Codabar enter CODABAR To calculate and plot the optional modulo 43 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD DIR Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure vertically Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Codabar Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode shou
332. er a value from 1 through 1000 The accuracy of the line spacing is limited to the resolution of the target printer Comments Standard line spacing is 6 After a Vertical Line Spacing command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified until another Vertical Line Spacing command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered Example The following command selects 9 Ipi printing format until another Line Spacing command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered LPI 9 Lines Diagonal Purpose Mode Syntax Produces a diagonal line CREATE DIAG LT SH SC ER EC STOP DIAG The Diagonal command LT Defines the border thickness measured in vertical IGP dots 1 72 inch increments SR Defines the starting row of the diagonal line CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on SCALE commana SC Defines the starting column of the diagonal line CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on SCALE commana ER Defines the ending row of the diagonal line CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on SCALE command Lines Horizontal EC Defines the ending column of the diagonal line CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on SCALE command CREATE XYZ 432 DIAG 2 2 255 10 STOP END EXECUTE XYZ NORMAL Lines Horizontal Purpose Defines horizon
333. er at both ends of the data field Enter the characters for the bar code data restricted to exactly 11 digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The first digit is interpreted as the number system character The remaining 10 digits are the data field characters The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter UPC A data fields can be printed above or below the bar code symbol This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified If the PDF command is not entered in the UPC A command format the data field automatically prints in OCR B LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ente
334. er required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front panel see your User s Guide 213 Chapter 3 Codes Table 24 Code 128C Character Set 38 31 82 38 32 83 38 33 84 38 34 85 38 35 86 38 36 87 38 37 88 38 38 89 38 39 90 39 30 91 39 31 92 39 32 93 39 33 94 39 34 95 39 35 96 39 36 97 39 37 98 39 38 99 39 39 CODEB 26 See NOTE CODEA 25 See NOTE FNC 1 21 See NOTE START N A STOP N A NOTE Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front panel see your User s Guide NOTE There are three subsets of the C128 barcode Subset A contains numbers punctuation uppercase letters and control characters Subset B contains numbers punctuation uppercase and lowercase letters Subset C encodes pairs of numbers as a single character Each printed character is three bars and three spaces One given character may be interpreted as for example a carriage return the letter m or the two numbers 77 depending on the subset that is active at the time Each subset has a start code character which sets 214 Code 128 128B and 128C the initial subset and a switch code character which changes the subset Start code is embedded in the
335. erial interface or a separate input line in a parallel interface Refer to the EN PI DIS PI command and the PION PIOFF command on page 111 and page 111 in the Commands chapter respectively When the PI signal is used bits 6 and 7 are interpreted as 0 values and characters hex 10 through 1F are interpreted as binary slew commands The binary slew commands can skip from 1 through 15 or 1 through 16 lines on the form depending on how the Slew Range configuration option is configured Refer to Table 61 which illustrates how lines are skipped for each value Note that the state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing and using the interface lines as EVFU channel codes This type of vertical paper motion occurs whenever the line slewing command is used regardless of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not Table 61 Line Slewing Slew Range ASCII 8 Data Bits Configuration Hex Dec Code 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 10 16 DLE 1 X X 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 11 17 DC1 1 X X 1 0 0 0 1 2 1 12 18 DC2 1 X X 1 0 0 1 0 3 2 13 19 DC3 1 X X 1 0 0 1 1 4 3 14 20 DC4 1 X X 1 0 1 0 0 5 4 15 21 NAK 1 X X 1 0 1 0 1 6 5 16 22 SYN 1 X X 1 0 1 1 0 7 6 17 23 ETB 1 X X 1 0 1 1 1 8 7 18 24 CAN 1 X X 1 1 0 0 0 9 8 19 25 EM 1 X X 1 1 0 0 1 10 9 1A 26 SUB 1 X X 1 1 0 1 0 11 10 1B 27 ESC 1 X X 1 1 0 1 1 12 11 1C 28 FS 1 X X 1 1 1 0 0 13 12 1D 29 GS 1 X X 1 1 1 0 1 14 13 1E 30 RS 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 14
336. error message results 195 Chapter 3 196 Bar Codes Code 39 Symbology Listed below are the Narrow Element Widths N E W and Wide to Narrow W N ratios at various magnification factors when printed on the thermal printer at 203 dp NOTE The resulting ratios occur with or without using the scale dot command Table 19 Narrow Element Widths And Wide To Narrow Ratios Mag N E W N E W W N W N Factor PRM Actual PRM Actual x1 16 7 19 0 2 95 1 2 5 1 16 7 17 2 2 13 1 1 9 1 B 13 7 17 2 2 82 1 2 3 1 C 13 6 9 8 2 4 1 2 511 D 13 7 19 7 2 09 1 2 0 1 E 10 6 9 3 2 70 1 2 6 1 F 10 7 9 8 2 38 1 2 511 G 7 4 4 8 2 62 1 3 2 1 W N out of spec Code 39 Table 20 Code 39 Character Set CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 U SP Space V i b C C C 0 D D D d 0 E amp IF F F f G IG G G g G H H H H h H i l J J J J j HJ K IK K K k K L L L L L M M M m N n N 0 O P 0 0 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q R 2 2 R R r R S 3 3 S S 5 T 4 4 T T t U 5 5 U U u U V 6 6 V V V V w 7 T W W w W 8 8 X X X Y 9 9 Y Y y Y Z IZ Z Z 2 7 j B lt G L Q M R D gt l N gt 96S 4 960 DEL
337. eturn Address Area Postage Area ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA SR SC POSITION a ra Rae Rees eas 1 2 1 l 1 QUIET QUIET 1 START BAR CODE DATA FIELD STOP ZONE cope CODE ZONE 1 1 1 1 1 jon J CHECK DIGIT NOTE Illustration is not to scale Figure 42 Planet Structure NOTE Additional information regarding Planet bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation 311 Chapter 3 Codes Postage Area CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION lt is lt a lt o o lt o o am o o Q Q lt Return Address Area NOTE Illustration is not to Figure 43 Planet Structure VSCAN or CCW 312 Planet Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends 4 75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece In addition a minimum quiet zone of 0 040 inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start and stop codes are referred to as framing bars in Planet The start and stop codes are each one tall bar one identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bar code scanning in a left to right dire
338. field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed t
339. field check digit for both SSCC 18 and SCC 14 is printed in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C It is displayed in the human readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC 18 or the sixteenth byte for SCC 14 IGP automatically calculates the modulo 10 check digit for SSCC 18 if only 17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of OO This is also true for SSCC 14 if only 15 digits are supplied For concatenated barcodes an FNC1 must be inserted for the checkdigit character so that PGL will calculate it GS1 128 GS1 128 Command Format BARCODE UCC 128 DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE UCC 128 DIR MAG Designates bar code type Code UCC 128 enter UCC 128 Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify the bar code symbol by increasing the width of the bars and spaces The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE A valid UCC EAN 128 bar code can be no larger than 165 mm NOTE 6 5 inches wide
340. for the bar code symbol being used 93 BARCODE starting row SR out of bounds The starting row parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar code symbol to print either above or below the limits of the form 94 BARCODE starting column SC out of bounds The starting column parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar code symbol to print either beyond the left margin or the right margin of the form 95 BARCODE height Hn out of bounds The height parameter specified in the bar code command is out of bounds Acceptable values vary based on the barcode symbology See Chapter 3 for the allowable height range 96 BARCODE data field has illegal character format A character in the data field was not recognized as an acceptable character Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable characters for the bar code symbol being used The missing ending delimiter also causes this error 97 BARCODE data field too short or too long The data field in the bar code command has too few or too many data characters Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable number of data characters for the bar code symbol being used 450 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Bar Code Errors BARCODE symbol s exceeds the form length The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print below the limits of the form This error o
341. fore A5A500005D055E04 lt Whatever data inside the tag before TagAfter 5D466958055E04D2 lt Should match with RFWTAG command Example 2 This example reads a roll of 1500 pre programmed smart labels CREATE READONLY 432 RFRTAG 64 64 DF1 H STOP VERIFY DF1 H END EXECUTE READONLY 1500 NORMAL A5A500005D055E04 lt Whatever data another 1498 lines of RFID A5A50000000550D4 lt Whatever data 155 Chapter 2 156 Command Codes Example 3 This example requests the printer to program a roll of 2000 smart labels using the RFWTAG command with incremental field Then it sends the actual data from each of the 2000 tags to the host CREATE SIMPLE 432 NOMOTION RFWTAG 64 2 B 01 6 D 29 24 H 466958 17 H ABC 15 1 D STEP 1 0000 STOP RFRTAG 64 64 DF1 H STOP VERIFY DF1 H Data END EXECUTE SIMPLE ICNT2000 NORMAL Data 5D466958055E0000 lt Should be the newly programmed data Data 5D466958055E0001 another 1996 lines of RFID data Data 5D466958055E07CE Data 5D466958055E07CF lt Should be the newly programmed data 3 Overview Bar Codes A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters Bar codes are produced by entering bar code data in the Create Form Mode The IGP bar codes are listed in Table 11 with detailed bar code information provided on the referenced pages All parameters must be separated by a semicolon unless
342. form 85 character columns has 510 dot columns 1 511 n 60 inch horizontal resolution 60 dpi X 8 5 inches See Figure 76 Setting a Left Margin value repositions the Starting Column 1 position by the degree of offset required This offset can be a0 positive or negative value The following examples explain how setting the Left Margin affects printed output No Left Margin Setting When the Left Margin configuration setting is 0 on an 8 1 2 inch form the Starting Column is 1 and the Ending Column is 511 A and B respectively Positive Left Margin Setting When the Left Margin setting is 20 on an 8 1 2 inch form the left margin is offset by 20 dots and that 20th dot position becomes Starting Column 1 in IGP PGL memory A Figure 78 This 20 dots also offsets the Ending Column by 20 dots thus narrowing the maximum print width on the form from 511 to 491 dots B Figure 78 478 Appendix D Paper Selection and Maximum Values Negative Left Margin Setting With a Left Margin setting of 20 on an 8 1 2 inch form the left margin is offset 20 dots and that 20 becomes the Starting Column 1 in IGP PGL memory A Figure 79 This 20 offset appears to expand the horizontal printable area to 531 dots B Figure 79 however the expanded area is actually beyond the addressable range of the 8 1 2 inch wide form containing the 20 offset position and is therefore not accessible Column 21 is the left most addressable area on the
343. ge 144 in the Commands chapter where character scaling is discussed in detail Page Layout Considerations At 6 lines per inch Ipi and 10 characters per inch cpi printing a standard 8 1 2 x 11 inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines rows and 85 characters columns The printable area will vary if you are not printing at 6 and 10 cpi Thus the grid used to design an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form should accommodate this 66 x 85 area Appendix C discusses the printable area for different form sizes in more detail Using the grids provided in Appendix B sketch out the form layout and identify the starting and ending values These values will be used to input IGP PGL command parameters Planning The Form Layout In this example assume you work for the HandCraft Boat Company Your slogan is Quality boats crafted by hand and the owner Mr Handcraft has asked you to design a simple form that his salespeople can use for special orders On the form he wants a logo the slogan the customer s name spaces for other particulars of the order and a bar code to distinguish the sales region and boat division from other HandCraft enterprises Begin this 12 step task as described below 1 First design the form on the Standard Grid provided in Appendix Figure 71 shows the locations of the various form components Compensate for expanded characters and plan for the logo 2 Define the logo and then return to the
344. ght of the narrow element in IGP dots or printer dots if option D is used The default is one IGP dot For horizontal barcodes this results in 2 72 inch For rotated barcodes this equals 3 120 inch Values range from 1 to 100 printer dots Hn Optional parameter to adjust the maximum height of the bar code symbol Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 4 through 9 9 inches NOTE The default aspect ratio will be used until the resulting barcode height exceeds the specified maximum Parameters Wn Rn Cn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used NOTE The Micro PDF417 values range from 1 to 99 303 Chapter 3 Codes NOTE ASPECTh w Rn NOTE NOTE BIN 304 Optional parameter to adjust the maximum width of the symbol based on the narrow element width Enter Wn where n is the overall width in tenths of an inch The default aspect ratio will be used until the resulting barcode width exceeds the specified maximum Parameters Hn Rn Cn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used Optional parameter for specifying the symbol height to width ratio where h is the height and wis the width both expressed as integers The default is 1 2 Parameters Hn Wn Rn or Cn cannot be entered if this parameter is used This parameter is not applicable to Micro PDF417 Optional parameter that specifies
345. git data field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE Bar code command PLANET VSCAN DARK 5 48 Dark Vertical bar code Planet at SR 5 SC 48 01858022199 11 digit data field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE TEST 1 Execute the form with form count of 1 NORMAL SC 48 5 5 SC 15 5 1 gt WAM ER FH EE o E MF Ho Ho HE E HH ME d I E HH o aH E d Figure 44 Sample Planet Bar Codes 316 Plessey Plessey The Plessey bar code structure is shown in Figure 45 and described on the following pages QUIETI ZONE SR SC POSITION gt SR SC POSITION r 71 QUIETI ZONE r 1 1 OPTIONAL I CCW DIGIT i 1 i OPTIONAL 1 READABLE i DATA FIELD 1 UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER l GUARD Jt GUARD GUARD I BAND s F j QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE je HEIGHT HEIGHT 1 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION ae A 1 Normal QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet ZONE CODE ZONE 1 LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION l QUIET ZONE INV STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE CODE ZONE 1 Gc OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND I UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 45
346. h on all four sides GuardBand There are no guardbands for Aztec PDF There is no PDF allowed for the Aztec barcode Data Field The format of the data is as follows Message Append ID String Message Encode String The length of the Message Append ID string is based on the values given with the APPEND parameter If there is no Message Append ID string then the data is simply the Message Encode string There is no delimiter between the Message Append ID string and the Message Encode string For example if the Message Append ID string is ABC and defined to be 3 bytes long while the Message Encode string is 12345 then the complete data field would be 12345 The Message Encode string can consist of any 8 bit data The maximum number of data depend on three things 1 format selected which includes error correction level 2 number of layers only valid for Compact and Full Range formats and 3 type of data 175 Chapter 3 Bar Codes ESC signals FNC1 and Extended Channel Escape Character In the data stream an ESC character signals the presence of a non data characters such as FNC1 or Extended Channel Escape characters To encode a true ESC character the data stream should have an ESC followed by a second ESC character Otherwise the values following ESC have the meaning shown below ESCn Description ESC ESC Represents an ESC char
347. h options use the same passcode the dynamic format needs to be in a different dynamic number in the same form 11 Because PC field is related to EPC field when PC RFWTAG is used in the form it must be followed immediately by EPC RFWTAG or else an error will be reported Also by specification the first 5 bits of PC data need to comply with the length of EPC data or else an error will be reported For example for 96 bits EPC the 5 bits of PC data is 00110 For 64 bits EPC the first 5 bits of PC data is 00100 Also LOCK option is not and will not be supported for PC field since PC field works with EPC field which already supports LOCK option 12 The NOMOTION parameter of the CREATE command is used primarily in RFID applications Refer to CREATE in the GP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual RFID PGL Commands 13 Both LOCK and PERMALOCK requires the user to enter the password Once the tag is permanently locked with the PERMALOCK command it cannot be unlocked again the tag can only be read from and never be written to once it is permanently locked On the other hand after the tag is locked with the LOCK command it can be unlocked again with the same password For PERMALOCK ex EPC the password must match the current content of ACS bank for PERMALOCK to work If the current content of ACS bank is null 0xO which could be the case for the brand new tag the password for PERMALOCK EPC will be OxO If you use a different pass
348. haracter Addresses Both the ASCII and multinational character sets have hex values for each character and symbol The primary character set ASCII characters resides at hex addresses ranging from 00 through 7F The extended character set which contains the multinational characters resides at hex addresses ranging from 80 through FF Table 52 shows each multinational character substitution hex value and the applicable ASCII hex values To access the extended character set the IGP PGL must be configured with the data bit 8 option enabled Making Character Substitutions Multinational character sets are created by substituting the multinational character values for the standard ASCII values Each of the 12 multinational character sets allows up to 16 character substitutions located at hex 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D and 7E The most common character substitutions specific to a particular country are provided in each set and shown in Table 52 For example when the Danish character set is selected calling character address cell 5B substitutes the Danish character residing at C6 E from the Multinational Character Set page 431 when the Spanish character set is selected calling character address cell 7C substitutes the Spanish character residing at F1 from the Multinational Character Set These substitutions are automatically performed when a particular Multinational Character Set is selected 4
349. haracter positions in the data field and provides a mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Refer to Incremental Bar Code Fields on page 370 or Alphanumerics Incremental Fields on page 38 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values The optional incremental repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value is repeated before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before incrementing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it is printed 81 Chapter 2 82 Command Codes RSTn The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is O STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field The ma
350. he DARK option will not take affect since there is only one dot for each bar in the horizontal direction However in the vertical rotation 90 or 270 degrees the DARK option will take effect since there is more than one dot for each bar in the horizontal direction For barcodes such as EAN whose bar is more than one dot wide the DARK option will take effect in both vertical and horizontal rotations since in both rotations there is more than one dot for each bar in the horizontal direction Define Month Names Purpose Allows the creation of user definable strings to be used as full and abbreviated month strings in the clock elements This allows users to create these names in any language Mode NORMAL Format cc MONTH F or A Name01 Name02 Name12 END MONTH The define Month Names command F Define Full Month Names Translations for clock element A Define Abbreviated Month Names Translations for clock element END Ends the command 63 Chapter 2 64 Command Codes Comments Example Every Month Name to be defined must be entered on it s own line terminated by a line terminator Empty Names will be set to their full default value Defaults for F are the English month names January December For the parameter the defaults are the 3 letter abbreviated English month names Jan Dec The command may be ended without defining all 12 names the non defined names will not change
351. he Execute Form mode The length of the data must be equal to or less than the value assigned to the length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data on page 80 for more information Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP PGL Alphanumeric command but does not replace the standard alphanumeric command As with standard dynamic data fields incremental dynamic data fields allow the starting data to be changed without changing the form definition program Increment parameters can also change with each new job without changing the form definition program Duplicating Incremental Alphanumeric Fields Incremental alphanumeric fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated horizontally using the HDUP command and vertically using the standard VDUP command Duplicated incremental fields increment in left to right top to bottom order The following examples illustrate the results of duplicated incremental fields Description STARTDATA ande numeric field 01 1 STEPMASK BST 0 HDUP 3 Printed Results VDUP 2 Page 1 Page 2 Field A Unlinked subfields alpha A STARTDATA A01 poe 01 STEPMASK X01 RST 9 HDUP 3 3 Field B STARTDATA B01 Unlinked subfields alpha B numeric 01 STEPMASK X01 BPT 1 5 0 Printed Results No HDUP or VDUP Page 1
352. he UCC EAN 128 width and can have from 3 to 90 rows Check Code The RSS family has a mod 89 check character with respect to the primary data This check digit is not implicitly added but is calculated from digits 2 15 of the data entered The check digit is positioned between the left data character and the right data character GuardBand There is no guardband for RSS 14 barcodes 257 Chapter 3 258 Bar Codes Magnification The default magnification is X1 which is about 10 mils for a narrow element width Pre defined magnifications for horizontal and vertical barcodes are defined for X0 5 and X1 The ratio format is narrow bar element vertical height element The narrow space element is the same as the narrow bar element The user defined ratios for this barcode should have these two values defined in the order specified Height The height command is not included as a valid parameter for the RSS 14 barcode because the height is determined by the declared barcode type The height of the barcode is directly affected by the second parameter in the magnification ratio The height of the linear portion of the barcode however can be specified but only for types UCCACOMP and UCCCCOMP This height is to be specified as a required third ratio element for the user defined magnification parameter XR D narrow bar element vertical height element linear height element NOTE The linear height element is also affected by second pa
353. he bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The data field must be numeric and contain exactly 5 9 or 11 digits The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information SH SC D data field STOP POSTNET Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value within the range of the 4 inch vertical address block Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value between the 1 2 inch left and right margins of the mail piece Character c
354. he barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 203 Chapter 3 204 Bar Codes Table 21 Code 93 Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 30 P 50 1 31 Q 51 2 32 R 52 3 33 S 53 4 34 T 54 5 35 U 55 6 36 V 56 7 37 57 8 38 X 58 9 39 Y 59 A 41 2 42 20 C 43 2E D 44 SPACE 20 E 45 3F F 46 2F G 47 2 H 48 96 25 49 1 N A J 4A S2 N A K 4B S3 N A L 4C S4 NA M 4D Start N A N 4E Stop N A 4 Code 93 Example Code 93 The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the following program CREATE TEST 288 BARCODE CODE93 X1 H7 10 20 ABCD5678 PDF B N STOP END EXECUTE TEST NORMAL SC 20 je T ABCD5678 Enters Create Form mode Bar code command Code 93 bar code MAG 1 H 0 7 inches SR 10 SC 20 Data Field Printable data field 10 cpi font Ends bar code command Terminates Create Form mode Prints form 205 Chapter 3 Codes Code 128A 128B and 128C The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 14 and described on the following pages PITA QUIETI QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE
355. he printer Consult your host s User s Manual for sending binary data Be careful when editing TIFF output files because most TEXT editors insert carriage returns and line feeds If a TIFF file must be edited use a binary or hex editor NOTE Be careful sending TIFF data The LOGO line must be terminated and then the TIFF data must follow immediately with no extra CR LF s Otherwise improper operation will result VERIFY VERIFY Purpose Request the printer to send to the host the ASCII representation of a dynamic field The dynamic field could be one of AFn BFn or DFn but cannot be RFn NOTE The Verify command is supported only on Thermal printers Mode Format CREATE VERIFY field format D JASCIIheader D D ASCIITrailer D VERIFY field format ASCIIheader ASCIItrailer D The command to verify data of a dynamic field enter VERIFY The dynamic field AFn BFn or DFn that contains the data to be sent to the host A letter specifying the format of the outgoing data to be sent to the host B binary D decimal hexadecimal S string Based on the incoming format of the data field a format conversion may be performed if the outgoing format is not the same The AFn and BFn format is always S type The DFn format could be either B D or H Due to the possible conversion the outgoing data stream could be longer than the incoming one The maximum length for the outgoing data
356. hin the CREATE or CREATE LOGO mode Comments must be preceded by a slash Do NOT use the comment feature on lines containing an SFCC e g commands used within NORMAL or EXECUTE mode Throughout this manual comments are provided in parenthesis beside most command lines for better understanding of IGP PGL operation but should not be included in your IGP PGL files Below are some examples of when comments are allowed and NOT allowed CREATE Mode Allowed no SFCC required BOX 1 6 15 11 37 Create Box STOP FONT BOLD ON Turn on Bolding BARCODE C128A X1 H10 BF1 10 11 2 C128A barcode STOP NORMAL Mode Not Allowed SFCC required NORMAL DENSITY 10 PAPER PORTRAIT CREATE XYZ 792 EXECUTE Mode Not Allowed SFCC required EXECUTE XYZ AF1 Data For Alpha 377 Chapter 4 Form Examples NOTE Using a different type of printer or a different configuration could affect the appearance of your printed samples compared to those shown in this manual Additionally depending on the paper top of form setting and initial print position the positioning of your printed samples on the page may vary compared to the examples shown here these samples have been positioned on the page to correspond with the related text The example on the following page demonstrates how to use Create commands in the Create Form mode using the CP DP format The printed output for this program is shown in Figure 62 on page 380 The Han
357. ield length is restricted to 64 bits for binary or decimal format and must be a multiple of 8 bits The sum of all field lengths must be equal to the tag size 3 The first field always start at the MSB bit The bit length of a field dictates the start bit of the next field etc As a result DF fields will not overlap each other 4 RFRTAG does not allow incremental fields with the I prefix 5 432 IGP dots in the CREATE line specifies a 6 inch label 6 inches 432 IGP dots 72 dpi Use 144 for 2 inch labels and 288 for 4 inch labels Example RFID PGL Commands Same as Example 4 on page 135 except the increment is dynamic and the result is merged into Alpha to print on the smart label CREATE SGTIN 64 432 RFWTAG 64 2 B 10 Header 3 D 5 Filter Value 14 0 15383 EPC Manager Index 20 0 123456 Object Class 25 IDF1 H Serial Number STOP RFRTAG 64 64 DF2 H STOP ALPHA IAF1 16 3 12 0 0 STOP END EXECUTE SGTIN 64 ICNT1500 IDF1 STEP 1 0 AF1 DF2 NORMAL NOTE 1 The lt IDF1 gt usage does not increment the DF1 field It merges the DF1 content into the AF1 field keeping the same representation previously defined for IDF1 2 The use of IAF1 is to print alpha on every label If AF1 is used instead only the first label is printed The AF1 field is not incremented either since it is using the result from the DF1 merge 143 Chapter 2 144 Command Codes Scale Purpos
358. iet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Data Field PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data The first three are pre established the remaining nine are user modes which can be defined by users or industry associations according to specific applications 1 Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode EXC Comprised of four sub modes this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters This is the default mode the IGP uses shift or latch characters to enable other modes 2 Binary ASCII Plus mode This offers encodation for all uppercase ASCII characters only printable or not and binary values 3 Numeric Compaction mode This offers encodation for numeric values to a density of almost 3 digits per code word 4 The IGP will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest encodation for the data Security Level PDF417 can detect and correct errors Each label has 2 code words of error detection You can select the error correction capacity based on application needs Specify a security level in the range of 0 8 at the time of printing PDF
359. ifont data to be stored in memory END Ends the FONTLOAD command Enter END Comment When loading fonts to RAMDISK the printer files will not be saved to RAMDISK when the printer is powered off When loading fonts to flash memory the printer files will be saved when the printer is powered off Both RAMDISK and flash memory support file operations such as saving reading and deleting files Example 1 Example 1 loads the Arial TrueType font arial ttf to RAMDISK with 10489 bytes of binary data FONTLOAD arial ttf 10489 font data 10489 bytes gt END Example 2 The following command loads the Arial TrueType font arial ttf to Onboard Flash Memory SD card or Extended Memory Cartridge based on the front panel menu Storage Select with 10489 bytes of binary data FONTLOAD arial ttf 10489 DISK lt font data 10489 bytes gt END 87 Chapter 2 88 Command Codes Example 3 The following command loads the Arial TrueType font arial ttf to SD card or Extended Memory Cartridge with 10489 bytes of binary data For printers without this external storage capability this font will be loaded into Onboard Flash Memory FONTLOAD arial ttf 10489 EMC font data 10489 bytes gt END Form Length Purpose Sets the length of the form to a specific number of lines at 6 or 8 Ipi Mode CREATE Format LFORME6 n or LFORM8 n LFORM6 LFORM8 The Form Length command for 6 forms enter LFORM6 The Form Length com
360. ight the PDF cannot be included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by 319 Chapter 3 Codes DARK SH SC D data field PDF LOC 320 c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144
361. igin of a trade item n3 n3 423 Country of initial processing N3 n3 n 12 424 Country of processing n3 n3 425 Country of disassembly n3 n3 426 Country covering full process chain N3 n3 703 s Approval number of processor with ISO country code n4 n3 an 27 7001 NATO stock number n4 n13 7002 UN ECE meat carcasses and cuts classification n4 an 30 7003 Expiration Date and Time n4 n10 8001 Roll Products Width Length Core Diameter Direction and n4 n14 Splices 8002 Electronic serial identifier for cellular mobile telephones n4 an 20 8003 UPC EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset n4 n14 an 16 8004 UCC EAN Serial Identification n4 an 30 8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure n4 n6 8006 Component of an Article n4 n14 n2 n2 8007 International Bank Account Number n4 an 30 8008 Date and time of production n4 n8 n 4 8018 Service Relation Number n4 n18 8020 Payment Slip Reference Number n4 an 25 8100 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character and n4 n1 n5 Offer 8101 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character Offer n4 ni n5 n4 and End of Offer 8102 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character n4 ni n1 Preceded by Zero 8110 Coupon Code Identification for Use in North America n4 an 30 90 Mutually Agreed Between Trading Partners n2 an 30 91 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 92 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 93 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 94 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 95 Inter
362. igure 64 385 Chapter 4 386 Form Examples EXECUTE SAMPLE AF1 B AND C CO AF2 P O BOX 212 AF3 LOS ANGELES CA 90051 AF4 M H INC Upper AF5 101 BEACH RD Upper AF6 MALIBU CA 97772 BF1 S05995 Upper BF2 011233 Upper BF3 190204 Upper BF5 000535 Upper BF6 104523 Upper FF AF1 ABC CORPORATION AF2 1234 ANYWHERE ST AF3 YOUR TOWN MA 03498 AF4 XYZ COMPUTERS Lower AF5 845 N ALLEN ST AF6 WEST BEND OR 97601 BF1 S05997 Lower BF2 456789 Lower BF3 102245 Lower BF4 S05999 Lower BF5 567890 Lower BF6 103764 Lower I BF4 S05996 Upper Lower NORMAL left label addressee right label addressee left label 0 left label S N left label P N right label S O right label S N right label P N Completes 1st form upper labels left label addressee right label addressee left label 0 left label S N left label P N right label 5 0 right label S N right label P N Completes 2nd form lower labels Multiple page documents must be separated by a form feed The page of data includes the Execute command the dynamic data commands and the Normal command Using the SFON command described on page 147 a FF form feed command will allow as many forms as required to print with the appropriate new data supplied dynamically When the SFOFF command
363. iie aD eei t uidi de teo 90 LINES HoriZontalz er pne DET PE ERA 91 Lines Vertical ceo cite t xa 92 Ele 94 LISTON on eee ctt tee tette t de Mese e edd 97 n PEU te p Reine 97 L go Mode Greates oi a xr ee daw org vs n PRG 99 Macro alll TRE 102 Macro Mode Create 103 Normal Mode RIS 105 atop aai 105 Page N mbet Eit c o e asia decia 106 ier noisier lan aii 107 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 111 Paper Instruction 111 POX E090 ria ite atte sat et ets 112 PNG LOGO xi reus ni erede eni 114 Print Elle dA eA 116 Printer Alert ed ete ct 117 Printer 120 Printer Modei eae ua osse ded 121 Printer Status HIP ees 124 125 Recall eieae te ia ae tereti ders 126 pz b E A N 126 FRESC le E E ee E EE 127 Reverse Print n tt Seti 127 RFID PGL 128 HEWTAG io md 128 HERTAG ULIS I 141 Scale acta as Sealed eiii ME DUNS 144 Los es eerte edd 145 SelectFEottmiat nie 147 Set Th Lime or Date ECHOS EL 148 RIT 148 Special Function
364. ilable block patterns for creating a block character Each character is composed of 24 bytes NERF is 32 bytes which is 48 nibbles of block patterns Available Block Patterns Example of Block Character A Eva A Vial N 4 1 AK AV Figure 75 Using Block Patterns to Print Block Character The following example shows how to download select and print a user defined block character such as block character A shown in Figure 75 It also shows a common error the user might encounter when creating overlay sets NORMAL NOTE Puts PGL in Normal mode default mode BLOCKLOAD DISK NOTE Download the Block amp character to RAM and Flash 5000 0FBO2FOBAFD200FFF000CCCO000333000FFF000FFF000000 CONFIG NOTE Set Expanded Font menu option to Block BLOCK FONTS 1 END OSET1 NOTE Define overlay set 1 65 5000 NOTE Overlay an A character with the downloaded amp character 428 Setting The Expanded Font Menu Option 13 5000 ERROR Cannot replace a Control Code END CREATE Overlay NOTE Create a PGL form ISET 16 NOTE Enable overlay set 1 ALPHA 5 5 2 3 A NOTE This prints out a amp character instead of an STOP ISET O NOTE Selects U S ASCII character set Thi
365. ill combined with a form will not cause an error at the time it is deleted however an error will occur if you execute a form that contains a previously deleted logo Example From the directory printed in the preceding section delete the practice form the HandCraft Logo and the HandCraft Boats form Similar to the format used with other command sequences the procedure is as follows open a file input the commands exit the file and print For example Enter Format DELETE FRM System Format DELETE FORM PRACTICE FORM formname DELETE FORM HCBOATS DELETE LOGO HANDCRFT cc DELETE LOGO ogoname PRINT DELETE FRM System Format NOTE List the directory again to verify that the forms and logos were deleted To delete a form or logo from the Onboard Flash Memory add the DISK parameter to the above DELETE FORM or DELETE LOGO command DELETE FORM formname DISK DELETE LOGO ogoname DISK A form cannot execute if insufficient space exists in the IGP PGL memory The directory Dynamic Memory Available must be greater than the total size in bytes of the form Delete older forms or logos to allow memory space for new forms and logos or include the Delete command as the last statement in logo or form program to immediately delete the data after it is processed Creating a form or logo with the same name as an existing IGP PGL form or logo will automatically delete the existing form or logo Example
366. imary and secondary messages together encode up to 93 characters Primary and secondary messages together encode up to 93 characters For reader configuration purposes only Optional parameter that allows for postponing the definition of the mode until form execution When used the first character of the dynamic barcode data is used as the mode The character is extracted and not used as barcode data This mode should be used with BFn DIR BFn L Specifies the zipper option Enter Z Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than
367. inter printer type 9 a 60 x 72 scale mode scale mode 2 and a 60 x 48 exit mode scale mode 3 The Create Form command is used to enter the Create Form Mode using a form name of SCALE CREATE SCALE SMODE 9 2 3 form elements defined here END EXECUTE SCALE 1 Select Format Purpose Enables the IGP PGL to ignore all host generated paper movement commands hex 00 1F Mode NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE Format cc SFON or cc SFOFF NOTE A line terminator is not required in the Select Format Sequence cc The Special Function Control Code SFON The Select Format On command Enter SFON SFOFF Exits Select Format Enter SFOFF Comments During Select Format you may enter the following IGP PGL paper movement commands All the commands must be entered in UPPERCASE These commands can only be used with the Select Format command If used at any other time an error condition may result Command Paper Movement Function cc CR Sends a carriage return hex OD cc LF Sends a line feed hex 0A cc FF Sends a form feed hex OC cc LT Sends a no motion line terminator hex 03 Although the Select Format command enables the IGP PGL to ignore all host generated paper movement commands you can input IGP PGL paper movement commands with Select Format on SFON SFOFF cannot be used during Ignore Sequence page 89 147 Chapter 2 148 Command Codes Set The Time or Date Purpose To set the
368. internal printer clock to the current time and date All the parameters are optional NOTE Since this command sets time it is important that it is received and processed by the printer quickly This command should be sent when the printer is online and no other data is in the buffer Mode NORMAL Format cc SETCLOCK DA nn MO YE HO nn MI nn SE nn SETCLOCK The Set Clock command DA Sets the day of the month Enter DA followed by a space then two digit value from 00 31 MO Sets the month Enter MO followed by a space then a two digit value from 01 12 YE Sets the year Enter YE followed by a space than a four digit value from 0000 9999 HO Sets the hour Enter HO followed by a space then a two digit value from 00 23 MI Sets the minutes Enter MI followed by a space then a two digit value from 00 59 SE Sets the seconds Enter SE followed by a space then a two digit value from 00 59 Example See Clock Element Format on page 52 Setup Purpose The SETUP command can be used in two different ways with the formname and without the formname When the formname is not entered the given data under SETUP will be stored into FLASH under the name setup ptx This file is then loaded from FLASH and processed as host data whenever printer power is applied or when the RESET or RECALL command is sent When the formname is entered SETUP is currently being used in XML driven form to save all commands in NORMAL mode
369. inting for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command or the CP DP format Defines the start column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command or use the CP DP format The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field it will not print with the data Quiet Zone In the minimum quiet zone is four cells width on all four sides GuardBand There are no guardbands for QR Code PDF There is no PDF allowed for the QR Code QR Barcode Data Field This bar code is capable of storing up to 7 089 numeric digits 4 296 alphanumeric characters or 2 953 binary characters in Automatic mode The maximum data block division is 200 characters Multiple data block must be separated by a comma character In manual data entry mode a data type identifier must precede each data block If the data type is binary a four digit length value must follow immediately after the data type identifier The following are valid data type identifiers e
370. into a FLASH file with the extension nol and later to be processed along with two other FLASH saved files frm and Ink to print an XML form Mode NORMAL Format cc SETUP formname DISK host data cc SETUPEND cc The Special Function Control Code SETUP The Setup command enter SETUP Comments Setup formname This is a parameter used exclusively for XML driven form When the formname is entered the host data following SETUP and up to SETUPEND will be saved into FLASH under the same formname with the extension nol The data following SETUP can be only the commands in NORMAL mode When XML data stream comes in to print the form under the same formname the file with the same name and extension nol will be retrieved from the FLASH and executed along with two other FLASH file of the same name frm CREATE form and Ink LINK form See the description and example listed for the LINK command on page 94 The form name is not case sensitive DISK Optional parameter to store the file to Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK Enter EMC to store the file to the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge When the option is not specified it stores the file to Onboard Flash Memory by default See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 host data When the parameter formname is not entered the host data can be any IGP PGL command form definition text etc to be stored and executed at power up However when the parameter formname
371. ional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the b
372. ional parameter to store the form to the Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK For XML driven forms use the DISK option See Link on page 94 for a description and example on XML forms Enter EMC to store the form to the SD card or External Memory Cartridge See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 Example The following command creates a form named ORDER with the default forms length cc CREATE ORDER Dark Printing Dark Printing A DARK parameter available in the Alpha Reverse and Bar Code commands is like the double strike feature in impact printers which produces bolder darker text denser black backgrounds for reverse print and extra dark more readable bar codes Reverse and Bar Code commands automatically print in the DARK mode in thermal printers therefore a DARK parameter in the command line is ignored However a DARK parameter used with alphanumeric text in the ALPHA command will print using a bold font In any event print speed is not reduced when using the DARK parameter with thermal printers For barcodes the Dark parameter fills in the space between two adjacent dots in the horizontal direction The DARK parameter will take affect if there is more than one dot in the horizontal direction The DARK parameter will not take affect if there is only one dot on the horizontal direction For example the Intelligent Mail 4 State barcode contains a bar only one dot wide In the horizontal rotation 0 or 180 degrees t
373. is 512 bytes If the format request will result in a data stream exceeding the maximum length an error would be reported A mandatory parameter to specify an ASCII string of characters which is followed by the RFID data to be sent by the printer to the host An optional parameter to specify an ASCII string of characters which will follow the RFID data to be sent by the printer to the host Delimiter designating the start and end of a character string Replace D with any printable character except the SFCC and the slash character The string could be empty i e there are not headers preceding the field data NOTE 1 The DFn field must be defined previously in the CREATE mode before it can be specified in the VERIFY command otherwise it will be considered as a syntax error and the VERIFY command will abort 2 All RFID Read Write commands are executed first in the order they appear in CREATE mode followed by Alpha and Barcode commands and finally VERIFY commands The VERIFY commands are always executed last although they may appear before other commands in the CREATE mode The reason for this is to make sure the data are sent back to the host only if other commands are 158 Chapter 2 154 Command Codes completed and the form is not aborted 3 If the data comes from a DFn field the DFn format is the original format before any conversion If the VERIFY command specifies a different format the data would then be
374. ish of the alphanumeric string Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the alphanumeric string itself You must use the same character at both ends of the alphanumeric string but it will not print with the data text The group of ASCII characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the standard ASCII printable characters except the character used to delimit the string in the D parameter The data appears as prepositioned information on the form beginning at the location specified by SH and SC This is the fixed or static alohanumeric data once defined on the form it is changed only by redefining the form using the Alphanumerics command When DBCS character set is selected by ISET or SYMSET and DBCS font is selected by FONT NAME DBCS data will print STOP Stop indicates the end of the Alphanumeric command enter STOP and the IGP PGL will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP PGL will wait for another set of Alphanumeric command parameters As dynamic data the location of the alohanumeric field is established in the Create Form mode and the actual alphanumeric data is continuously redefined before placement on the form in the Execute Form mode You can also rotate and reverse print the alphanumeric string using this command The following program and example in Figure 3 illustrates the Alphanumeric command capabilities To illustrate positioning
375. it computation is shown below Let D D1D2 Dn be a string of n data characters C C1C2 Cn 1 be a string value of n 1 encoded characters V1 Character value of C1 refer to the table above Fo Sum of Odd V1 Mod 35 Fe Sum of Even V1 Mod 35 Fo 2Fe Mod 35 The second character is the check character Hence designate the second character of C1C2 to be the check character of D Set C2 0 Therefore C1C3C4 Cn 1 D1D2D3 Dn Calculate Fo Fe and F C2 the character that has the check character value 17F Mod 35 Example Assume that the data character string is AQ1557 Form the character string C A0Q1557 Fo 7 18 33 21 Mod 35 79 Mod 35 9 Fe 0 11 19 Mod 35 34 Mod 35 34 9 2 34 Mod 35 77 Mod 35 7 Character value of the check character is 17 7 Mod 35 119 Mod 35 14 Cross reference in the table above 14 is the character value of character S Hence the check character is S GuardBand Normally there are guardbands 0 10 inches both above and below the bars of the barcode However if it is a non rotated barcode with the PDF below then the bottom guardband is reduced to 0 07 inches 1 14 inch The difference 0 03 inches is then subtracted from the overall height of the barcodes This is done to provide compatibility with IGP X00 products 181 Chapter 3 182 Bar Codes Magnification There is only one pre defined magnification f
376. itions the data to avoid overlapping the alphanumeric data with the box and horizontal line data previously entered For complete information on CP DP format refer to the Commands chapter At this point the PRACTC FRM file should contain the following form program data CREATE PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 STOP CORNER 3 30 13 57 64 5 7 STOP HORZ 1 40 16 61 1 45 16 61 1 49 16 61 STOP VERT 1 49 40 45 1 49 49 53 STOP ALPHA 31 22 0 0 ACME INC 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 395 Chapter 4 Form Exercise 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER 40 3 17 0 0 PART NUMBER 40 3 50 0 0 MFG DATE 45 3 17 0 0 DESCRIPTION 49 3 17 0 0 INTERFACE 49 3 50 0 0 VERSION C13 31 16 0 0 FROM C15 54 26 0 0 Call ACME for more information C15 55 34 0 0 714 863 1900 STOP END EXECUTE PRACTICE NORMAL PRINT PRACTC FRM Notice that the END EXECUTE PRACTICE and NORMAL statements are still in the file These are always necessary to end the storage of the form in the IGP PGL and cause it to print Remember a blank line must always separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands Print the file PRACTC FRM The PRACTICE form should look like Figure 68 except for any alphanumeric data substitutions you made Again if error messages occur refer to Solving Program Errors on page 413 COLUMN 16 COLUMN 22 ROW 31 FROM ACME INC ROW 32 15345 Barranca Parkway ROW 33 Irvine CA 92618 R
377. l The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm 225 Chapter 3 Codes EAN 13 Command Format BARCODE EAN13 n DIR SCB MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE EAN13 Designates bar code type EAN 13 enter EAN13 n Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern No center or right guard pattern exists DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented SCB This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length Enter SCB MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow
378. l compatibility for all applicable models in the line matrix or thermal product lines If the columns are left blank the command is ignored for the given product line If individual models are listed the commands are supported only on those listed models Thermal models include T2N TAM SLAM TAM and T5000r SL5000r T5000r In some cases specific options are required e g RFID RTC for real time clock ODV for Online Data Validation 459 Appendix Normal Mode Commands Normal Mode Commands 460 This section covers Normal Mode commands Table 57 Normal Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Cancel CANCEL P TAM T5000r Change SFCC SFCC v v Compressed Print DENSITY v v Configuration CONFIG See page 54 See page 54 Create CREATE v v Create Logo LOGO v v Delete Font DELETE FONT v v Delete Form DELETE FORM v v Delete Logo DELETE LOGO v v Directory DIRECTORY v v Emulation Switch EMULATION TAM T5000r Enquiry ENQUIRY v v Execute EXECUTE v v Expanded Print EXPAND v v Font FONT v v Font Load FONTLOAD v v Hex Sequence HEXON On Off HEXOFF GOFF x ve Line Spacing Vertical LPI v v Link LINK T5000r Table 57 Normal Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Listen LISTEN J T4M T5000r Month Name MONTH RTC Only RTC Only T N
379. l decremental capability to dynamic alphanumeric or bar code data supplied as a part of the Execute Form mode NORMAL NOTE In the command below incremental Execute parameters are shown in boldface type standard Execute command parameters are shown in italics The general Execute format is shown on page 73 cc EXECUTE formname PAGEn 1CNTn IRST n Format ICNTn IRSTn Identifies the incremental form count to specify the number of forms to generate with the incremental fields automatically updated Enter ICNT and replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the number of forms The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of forms to generate before resetting all incremental fields to their starting values The reset count parameter is useful in dividing the total number of forms generated into multiple groups of identical copies To use this parameter enter IRST and replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the reset count how many forms generated before resetting the incremental fields If the reset count value is equal to or greater than the incremental count value the reset will never occur Example The following forms were generated from ICNT6 IRST2 To duplicate incremental fields within a form refer to page 44 0 3 0 3 0 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 form2 form3 form4 form5 form6 ICNT6 Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data
380. l time clock ODV for Online Data Validation Table 7 Configuration Parameters Configuration Configuration Paramielar Value LM Thermal AI 00 SPACES 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 2 T5000r AUTO EJECT 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T5000r AUTO WRAP 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled T TAM T5000r BLOCK FONTS 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled v T5000r BOUNDARY CHECK 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled C39 COMPATBL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled PRIME 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled v v CHECK DYNAMIC BCD 0 Off 1 gt T5000r COMPRESSED CPI 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled CR EDIT 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 0 Onboard Flash Memory T2N DISK STORAGE 1 Expanded Memory Cartridge or SD T4M ERROR REPORT 0 Off 1 On T2N ERROR REPORT 0 Off 1 On 2 Debug v TAM 3 Fault EXT EXECUTE COPY 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 0 Disabled FORM HANDLING 1 Auto Eject 2 Auto TOF 55 Chapter 2 Table 7 Configuration Parameters continued Command Codes Configuration Value LM Thermal Parameter HANGUL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled Hangul HOST FORM LENGTH 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled v v 1 Trailing Spaces 2 X2DPD v v 2 5 SEL
381. last three digits of third digit of the manufacturer s the product manufacturer s number number number use 0 through 2 only 2 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X 3 9 0 0 0 0 e 3 first three digits of last two digits of depends on how manufacturer s the product many digits appear number number use 00 99 the only manufacturer s number 3 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X 0 2212 21 _ 4 first four digits of last digit of product depends on how manufacturer s number use 0 many digits appear number through 9 only in the manufacturer s number 4 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X X A _ all five digits of last digit of product manufacturer s number use 5 9 number only 356 UPC E and UPC EO Table 48 Six Digit Zero Expansion if the 6 digit number ends with then the MFPS number is and the Product Number is 0 Example 124560 the first 2 digits of the zero suppressed number plus 000 12000 00 plus the THIRD FOURTH and FIFTH digit of the zero suppressed number 00456 1 Example 275831 the first two digits plus 100 27100 same as above 00583 2 Example 412022 the first two digits plus 200 41200 same as above 00202
382. ld a complete form Detailed command descriptions for producing forms bar codes and logos are described in the Commands chapter All the data and commands for the form are entered into a file in the host computer The filename used in this exercise is PRACTC FRM and the form name used is PRACTICE If another form named PRACTICE already exists it will be deleted by this exercise Begin each step by reading the explanation The information you input is listed under the word Enter The parameters of each command have a specific order for data entry input the data exactly as shown but always use the actual SFCC required by your system where the is shown The general command format is listed under the word Format next to each example The SFCC is represented by cc in the general format Use the standard commands on your system to open close or print the file with the form data where your system format is required NOTE Do not forget to terminate each command line with a line feed or carriage return with line feed or a paper motion command Enter all commands in uppercase Make sure the printer power is on and the printer is READY ON LINE 391 Chapter 4 392 Form Exercise Creating A Box And Corners 1 On your host computer open create a file for your practice form For example Enter Format PRACTC FRM system format Enter the Create Form mode and specify a form name This is the first input for every ne
383. ld have these four values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data
384. le Bar Code Ratios The user defined variable ratio for bar codes is an optional parameter The default ratios shown in Table 14 are overridden by the variable ratio feature Four and eight digit ratios can be used depending upon the bar code selected Ratio data must be decimal values greater than 0 Enter followed by the actual bar code ratio A colon must separate each element of the ratio Like standard bar code ratios user defined ratios are also interpreted from left to right measuring the size of each bar or space in dot width in the following pattern narrow bar narrow space wide bar wide space See Table 14 for the number of values needed If the D parameter is specified the ratios are represented in printer dots instead of IGP dots 60 x 72 dpi User defined ratios can be disabled from the front panel menu See your User s Guide for details NOTE The IGP does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable wide narrow element relationships for bar code readability When designing unique ratio data carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to readable bar codes 159 Chapter 3 160 Overview User Defined Variable Ratios for Postal Barcodes The user defined variable ratio can also be used for Postal barcodes including Postnet Planet Australian 4 State PostBar Royal Mail and Intelligent Mail 4 State The user defined ratio follows the same general syntax rules but with the following pattern
385. left pad the data with zeros Sending data longer than 7 digits can result in an incorrect barcode Data Field for Composite UCC EAN 128 amp Composite Component A B or C Encodes a UCC EAN 128 linear barcode up to 48 characters are accepted for the primary data Similar to RSS 14 Expanded these types can combine multiple Application Identifiers in the primary data Type UCCACOMP uses Composite Component A or B and UCCCCOMP uses Composite Component C as 2D Barcode See the following descriptions of the 2D Composite Components 2D Composite Component Data Field The type of 2D Composite Component is chosen based on the selected linear component and on the amount of supplementary data to be encoded Composite Component You can encode up to 56 digits of alphanumeric data It is designed for efficient encoding of supplemental application identifier data can be combined with any of the EAN UCC System symbols except for ITF 14 This code is based on MicroPDF417 Composite Component B You can encode up to 338 digits of alphanumeric data can be combined with any of the EAN UCC System symbols except for ITF 14 This code is based on MicroPDF417 It is only used if the data string is too long to be encoded in CC A Composite Component C You can encode up to 2361 digits of alphanumeric data It can only be combined with UCC EAN 128 type UCCCCOMP This code is based on PDF417 and has multiple widths to match t
386. level for each combination Table 43 Micro PDF417 Combinations Number of 201 Max Number of Codewords Uppercase T Max 8 bit Data Max Digits Data Rows for Error Alpha Characters Columns Correction Characters 1 11 64 6 8 3 14 50 12 17 7 17 41 18 26 10 20 40 22 32 13 24 33 30 44 18 28 29 38 55 22 2 8 50 14 20 8 11 41 24 35 14 14 32 36 52 21 17 29 46 67 27 20 28 56 82 33 23 28 64 93 38 26 29 72 105 43 3 6 67 10 14 6 307 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 43 Micro PDF417 Combinations Number of 991 Max Data Number of Codewords Uppercase Max Digits Max 8 bit Columns Data Rows for Error Alpha Characters Correction Characters 8 58 18 26 10 10 53 26 38 15 12 50 34 49 20 15 47 46 67 27 20 43 66 96 39 26 41 90 132 54 32 40 114 167 68 38 39 138 202 82 44 38 162 237 97 4 4 50 14 20 8 6 50 22 32 13 8 44 34 49 20 10 40 46 67 27 12 38 58 85 34 15 35 76 111 45 20 33 106 155 63 26 31 142 208 85 32 30 178 261 106 38 29 214 313 128 44 28 250 366 150 308 PDF417 MACRO PDF417 When the MACRO parameter is specified in the PDF417 Command the data field is scanned for special escape sequences describing a Macro Control Block as defined in Appendix G of the Uniform Symbology Specification PDF417 The escape sequences start with the SO Shift Out Character followed
387. llowed by ten numeral characters using subset A 215 Chapter 3 Codes If a subset switch code is the first character and the next character is not in that character set the printer may start in the commanded set and then immediately switch to the set that includes the second character For example sending a Switch to C code followed by a carriage return and 10 numerals may result in a data field of Start C Switch to A and ten numerals using subset A In other words once manual mode is entered by using a switch code the user is presumed to be selecting the desired data field the printer will automatically switch subsets when required to print the correct data characters but is not required to optimize the barcode length There is no way to exit manual mode and re enter automatic mode in the same data stream Code 128B Example Figure 15 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128B bar code generated by the following program 128 BARCODE C128B DARK 40 15 SAMPLE CODE 128B PDF A STOP BARCODE C128B VSCAN H12 DARK 31 55 SAMPLE CODE 128B PDF STOP END 128 1 NORMAL SC 15 SR 40 gt 216 SAMPLE CODE 128B AMAA Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Dark Code 128B at SR 40 SC 15 Data Field Upper Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command New Bar Code command Vert Dark C128B H 1 2 at SR 31 SC 55
388. lphanumeric Data on page 38 for complete information on STARTDATA and STEPMASK parameter values The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be equal to or less than the number of characters in the STEPMASK field If the number of data characters is less than the number used in STEPMASK the data will print right justified with preceding spaces Characters allowed for incrementing fields STEPMASK values of 0 9 are numeric 0 9 and alpha A Z uppercase only Any printable character is allowed in non incrementing fields STEPMASK values not 0 9 The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard alphanumeric data field is enclosed within delimiters Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data Fields command is a revised version of the standard IGP PGL alphanumeric command but it does not replace the standard alphanumeric command CREATE TEST 288 Enters Create Form mode VDUP 3 6 Repeat alpha string ALPHA Alpha command 1 6 5 4 4 00001 12345 STOP Ends Alpha command VDUP OFF END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST Prints form NORMAL 12345 12344 12343 43 Command Codes Chapter 2 Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields Purpose Automatically increments decrements dynamic alphanumeric data fields Specifies the location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during
389. lphanumeric characters to identify the document form logo or macro you are creating a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters The Form Name is also used to identify the form during the Execute Form mode The valid Form Name characters are listed below and also apply to Logos and Macros The SFCC can also be used in the Form Name No spaces are allowed between any of the Form Name characters Table 4 Valid Form Name Characters A through Z upper and lowercase Left and right parentheses 0 through 9 Tilde Dollar sign Single quotes Percent sign 96 Exclamation Point Dash Pound sign At sign Ampersand amp Left and right braces Prompt The prompt is the symbol e g a dollar sign period or greater than symbol used to indicate that the host computer is ready for data input In this manual the prompt is shown as a period 29 Chapter 2 IGP PGL Command Standards Numeric Values In this manual a lowercase n in the command represents a numeric value If a command parameter includes a lowercase n it must be substituted with an appropriate numeric value If the lowercase n is part of an optional parameter and the option is not selected a value for n is not required Comments in Command Lines To aid in maintenance of a form or logo comments can be added to many command lines within the CREATE CREATE LOGO and CREATE MACRO modes Comments must be preceded by a slash Do N
390. lue is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density X1A uses shorter bars to reach the minimum height specification that allows it to fit on a 6 LPI line NOTE The User Defined variable ratio is not allowed for this barcode BFmL 330 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L DARK SH SC D data field STOP PostBar and Royal Mail KIX parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters
391. lue is a single byte hex number ranging from 0x00 to OxFF Enter the hex number using 2 ASCII characters Enter the hex number using 2 ASCII characters Example The parameters C1 N1 P5 ROf specify that concatenation mode is enabled This bar code is the first one in the sequence of 5 bar codes and the original data has a parity of OxOF 335 Chapter 3 336 Bar Codes BFmL DARK SR SC Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Pr
392. lue ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 46 except the SFCC The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified 341 Chapter 3 342 Bar Codes LOC FONT Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar co
393. m mode 121 Not defined 122 EXECUTE form too wide for current page setting The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another orientation Use the debug slash when creating a form to show which element is out of bounds see page 471 123 EXECUTE form too long for current page setting The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another orientation Use the debug slash when creating a form to show which element is out of bounds see page 471 124 125 Not defined 126 LFORMXx form length parameter n error The number of lines exceeds 66 for 6 lpi or 88 for 8 Ipi lines when using the LFORMx command 127 Not defined 128 FORM LOGO name is not a legal file name The file name exceeds the 15 character limitation or an invalid character was used the file name Refer to IGP PGL Command Standards in the Commands chapter 129 Not defined 452 Incremental Fields Errors Incremental Fields Errors 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 Not defined Incremental STEPMASK parameter error A semicolon is missing after the STEPMASK data Incremental REPEAT RESET parameter error An illegal RPT or RST parameter value was found in the incremental command The value must range from 1 through 65 535 Incremental STEPMASK STARTDATA length error The dynamic stepmask exceeded created field length or start data exceeded stepmask Incremental EXECUTE command error An illegal
394. macroname SR SC The Macro Call command enter MACRO Identifies a previously defined macro by name for use within the form Enter the macro name exactly as used to define and store the macro By default the macro name will be searched in the following order DRAM Onboard PCB Flash and then Extended Memory if available Defines the vertical offset of the macro All graphic and text contained within the macro will be vertically offset in the form by the SR value given Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the horizontal offset of the macro All graphic and text contained within the macro will be horizontally offset in the form by the SC value given Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 NOTE Any SCALE or FONT commands within the macro will only be applied to the contents within the macro and will not affect the rest of the form design Macros are designed to work independently Example The following macro call places the contents of HEADER at position offset of SR 10 SC 5 CREATE PAGE MACRO HEADER 10 5 END Macro Mode Create Macro Mode Create Purpose Mode Format Places the IGP
395. mand page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 171 Chapter 3 172 Bar Codes D data field PDF LOC FONT The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters See Data Field on page 169 for a description of the Australian 4 State bar code data field Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to sel
396. mand for 8 forms enter LFORMS8 Specifies the forms length in total number of lines allowed per form The range depends on the paper size used and the top bottom margin setting Table 8 shows the appropriate form lengths for the paper size used when the top and bottom page margin settings are zero An error message will result if the maximum line values are exceeded Table 8 Paper Sizes and Maximum Page Length Maximum Lines Per Page Paper Size when top bottom margins 0 6 Ipi 8 Ipi Letter 8 5 x 11 66 88 Legal 8 5 14 84 112 4 8 268 11 693 70 93 5 6 929 9 842 59 78 AIAG Label 4x6 36 48 AIAG Label 6x5 30 40 Odette Label 8x5 30 40 Computer 14 x 11 66 88 Hex Character Encoding NOTE This command affects only printed text inside of IGP PGL forms not the printer Ipi The LFORM8 command considers a line as 9 dot rows the LFORM6 command considers a line as 12 dot rows The 9 and 12 dot rows per line matches the dot rows of the printer in the DP mode if set to 8 or respectively Example following example establishes a forms length of 8 inches 48 lines at LFORM6 48 NOTE Additional information about page boundaries can be found in Appendix C Hex Character Encoding Purpose Enables the IGP to process the data in the hex character format which only accepts characters 0 9 and A F This format is useful when the user needs to send down binary
397. mbol set Enter SYMSET a space and UTF8 to select the UTF8 character set or enter a number following the space to select the corresponding symbol set POINT Selects the point size for the current typeface Enter POINT a space and a point size ranging from 4 through 999 Point sizes are available in quarter point increments Horizontal pitch is automatically adjusted based on the point size selected The POINT parameter cannot be used when in CREATE mode Use the point parameter of the ALPHA command for the text in CREATE mode SPACE Selects a spacing alignment scheme where applicable Enter SPACE a space followed by a value 0 through 3 ZERO It is used to select the slash zero option A value of turns off the slash zero and a non zero value turns on the slash zero All ALPHA commands and text printer are affected WIDTH Selects the character width for the current typeface Enter WIDTH space and a width size from 4 to 999 Width sizes are available in quarter point increments The WIDTH parameter cannot be used when in CREATE mode Use the point parameter of the ALPHA command for the text in CREATE mode NOTE The standard fonts available depends on the printer Thermal Letter Gothic Bold 93779 Courier New Bold 93952 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed 92250 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 CG Times 92500 GC Triumverate 92244 and CG Triumverate Bold 92248 Line Matrix Letter Gothic
398. meric data Up to eight MODEs can be specified within one PMODE command Horizontal compression of elements occurs when the print mode is changed to a mode with a different density For example on an L150 printer a box is constructed using print mode 2 density of 60 dpi 10 cpi horizontal for standard data processing applications The SH and SC parameters of the box command produce a box 6 inches wide 6 inches at 60 dpi 360 dots or 6 inches at 10 cpi 60 character spaces If the same box is generated in print mode 4 density of 72 5 dpi 12 1 cpi horizontal for a bar code application the box will be compressed to an approximate width of 4 9 inches due to the higher dot density of print mode 4 360 dots at 72 5 dpi 4 9 inches To compensate for the compression modify the program generating the form elements to accommodate the dot density of the new print mode To produce the 6 inch wide box at the 72 5 dpi horizontal print mode the box SH and SC parameters must be modified to accommodate 435 dots 6 inches at 72 5 dpi 435 dots or 6 inches at 12 1 cpi 72 6 character spaces Starting and ending row and column data must be calculated in terms of character or dot scaling based on the IGP PGL Scale command page 144 This type of horizontal compression is illustrated in Example 2 below 122 Example 1 Printer Mode The following sample program places an L150 printer in Mode 4 beginning on form line number 1 to print bar
399. meter is overridden by the H parameter below Hn Optional parameter that selects the target height of the entire symbol When the H parameter is used the y dimension of the single square module is computed by dividing the target height by the number of symbol rows Thus both the x and y dimension of the square data module will be overridden by this value FORMATx y Optional parameter that specifies the format x includes error correction and number of layers y in the symbol as shown in the table below Note that in formats with x 0 1 99 and 102 the number of layers is optimally chosen by PGL Format x Description Layers y 0 Default with Error Correction of 23 0 3 codewords 1 99 Fixed Error Correction Percentage of 0 1 99 100 Compact format 1 4 101 Full range format 1 32 102 Rune format 0 Aztec Barcode APPENDx y Optional parameter that specifies that invokes message append multiple symbols linked together across x number of symbols The minimum value of x is 1 and the maximum is 26 The parameter y specifies the length of the Message Append ID string which is the first y bytes in the data field Since the Message Append ID string is included with the data it should be part of the L parameter when dynamic data BF parameter is used INIT Optional parameter that specifies that the symbol is a Reader Initialization symbol Quiet Zone The minimum quiet zone is one module widt
400. methods are not supported Refer to your application s documentation about TIFF files 30 Character Position Dot Position CP DP Format Character Position Dot Position CP DP Format The CP DP format is a special parameter available with the IGP PGL commands CP DP format allows two elements plotted at nearly the same character location to be offset to eliminate overlapping Specifying starting and ending rows and columns is its most frequent use Each character location is a cell Each cell is a grid 12 dot rows high by 6 dot columns wide printing at 6 Ipi and 10 cpi The CP DP format allows a character cell position CP and a specific dot position DP within the cell to be identified as shown in Figure 2 The DP portion of the CP DP format specifies a location down in reference to rows and to the right in reference to columns within the character cell position For example refer to Figure 2 Suppose a line runs along character position column 13 13 At the same time an alphanumeric string must begin in column 13 With CP DP format the alphanumeric string can be offset 2 dot positions DP 2 in column 13 to avoid overlap Specify 13 2 CP 13 DP 2 for the starting column of the alphanumeric string Similarly to place a horizontal line 8 dot rows beneath another horizontal line in character row position 11 specify row 11 for one line and row 11 8 for the other line 12 5 13 1 13 3 13 5 14 1 11 0 12 0 13 0
401. mmand Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The offset is from starting column to starting column 67 Chapter 2 Command Codes HDUP OFF Terminates the Horizontal Duplication command enter HDUP OFF If not entered the IGP PGL expects another form element to be defined for duplication A single HDUP command can define different types of elements for duplication Example The following example is a horizontal duplication of a series of vertical lines To illustrate positioning starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page HDUP 14 4 14 dupes with 4 character column spacing VERT Command to duplicate horizontally 1 10 59 59 6 Note CP DP format 59 6 1 10 3 58 9 59 9 1 11 58 6 60 1 11 3 58 3 60 3 1 12 58 60 6 1 12 3 58 3 60 3 1 13 58 6 60 1 13 3558 9 59 9 STOP Stops the command to duplicate element HDUP OFF Terminates the horizontal duplication COLUMN 10 COLUMN 11 COLUMN 12 COLUMN 13 ROW 58 eta ee eee ea DUPLICATING THE SET HORIZONTALLY 14 TIMES 71 ROW 60 6 COLUMN 13 3 COLUMN 12 3 COLUMN 11 3 COLUMN 10 3 68 Duplication Vertical Duplication Vertical Purpose Defines both the number of times elements are duplicated vertically and the spacing between each duplication Mode CREATE Format V
402. must include a FNC1 character in its place so that PGL inserts the checkdigit character at the right position If the mod 10 checkdigit character it will be used and not overwritten by PGL GS1 Databar Table 27 Various Encoding Methods and Characteristics for RSS 14 Expanded Al Element Strings Description 01 and other Als Used for leading Al of 01 with supplementary Als any Als Used for encoding data that does not lead with an Al of 01 01 and 3103 The AI 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 3103 variable weight element must have a weight of 0 32 767 kilograms 01 and 3202 3203 The AI 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 3202 weight field must have a weight of 0 99 999 pounds The AI 3203 must have a weight of 0 22 767 pounds 01 and 392x The AI 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The AI 392x price may only have from zero to three digits to the right of the decimal point x 0 to 3 01 and 393x The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The Al 393x price may only have from zero to three digits to the right of the decimal point x 0 to 3 01 310x and 11 The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The Al 310x metric weight must be 0 99 999 The Al 11 production date has no limitations 01 320 and 11 The Al 01 must have an indicator digit of 9 The Al 320 english weight must
403. n 339 UCC EAN 128 243 UPC E 352 UPCSHIP 360 UPS 11 366 Start Stop Codes Codabar 184 Storage flash memory 24 Storing data 30 Supplies Department 499 Supported Character Sets 415 T Telepen 338 Check Digit 339 command format 340 Data Field 339 example 344 Quiet Zone 339 Readable Data 339 Start Stop Codes 339 structure 338 Termination Code BC412 Barcode 179 TIFF Logo command 151 Top bottom margins setting 472 TWOBYTE command syntax Common 497 TWOBYTE command syntax Line Matrix 495 TWOBYTE command syntax Thermal 492 Typefaces standard 489 U UCC EAN 128 application identifiers 239 command format 245 Data Field 243 example 248 Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC 18 and SCC 14 244 Modulo 103 Check Digit 244 Quiet Zone 243 Readable Data 244 Start Stop Codes 243 512 Uncompressed and packed bits compression 30 Unicode 423 UPC A 345 Check Digit 346 command format 347 Data Field 346 example 350 Number System Character 346 Quiet Zone 346 Readable Data 346 Start Center Stop Codes 346 UPC E 351 Check Digit 352 command format 353 Data Field 352 example 358 Number System Character 352 Quiet Zone 352 Readable Data 352 Start Stop Codes 352 UPC EO 351 example 358 structure 351 UPCSHIP 359 Check Digit 360 command format 361 Data Field 360 example 364 Quiet Zone 360 Readable Data 360 Start Stop Codes 360 structure 35
404. n When the command is sent to the printer the information containing the printer identification is sent back to the host The information contains the model software version dots per millimeter setting and memory size Mode NORMAL Format cc IDENTITY cc The Special Function Control Code IDENTITY The printer identification command Enter IDENTITY Command When the printer receives this command it will return the information to the host as such T53060 V1 16K 12 512KB T53060 printer model 1 16 software version 12 dots mm 512KB memory Example The following example shows the format of printer identification command IDENTITY 120 LINE MATRIX Printer Mode Printer Mode Purpose Selects the print mode of the printer for the next set of data and allows different print modes to be specified for use within the form Mode CREATE Format PMODE type width rmode MODE SH PMODE The Printer Mode command Enter PMODE The PMODE command must be the first command entered following the CREATE command lype Indicates the type of printer used with the IGP PGL Enter L to specify L150 or L150B printers enter S to specify standard MVP and MVP 150B printers 3 to specify P3000 printers 6 to specify P6000 printers and 9 to specify P9000 printers width An optional parameter specifying a forms width of 136 character columns Currently this parameter is not supported the default value forms width is 132
405. n are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page HORZ 1 60 15 65 1 60 5 15 65 STOP COLUMN 15 COLUMN 65 ROW 60 lt q ROW 60 5 Lines Vertical Purpose Defines vertical lines Mode CREATE Format VERT LT C SR ER STOP VERT The Vertical Line command enter VERT LT Defines the line thickness measured in 1 60 inch 92 dots Enter a value of 1 or greater Vertical line thickness expands to the right from the starting column C Defines the column where the vertical line begins Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 SR Defines the starting row of the vertical line Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 ER Defines the ending row of the vertical line Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last column of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 STOP Stop indicates the end of the VERT command enter STOP If not entered the IGP PGL expects another set of Vertical Line command parameters Lines Vertical Example The following program spe
406. n example cc BFn lt DFn gt 74 Prints RFID tag data as Barcode data Refer to RFWTAG on page 128 for an example Execute Form General Format cc DFn lt DFm gt Use the contents of dynamic RFID field DFm in the dynamic RFID field DFn cc GFn D logoname D The Execute Dynamic Logo Command Enter the name of the logo during the Execute Form mode as described in Execute Form Dynamic Logo on page 79 cc IAF m idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D The Execute Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command Supply the data as described on page 81 cc IDFn fidir STEP RPTm RSTm D STARTDATA D Refer to RFWTAG on page 128 cc IBFn idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D The Execute Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data command Supply the data as described on page 81 Overlay Data Overlay data can be entered during the Execute Form mode The words Overlay Data are not part of the Execute command They are shown in the command sequence to indicate that actual overlay data can be entered following the Execute command Refer to Execute Form Overlay Data on page 82 Form Feed Character Optional command instructing the IGP PGL to start a new page with new EVFU dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the current form This EVFU Data Dynamic Data and Overlay Data Form Feed Character sequence can be repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum prin
407. n or ISET UTF8 or ISET xx cc Represents the Special Function Control Code ISET The Multinational Character Set command enter ISET n The character substitution set number enter a value from the multinational Table 50 or international Table 56 character set tables Character sets 0 through 23 represent resident character sets Values from 24 through 31 correspond to the customized USET character sets 1 through 8 respectively For example refer to Table 54 on page 422 If you want to use the User Set 1 created in the example on page 422 call ISET 24 Similarly if you want User Set 5 that you had previously defined call ISET 28 to select and print the User Set 5 substitution set UTF8 Enter UTF8 enclosed with a single quote to select the UTF 8 character set which is an encoding of Unicode To select the alternate character sets enter a two byte string listed in Table 55 on page 424 enclosed within single quotes NOTE The two byte string listed in Table 55 on page 424 depends on the font selected For example to select the Wingdings Character set ISET WD the wingding font needs to be selected with a FONT command You can issue the ISET command as many times within a form as needed The character set selected will remain active until a new character set is selected If you choose an incorrect character set value or make a syntax error an error message will result If a value for
408. n readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code The height of the bar code body is reduced to compensate for the human readable field and the guard bands 247 Chapter 3 248 Bar Codes FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the bar code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not encountered an e
409. nal Carriers n2 an 30 96 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 242 GS1 128 Table 26 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued Content Format 97 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 98 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 99 Internal n2 an 30 To indicate only year and month DD must be filled with OO Plus one digit for length indication Plus one digit for decimal point indication The fourth digit of this Al s indicates the sequence of the processors in the supply chain Data Value Representation a alphabetic characters n numeric characters an alpha numeric characters n3 8 numeric characters fixed length an 3 up to 3 alpha numeric characters n 3 up to 3 numeric characters Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code UCC EAN 128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C and a stop code common to both An automatic mode switching feature is used to generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters Data Field UCC EAN 128 bar codes re
410. national character set charts 431 OCR character sets 419 Supported Character Sets 415 User Defined set command USET 421 N Normal mode command 105 Normal mode commands 17 Normal Mode form examples 377 Not User Defined Execute Form mode 471 Not defined Execute Form mode 472 Number System Character EAN 13 225 UPC A 346 UPC E 352 Numeric Values 30 OCR character sets Multinational Character Sets 419 On Line Form IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Operation IGP PGL 15 Optimize command 105 Overlay data 32 Overlay data Alphanumeric Data 23 Overlay set activate 427 Overlay set disable 428 Overlays examples 428 P Page layout considerations 403 Page number command 106 Paper command 107 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 command 111 Paper Instruction PI Enable Disable command 111 Paper motion form feeds 477 line feeds 477 PI Line Relative Line Slewing 478 Paper selection and maximum value setting left margins 473 setting top bottom margins 472 509 Paper selection and maximum values 471 Create Form mode 471 Execute Form mode 471 PCX Logo command 112 PDF 412 Barcode 182 PDF 417 302 PDF character sizes 161 PDF 417 301 command format 303 Data Field 302 example 306 PDF 302 Quiet Zone 302 Security Level 302 Start Stop Codes 302 structure 301 PGL DBCS Series TWOBYTE command syntax Common 497 TWOBYTE command syntax Line Matrix 495 TWOBYTE c
411. nd enter PAGE a space and replace n with the decimal number of the starting page in a sequence of multiple pages The number may be eight digits long and range between 0 and 99999999 The next page after 99999999 is 0 Be sure to leave a blank space between the PAGE command and the n value The page number will print on the form in the location defined by the Page Number command in the Create Form mode If the location of the pagination field was not specified in the Create Form mode the page field is printed in the upper left corner of the form FC The optional form count parameter specifies the number of copies of the form to print Enter the appropriate number When the last page prints the IGP PGL returns to the Normal mode automatically Do not use the form count parameter if dynamic data AFn and BFn parameters incremental data or IRST parameters overlay data or EVFU data are used in the Execute command 73 Chapter 2 Command Codes FCNTn ICNTn IRSTn DISK EVFU Data The optional incremental form count Enter FCNT functions the same as ICNT and the form count value However with FCNT both incremental dynamic data IAF or IBF and non incremental dynamic data AF or BF will be printed on each page With ICNT only incremental dynamic data will be printed on each page and non incremental dynamic data will only be printed on the first page The optional incremental form count Enter
412. nd Format BARCODE BC412 DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D Data Field D PDF LOC F EONT VE HE STOP Start Code The start code is bar space space in all cases Termination Code The stop code is bar space bar in all cases Data Field BC412 can accommodate 35 characters 0 9 and A Z The number 0 is used in place of the letter O The following table lists the character with it s module sequence and the character value Bar Space Module Character Character Sequence Value 0 00 1 l l l l 15 l l l l 17 l l l l 29 l l l l 11 eee 33 19 NIOJ oO BY Ww I 1 1 1 1 21 179 Chapter 3 180 Bar Codes Character Module Sequence Character Value 08 02 07 25 20 22 09 30 03 mM 06 27 16 24 04 34 12 32 18 01 14 13 26 05 31 28 23 lt gt 2 lt 10 Start Stop BC412 BARCODE Check Code The 412 has mod 35 check character The check character is placed in the second position behind the first data character The check code is automatically included in the bar structure however it is not included in the PDF The check dig
413. nd processing continues BARCODE type not supported The bar code type selected is a valid IGP PGL bar code but is not supported by this type of printer EXPAND parameters out of bounds or format error The parameters of the Expand command are improperly specified Either the parameters are out of bounds or some type of format error was detected The command is ignored and processing continues 449 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Bar Code Errors 90 Insufficient memory to store the BARCODE No more room exists in the IGP PGL memory for another bar code The rest of the bar code commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue 91 ALPHA BARCODE syntax error Some type of syntax format error was detected in the parameters of the bar code command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Misspelled keywords Lowercase used A missing semicolon A colon in place of a semicolon An ending delimiter for the data field was not found Too many or too few parameters in the command string The rest of the command line is flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue 92 BARCODE magnification factor MAG out of bounds or not allowed The magnification factor specified in the bar code command is out of bounds Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable magnification values
414. ng uses the same module 10 check digit and data format The only addition is an Application Identifier Al parameter For Primary Data Structure use 01 and for Secondary Data Structure use 22 or AI 240 To use UCC 128 to encode be sure to use the correct parameter to obtain the desired results Optional parameter that allows for rotating barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 NOTE You must specify four digits for MAG for User Defined variable ratio There are four values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space wide bar and wide space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these four values defined in the order specified 193 Chapter 3 194 Bar Codes Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments plus dots
415. ng data bit 8 addressing The primary character set is ASCII These character values reside at hex addresses 20 through 7F The Multinational or extended character sets reside at hex addresses 80 through FF and are accessible without reconfiguration NOTE Data bit 8 must be set high so that Multinational or extended character sets are accessible without reconfiguration However the PION PIOFF command page 111 must also be set OFF to access these character sets in the hex 80 FF range A PION setting will cause data in the hex 80 FF range to be interpreted as PI line data instead of extended character set data Power Up Character Set Selection You can select any one of the 14 resident multinational character sets shown in Table 50 0 through 13 or any of the International Sets shown in Table 56 as the default character set at printer power up The IGP PGL configuration settings determine which character set is the default character set at power up Refer to your User s Manual to configure the IGP PGL for a specific character set See Select Font in the configuration menu The character font selected at power up will remain active until either the ISET or SYMSET command is selected or the configuration is changed OCR and user definable character sets cannot be configured as the default character set at printer power up User Defined Set Command USET User Defined Set Command USET Purpose Creates custom character sets except OC
416. ng form creation the parameter specifying the column position of a logo places the logo outside the form boundaries When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then processing continues normally LOGO error found in DISK FLASH file When the logo was loaded dynamically in Execute Form mode from disk or flash there was an error in processing the logo Create Errors 60 61 62 63 446 Directory full cannot CREATE the form or LOGO The directory is full or no more room exists in the IGP PGL memory for another form When this occurs the IGP PGL automatically reverts to the Normal mode To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms that are no longer required CREATE function unrecognized An unrecognizable command is entered during the Create Form mode At this point the buffer is flushed until a Stop command is found and then processing continues CREATE horizontal duplication parameter HDUP error Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded The duplication number must be no greater than 255 and the offset must be no greater than 792 dot scale If this error occurs the Horizontal Duplication command is ignored and forms processing continues CREATE vertical duplication parameter VDUP error Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded The duplication number must be no greater than 255 and the offset must be no greater than the specified
417. ng location on the form The SR and SC parameters are used to specify the exact location of the DBCS data field identified by n Since the TWOBYTE command and the ALPHA command share the same set of identification numbers therefore do not set the same number for the two commands in one form c Set the length of the dynamic DBCS characters in L ranging from 1 to 127 The actual number of DBCS characters supplied in the EXECUTE mode must be the same or less than this value In UTF8 mode L should be the same or more than the number of bytes supplied in EXECUTE mode d The DBCS data is not allowed to enter it can only be supplied in the EXECUTE mode Optional parameter for rotating a DBCS character string Use the following codes to indicate the direction of character rotation CW 90 degree clockwise rotation CCW 90 degree counter clockwise rotation INV Inverted characters 180 degree rotation Defines the starting row of the DBCS character data field 1 lt SR lt Form Length Defines the starting column of the DBCS character data field 1 lt SC lt Form Width Defines the vertical expansion factor to enlarge DBCS characters vertically The factor must ensure that the characters after expansion do not exceed the form boundary limit The largest value is 63 0 and 1 specifies the stand font no expansion Elongated E characters cannot be used with a vertical expansion factor other than 0 EXECUTE Mode Command Syntax Common
418. nging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 data field Interleaved 2 5 Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors An even number of characters are required for the interleaving process Consequently if an odd number of characters are entered in the data field a leading zero is added automatically The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 German I 2 5 The data field must be 11 or 13 digits exactly ITF 14 The data field must be 13 digits exactly PDF Optional parameter to enable printing of the human read
419. ngle OSET command Ends the OSET command NOTE Only printable locations can be replaced Control codes and the space character cannot be replaced If the value of the cell address ca points to a control code or a space then an error will print Activating A User Defined Overlay Set Purpose Format An overlay set cannot be accessed until it is requested Once a user defined overlay set Substitution Table is created the ISET command can be used to activate it The ISET command can also be used to access regular non overlay sets such as multinational or international character sets If an overlay set selected has not been created then the ISET command would have no effect on the currently selected character set cc ISET n cc ISET n Represents the Special Function Control Code SFCC The character set command The character set number The valid values are 0 through 31 Overlay sets reside within sets numbered 16 through 23 All other values correspond to non overlay sets 427 Chapter 5 _ Accessing Characters and Character Sets Disabling An Overlay Set The PGL overlay set is activated by the ISET command It remains active until another character set is selected When the character set is changed all overlay sets will be disabled even if the selected set is the same as the previous base character set Examples for Downloaded Block Characters amp Overlays This section provides the ava
420. nline command Modes of Operation Table 1 Normal Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Cancel CANCEL Cancels the print job immediately as soon as the 50 command is sent to the printer during the print job Change SFCC SFCC Changes the Special Function Control Code character 150 Compressed Print DENSITY Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch 52 cpi Configuration CONFIG Reconfigures IGP PGL parameters 54 Create Form CREATE Places the IGP PGL in the Create Form mode where all the 61 Create Form mode commands are available to design form elements Create Logo LOGO Places the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode where logos 99 can be defined using the appropriate dot placements Create Macro MACRO Stores a set of Create Macro commands that can be 103 included as often as needed within a form Delete Font DELETE Deletes the font identified by the font name which resides 64 FONT in flash memory only Delete Form DELETE Deletes a selected form name from the directory and 65 FORM IGP PGL memory Delete Logo DELETE Deletes a selected logo name from the directory and 65 LOGO IGP PGL memory Delete Macro DELETE Deletes a selected macro name from the directory and 66 MACRO IGP PGL memory Directory DIRECTORY Provides a list of all defined forms and logos logo 66 assignments to forms and memory usage and availability Emulation Switch EMULATION Switch emulation from IGP PGL to IGP VGL if VGL is 71 prese
421. noted otherwise Throughout this chapter actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered while all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters but do not enter these spaces in your command The single most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure the bar code will be scanned properly Incorporating a bar code quality procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being printed correctly A properly implemented validation procedure will increase overall bar code quality reduce waste from misprinted bar codes and achieve high first time read rates which is an increasingly important factor in newer more efficient systems where manually entered data is not acceptable as a backup function Validation also minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes For more information on bar code validation contact your Printronix representative or visit our web site at www printronix com 157 Chapter 3 Overview Table 11 Available Bar Codes Bar Code Mnemonic Symbol Length Code Set Australian 4 State AUSTPOST Variable Alphanumeric 168 Aztec AZTEC Variable Alphanumeric 174 BC412 BC412 Variable Alphanumeric 179 Codabar CODABAR Variable Alphanumeric 183 Code 35 C35 Variable Alphanumeric 188 C
422. nt Enquiry ENQUIRY Sends information about the printer state to the host 71 through the serial port Execute EXECUTE Executes a previously created form 72 Expanded Print EXPAND Expands fonts vertically and horizontally 83 Font FONT Selects a specific typeface bold slant italic factor and 84 symbol set Font Load FONTLOAD Load binary TrueType Font or Intellifont into RAM or Flash 87 memory Hex Sequence HEXON Enables the IGP to interpret all data as hex characters 0 9 89 On Off HEXOFF A F Any data not sent as hex digits is ignored until the HEXOFF command is sent 17 Chapter 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Table 1 Normal Mode Commands continued into the printer at power up or after a RESET command is sent Command Mnemonic Description Page Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP PGL to ignore all characters after the 89 On Off IGOFF Ignore Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent See Note on page 21 Line Spacing LPI Defines the lines per inch printing format 90 Vertical Link LINK Prints forms created in the CREATE mode used 94 exclusively for XML driven forms Listen LISTEN Removes IGP PGL from the Quiet state and enables 97 IGP PGL operation Month Name MONTH Allows the creation of user defined strings to be used as 63 full and abbreviated month strings in the clock elements Multinational USET Use a multinational character set or create a cust
423. nt boundaries If the dot scale is selected the parameters are specified in dot row and column For example based on a 60 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical dot scale a form of 8 1 2 x 11 inches has 792 rows 72 dpi x 11 inches and 510 columns 60 dpi x 8 1 2 inches and a form of 8 x 11 inches has 792 rows and 480 columns Refer to Appendix C for more information about maximum values with other paper sizes The default scale factor uses character row and column 6 Ipi and 10 cpi Anytime CP DP format page 31 is used the scale assumes 6 and 10 cpi and a 60 x 72 dpi format LINE MATRIX Scaling You can change the Scale at any time during forms creation by using either of the Scale commands Elements designed before the scale change will print at the former scale while those elements following the scale change will print at the current scale NOTE Scale affects data position not the printed data itself For example alphanumeric data printed at 10 cpi will still print at 10 cpi after a Scale change however where the data is placed on the page is affected Also Scale affects line thickness if dot scale and horizontal vertical scaling are given Scaling Purpose Mode Format Permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi 60 horizontal x 72 vertical dots per inch This
424. nter these values using a SO character followed by an identifier When encoding special characters you must enter a SO character followed by at least one other identifier and its field i e 254 d254 This is only considered to be one character even though the data field holds 5 characters d254 If you intend to code the SO character by itself no special encoding then the SO character should be followed by another SO character Table 29 illustrates how to use these special characters 263 Chapter 3 264 Bar Codes Table 28 Data Field for ECC 000 through ECC 140 Format ID Data 1 Numeric 0 9 Space Uppercase A Z Space Uppercase A Z Numeric 0 9 Space Uppercase A Z Numeric 0 9 Space Period Comma Minus Forward Slash Full 128 ASCII set 0 127 6 User defined 0 255 STOP For ECC 200 format ID has no meaning and is ignored Instead you can enter data of any type ASCII 0 255 and it will be automatically optimized into the proper encoding scheme See the Special Characters Using SO section for examples of methods to enter special characters such as FNC1 into the data stream The maximum number of data depend on three factors 1 size of the matrix 2 ECC level and 3 type of data The size of the matrix is automatically chosen by IGP unless the parameters of row and or column are supplied see Cn and Rn parameters The m
425. number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm UPC A Command Format BARCODE UPC A n DIR SCB MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPC A n DIR SCB MAG Designates bar code type UPC A enter UPC A Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length Enter SCB Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Enter a magnification value f
426. o exactly seven digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 221 Chapter 3 222 Bar Codes PDF LOC FONT Optional parameter to print the human readable data field The data field prints automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter The human readable data field can be printed above or below the bar code symbol This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified If no PDF command is entered the data field will print automatically in the default OCR B font Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress the PDF entirely To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion fa
427. ode 39 C3 9 Variable Alphanumeric 191 Code 93 CODE93 Variable Alphanumeric 199 Code 128 C128A Variable Alphanumeric 206 A BorC C128B C128C EAN8 EAN8 7 digits Numeric 218 EAN13 EAN13 12 digits Numeric 224 FIM FIM n a A B CorD 231 German l 2 5 I25GERMAN 11 or 13 digits Numeric 277 GS1 128 formerly UCC 128 Variable Alphanumeric 238 UCC EAN 128 GS1 Databar RSS14 Variable Alphanumeric 252 formerly RSS 4 GS1 Datamatrix DATAMATRIX Variable Alphanumeric 261 formerly Datamatrix Intelligent Mail 4 State INTMAIL 20 25 29 or 31 digits Alphanumeric 273 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 Variable Numeric 277 ITF 14 ITF14 13 digits Numeric 277 Matrix MATRIX Variable Numeric 283 Maxicode MAXICODE Variable Alphanumeric 289 MSI MSI 13 or 14 digits Numeric 295 PDF417 PDF417 Variable Alphanumeric 301 Planet PLANET 11 digits Numeric 311 Plessey PLESSEY Variable Alphanumeric 317 POSTNET POSTNET 5 9 or 11 digits Numeric 323 PostBar POSTBAR Variable 0 3 329 158 User Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios Table 11 Available Bar Codes continued Bar Code Mnemonic Symbol Length Code Set QR Code QRCODE Variable Alphanumeric 333 Royal Mail ROYALBAR Variable Alphanumeric 329 Telepen TELEPEN Variable Alphanumeric 338 UPC A UPC A 11 digits Numeric 345 UPC E and UPC E 11 or 6 digits Numeric 351 UPC EO UPC EO UPCSHIP UPCSHIP 13 digits Numeric 359 UPS11 UPS11 10 digits Alphanumeric 365 User Defined Variab
428. ogo already existing in memory the newly defined logo will replace the existing logo PNG The command denoting raster data in PNG format enter PNG TRIM Optional parameter that removes extra white space bounding the image which saves memory inside the printer Also helps position the image in an IGP PGL form Enter TRIM ROT Optional parameter for images scanned in orientations other than upright Enter either CW for 90 degrees clockwise rotation CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation or INV for inverted characters 180 degrees rotations This parameter is not for printing rotated logos but rather for handling scanned rotated images Logos are rotated automatically to match the current page orientation when they are called from an IGP PGL form being executed Comments PNG Logo DISK Optional parameter to store the logo to Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK Do not use this parameter in CREATE mode To store the logo in the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge enter EMC See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 T A line terminator i e LF FF must separate the LOGO line from the beginning of the PNG raster data PNG raster data Scanned data in PNG format data must be black and white Grey scales or color PNG files are currently not supported cc The Special Function Control Code RASTEREND Denotes the end of the PNG raster data Enter RASTEREND END Terminates the PNG logo enter END STOP Ends
429. olumn or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The bar code data Enter 5 digits for zip code 9 digits for a nine digit zip code or 11 digits for the Delivery Point Bar Code format The available characters for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result 327 Chapter 3 Codes POSTNET Example Figure 49 illustrates a horizontal and vertical POSTNET bar code generated by the following program CREATE POSTNET Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar code command POSTNET DARK 10 40 Dark POSTNET bar code at SR 10 SC 40 601159912 ZIP 4 data field 60115 9912 STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode CREATE POSTNET Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar code command POSTNET VSCAN DARK 10 20 Dark Vertical bar code POSTNET at SR 10 SC 40 601159912 ZIP 4 data field 60115 9912 STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE POSTNET 1 Execute the form with form
430. om the NORMAL mode This special function must be called from the Normal mode and not the Create Form or Execute Form mode This error is generally due to a missing End command in the Create Form mode For example an attempt to enter the Create Form mode while executing a form will cause the IGP PGL automatically to revert to the Normal mode No such special function The special function call was unrecognizable The IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode Numeric value expected in input parameter Characters other than numeric digits 0 9 are encountered where digits are expected Decimal input error in input parameter The parameter expected was a decimal number Either the number was not there or it was too large greater than 65 535 This error can also be caused by entering an alpha character instead of a numeric character Missing or wrong delimiter must be a semicolon The delimiter is either wrong or missing The delimiter expected is a semicolon Missing or wrong delimiter must be a colon DENSITY param error 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 or 20 The parameters of the Density command are improperly specified The densities currently implemented are 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 and 20 characters per inch The command is ignored and processing continues LPI parameter error The parameters of the command are improperly specified The allowable range is from 1 through 1000 The command is ignored a
431. om user Chap 5 Character Set ISET defined character set Normal Mode NORMAL Places the IGP PGL in the Normal mode where it does not 105 change the data stream but awaits the SFCC followed by an IGP PGL command Optimize OPTIMIZE Optimizes the flash file in memory and then reboots 105 Paper PAPER Controls printer paper options such as page orientation 107 intensity and ribbon use Paper Instruction EN PI Enables or disables use of the PI line with a parallel 111 Enable Disable DIS PI interface Paper Instruction PION Enables or disables Data Bit 8 as the paper instruction 111 On Off for Data Bit8 PIOFF signal in a serial interface Print File PRINT Prints a file from the flash memory 116 Printer Identification IDENTITY The printer identification command 120 Printer Status STATUS Requests the printer status 124 Quiet QUIET IGP PGL operation is disabled until a Listen command is 125 received Any data sent to the LinePrinter Plus Emulation is unaffected by IGP PGL commands Recall RECALL Recalls forms or logos from memory 126 Reset RESET Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP PGL memory or 127 the printer flash memory Set Clock SETCLOCK Sets the internal printer clock to the current time and date 148 Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands 147 On Off SFOFF See Note on page 21 Set Up SETUP Automatically executes and loads the IGP PGL commands 148 18 Modes of Operation Create Form Mode Create
432. ommand see page 84 Thermal Table 64 Standard Fonts for Thermal Printers Font Name Font Face Number Letter Gothic Bold 93779 Courier New Bold 93952 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed 92250 CG Times 92500 CG Triumverate 92244 CG Triumverate Bold 92248 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 Font is not present in the T2N thermal product Line Matrix Table 65 Standard Fonts for Line Matrix Printers Font Name Font Face Number Letter Gothic Bold 93779 489 Appendix F Standard Typefaces 490 G PGL DBCS This appendix describes the additional and unique commands for Printronix Thermal and Line Matrix Printers Line Matrix printers include three firmware options with the DBCS fonts embedded PGL Hangul KS PGL Hanzi GB PGL Kanji Shift JIS emulation software SL5000r T5000r printers include three firmware options with the DBCS fonts embedded PGL Hangul KS PGL Hanzi GB PGL Kanji Shift JIS emulation software SL4M T4M printers use a single firmware but have several EMC options with DBCS fonts Hanzi GB EMC Hangul KS EMC Kanji Shift JIS EMC and four different Andale EMC options T2N thermal printers use a single firmware but have several SD options with DBCS fonts Hanzi GB EMC Hangul KS EMC Kanji Shift JIS EMC and four different Andale EMC options PGL DBCS is an extension to existing PGL ASCII that supports Korean KSC Chinese Hanzi GB and Japanes
433. ommand syntax Thermal 492 PI Line Relative Line Slewing paper motion 478 Planet 311 Check Digit 313 command format 314 Data Field 313 example 316 Quiet Zone 313 Start Stop Code 313 Plessey 317 command format 319 example 322 structure 317 PNG Logo command 114 PostBar and Royal Mail command format 330 example 332 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 Check Digit 329 Data Field 329 KIX Format 329 510 Quiet Zone 329 Start Stop Code 329 POSTNET 323 Check Digit 325 command format 326 Data Field 325 example 328 Quiet Zone 325 Start Stop Code 325 Power Up character set selection Accessing characters and character sets 420 Print boundaries 19 Print File command 116 Printable character 28 Printer Alert command 117 Printer Identification command 120 Printer Mode command 121 Printer Status command 124 Program errors solving 413 Prompt 29 Q QR 333 Quiet command 125 Quiet mode 16 Quiet Zone Code 128A 128B and 128 207 Code 93 200 Data Matrix 261 EAN 13 225 EAN 8 219 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 278 Matrix 284 MSI 296 PDF 417 302 Planet 313 PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 POSTNET 325 Telepen 339 UCC EAN 128 243 UPC A 346 UPC E 352 UPCSHIP 360 UPS 11 366 Quiet Zone Codabar 184 R Readable Data Code 128A 128B and 128C 207 Code 93 200 Data Matrix 261 EAN 13 225 EAN 8 219 Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 2
434. ommand to print the file For example after exiting the file and your system prompt returns Enter Format PRINT PRACTC FRM System Format Creating Box And Corners The form should look like the one shown in Figure 66 When it was printed the form program was stored in the IGP PGL memory If errors are detected in the program error messages are printed and only the error free portions of the program are stored in the IGP PGL memory Refer to Solving Program Errors on page 413 13 SR 30 SC 16 3 53 61 n ER 57 EC 64 Figure 66 Box and Corner Example 393 Chapter 4 Form Exercise Adding Horizontal And Vertical Lines 7 Now return to the file When the file reopens the existing program the contents of the file is displayed Use your system commands to reopen the file For example Enter Format PRACTC FRM System Format 8 All Create Form mode commands must be entered into the program before the End command line Add three horizontal lines each with a thickness LT of 1 at rows 40 45 and 49 and each ranging from column SC 16 to column EC 61 Enter Format HORZ HORZ 1 40 16 61 LT R SC EC 1 45 16 61 1 49 16 61 STOP STOP 9 Addtwo vertical lines each with a thickness LT of 1 both in column C 49 one ranging from row SR 40 to row 45 and the other ranging from row SH 49 to row ER 53 Enter Format VERT VERT 1 49 40 45 1
435. or BC412 X1 which is the default magnification Pre defined magnifications for horizontal and vertical barcodes are listed in Table 6 13 There are two values that comprise the dot ratio bar and a space Therefore user defined ratios for this barcode should have these two values defined in the order previously specified Height The barcode can range from 0 3 9 9 inches tall Default is 0 9 inches If the minimum height of 0 3 inch is selected the PDF is not allowed NOTE the maximum VE allowed in the PDF is dependent on the height of the entire barcode PDF The PDF is not included unless requested If included it is separated from the bars by a guardband The default font type used for the PDF is N The check character is not included in the PDF CREATE TEST BARCODE BC412 H10 5 5 12345ABCDE STOP END EXECUTE TEST NORMAL Figure 9 BC412 Barcode Codabar Codabar The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following pages 73 7 7 I QUIETI I QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE e r OPTIONAL 1 CCW DIGIT 1 1 i OPTIONAL i READABLE i DATA i FIELD 1 UPPER 1 1 LOWER LOWER GUARD 9 ft GUARD GUARD I Er E QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT 1 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION e as 1
436. ormal Mode NORMAL v v Optimize OPTIMIZE 2 TAM T5000r Paper PAPER See page 107 See page 107 Paper Instruction EN PI Enable Disable DIS PI T5000r Paper Instruction PION T4M On Off for Data Bit 8 PIOFF T5000r Print File PRINT v v Printer Identification IDENTITY v v Printer Status STATUS v v Quiet QUIET T4M T5000r Recall RECALL v v Reset RESET v v Set Clock SETCLOCK RTC only RTC only SFOFF f Set Up SETUP v v Appendix A Create Mode Commands Create Mode Commands 462 This section covers Create Mode commands Table 58 Create Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Alphanumerics ALPHA Alpha ALPHA v v Incremental Bar Codes BARCODE BOX Circle CIRCLE Corners CORNER v Duplication HDUP X Horizontal Duplication VDUP 07 Vertical Ellipse ELLIPSE Font FONT Form Length LFORM v v Ignore Sequence IGON v On Off IGOFF Lines Diagonal DIAG v Lines Horizontal HORZ Lines Vertical VERT Logo LOGO v v bb RES LOGODEF Y Y Create Multinational 22 Character Set ISET Page Number PAGE v v Table 58 Create Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Line Matrix Thermal Printer Mode PMODE v Reset RESET v v Reverse Print REVERSE v RFWTAG RFWTAG RFID only RFRTAG
437. ot defined Vertical Line Errors Vertical Line Errors 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 VERTical line starting column SC out of bounds The column specified by the second parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the form boundaries VERTical line starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the vertical line specified by the third parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of the form VERTical line ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the vertical line specified by the fourth parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of the form VERTical line format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the vertical line command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the VERTical line No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for another vertical line The rest of the vertical line commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP PGL memory delete forms with vertical line elements that are no longer required VE
438. pecified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the ending column of the corner Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the length of the vertical arm including the line thickness of each corner in the set Enter a value of 1 or greater specified in character or dot rows based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the length of the horizontal arm including the line thickness of each corner in the set Enter a value of 1 or greater specified in character or dot columns based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Stop indicates the end of the CORNER command enter STOP and the IGP PGL will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP PGL will wait for another set of Corner command parameters 59 Chapter 2 60 Command Codes Example The following program specifies a corner set as shown in Figure 6 To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Note the position of the ending row and ending column they do not include the line thickness CORNER 5 27 27 42 55 4 6 STOP COLUMN 27
439. quire a special character called Function 1 FNC1 to immediately follow the start code IGP automatically supplies this character so it must not be included in the data field by the user A character is made up of three bars and three spaces each varying in width from 1 through 4 modules for a total of eleven modules The number of modules making up the bars is even The stop code has four bars and is 13 modules wide The character set for UCC EAN 128 is the same as the character set for Code 128 Every character is interpreted according to the currently active character subset UCC EAN 128 uses subset B and subset C only Subset B shown in Table 23 page 213 includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters lowercase alphabetical characters and special characters Subset C interprets the characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99 along with some special characters as shown in Table 24 page 214 The start code or subset switch code determines whether a particular bar code character is decoded as one character or as a pair of numbers 243 Chapter 3 244 Bar Codes Readable Data The optional printed data field PDF provides a human readable interpretation of the bar code data When the printed data field is enabled by use of the PDF parameter the overall height of the bars is reduced to make room for a guard band and the human readable characters The printed data field will be formatted with spaces or parenthe
440. r PDF is N Non printable characters are printed as spaces The check digit is included in the PDF For barcode PDF is preceded with a Flag Character which is an identifier used to differentiate HIBC symbols from other non healthcare related barcode symbols A pair of asterisks encloses the human readable field including the check digit Code 39 Code 39 Command Format NOTE Although commonly referred to as Code 39 you must enter the command as C3 9 including the slash during IGP input BARCODE C3 9 CD HIBC DIR MAG BF L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE C3 9 CD HIBC DIR MAG Designates bar code type C39 enter C3 9 To calculate and plot the optional modulo 43 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD The Health Industry Bar Code HIBC is encoded in either Code 128 or Code 39 symbology Enter In global setting HIBC identifies health industry products in any quantity of any lot or serial number with any expiration date HIBC represents two kinds of information Primary and Secondary Identification Primary Identification represents product identity and Secondary Identification represents the attributes of Lot or Batch Code Serial Number and Expiration date When encoding HIBC barcode in UCC 128 HIBC is essentially a UCC 128 barcode The encodi
441. r S to suppress the PDF entirely To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 349 Chapter 3 Codes UPC A Example Figure 55 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC A bar code generated by the following program Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command UPC A 5 H9 DARK 39 15 Dark Code UPC A 5 digit add on H 0 9 SR 39 SC 15 1234567887655555 Data Field 5 digit add on data field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command UPC A 5 VSCAN H12 DARK
442. r is not used the human readable data will not print Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT MSI Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing
443. r of printed characters can be reduced i e a switch to set C to print pairs of numbers with a single character or if the data cannot be found in the current subset The printer will switch from A to B for a lowercase letter from A to C for a long string of paired numbers from B to A for a control character from B to C for a long string of paired numbers from C to A for a control character and from C to B for an unpaired number or any letter or punctuation In automatic mode the printer puts the start codes into the barcode itself they are not part of the user input data in the PGL barcode command If a subset switch code is inserted in the barcode data to start the desired subset the printer leaves automatic mode and enters manual mode However in manual mode automatically subset Switches can still take place when the data cannot be found in the current subset Once a different subset is automatically switched due to the data cannot be found in the current specified subset the switched subset will stay until the end of the data or the encounter of another subset switch code If a subset switch code is inserted as the first character in the data string the barcode will start in that subset No effort is made to minimize the barcode character count That means sending the PGL barcode command 128 with data starting with the switch to A code shiftout and 96 followed by ten numerals will result in barcode characters of Start A fo
444. r s print the file again When the errors have been corrected delete the slash A sample debug listing is shown in Solving Program Errors on page 413 In the Execute mode that part of the form which was correctly defined and stored during the Create mode will print including any dynamic data and overlay text which was accepted before the error occurred Sections containing errors must be corrected before storage in the Directory can take place Any error messages will print following the printed form and processing will continue in the Normal mode In the Create Form or Create Logo mode any error messages will print first followed by that part of the form logo which was correctly defined Incorrectly defined elements are excluded from the form logo The error codes are broken down into categories In each category the number preceding each error message is the actual error code reported by the printer and the error shown in bold is the error message printed 439 Chapter 6 _IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Horizontal Line Errors 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 440 HORiZontal line starting row SR out of bounds The row specified by the second parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column of the horizontal line specified by the third parameter in the horizontal line
445. r strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and add a variety of print and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels You can define the format of the logo using TIFF PNG and PCX raster data as well as the standard IGP PGL dots Logos can also be dynamically merged with the form Macros allow the user to create a set of Create Mode commands and use it repeatedly in a form definition without having to issue all the commands within the macro Macros can be positioned in different offset locations within a form Similar to forms and logos macros can be stored in DRAM Onboard Flash Memory or Extended Memory Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields which includes automatic increment or decrement functions How the IGP PGL Operates How the IGP PGL Operates IGP PGL is an emulation that allows you to print sophisticated graphics and bar codes The printer is always in a particular mode which is transparent to the user When the printer is receiving text or printing text it is in Normal mode Any time the printer is on and is not processing IGP PGL commands it is in Normal mode When a Create Fo
446. racters 36 characters 41 characters 46 characters 51 characters 57 characters 63 characters Table 36 ECC 200 Square Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 10 X 10 12 X 12 14 X 14 16 X 16 18 X 18 20 X 20 22X22 24 X 24 26 X 26 32X 32 36 X 36 40 X 40 44 X 44 48 X 48 52X52 64 X 64 72 X 72 80 X 80 88 X 88 96 X 96 104 X 104 120 X 120 132 X 132 144 X 144 6 characters 10 characters 16 characters 24 characters 36 characters 44 characters 60 characters 72 characters 88 characters 124 characters 172 characters 228 characters 288 characters 348 characters 408 characters 560 characters 736 characters 912 characters 1152 characters 1392 characters 1632 characters 2100 characters 2608 characters 3116 characters 3 characters 6 characters 10 characters 16 characters 25 characters 31 characters 43 characters 52 characters 64 characters 91 characters 127 characters 169 characters 214 characters 259 characters 304 characters 418 characters 550 characters 682 characters 862 characters 1042 characters 1222 characters 1573 characters 1954 characters 2335 characters 1 character 3 characters 6 characters 10 characters 16 characters 20 characters 28 characters 34 characters 42 characters 60 characters 84 characters 112 characters 142 characters 172 characters 202 characters 278 characters 366 characters
447. rameter For example when specifying a user defined ratio of XRD4 4 6 the vertical height element is 4 so the height of the linear portion of the barcode will be 24 4 x 6 PDF The PDF is not included unless requested It only represents the primary data of the barcode and not the 2 D composite portion If included it is separated from the bars by a guardband of 0 10 inches It can be printed above or below the barcode The default font type used for the PDF is N The format of the PDF is identical as for UCC EAN 128 symbols Thus the mod 10 check character is included in the PDF as well The mod 89 checkdigit is not included in the PDF The PDF is automatically resized to the smallest available font when the PDF selected does not fit within the width of the barcode Because RSS 14 is designed to be narrow it is likely that the PDF size selected will result in a smaller PDF Since OCR fonts must be printed at 10 CPI a Gothic type N might be used in its place if the PDF needs to be resized If the PDF with the smallest font does not fit within the width of a RSS 14 barcode the PDF will be the widest element of the barcode and thus the position SR SC of the barcode will be with respect to the PDF not the bars For this reason it might be more efficient to suppress the PDF and use ALPHA commands to position the PDF independently of the BARCODE command to avoid shifting the starting position of the barcode Using an ALPHA command will
448. rameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is permitted Whenever a string of 6 or more contiguous numeric digits are detected the IGP automatically inserts a Code C at the start of the numeric string and outputs numeric digit pairs packed into single bar code characters When the string is broken non numeric data or an unpaired numeric digit occurs the IGP automatically inserts a Code B and returns to normal C128B
449. rcode will encode the entire 22 segments in one row SEG parameter equivalent of 22 However the SEG parameter can be used to limit the number of segments per row 2 segments per row minimum without composites 4 minimum with composites such that the barcode will be stacked from 1 11 rows The height of each row of the symbol is 34 times the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter When stacking a row separator of 3 times the vertical element supplied is used between each set of rows Since the number of segments in the barcode might not be a multiple of the value selected all rows of the RSS Expanded barcode might not be the same width UPC A UPC E EAN 8 and EAN 13 These types UPCACOMP UPCECOMP EAN8COMP EAN13COMP combine a linear barcode of the EAN UPC symbology EAN 13 8 or with a 2D Composite Component UCC EAN 128 amp Composite Component A or B UCC EAN 128 amp Composite Component C These RSS types UCCACOMP and UCCCCOMP encode the linear barcode in UCC EAN 128 format just like RSS Expanded and are not restricted to an IA of 01 The linear barcode portion can encode up to 48 characters 253 Chapter 3 254 Bar Codes Left amp Right Guard All RSS 14 variations always starts with a left guard which is space followed by a bar It ends with a right guard which is a space followed by a bar The left amp right guards are automatically added Command Format BARCODE
450. readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the UPS 11 PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results IMPACT UPS 11 Example
451. redefining or re creating the form To use this field perform the following steps a Enter KF TWOBYTE Command Syntax Thermal b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify DBCS string location on the form The SR and SC parameters are used to specify the exact location of the DBCS data field identified by n Since the TWOBYTE command and the ALPHA command share the same set of identification numbers therefore do not set the same number for the two commands in one form 493 Appendix G 494 DIR POINT SR SC VE HE D c Setthe length of the dynamic DBCS characters in L ranging from 1 to 127 The actual number of DBCS characters supplied in the EXECUTE mode must be the same or less than this value In UTF8 mode L should be the same or more than the number of bytes supplied in EXECUTE mode d The DBCS data is not allowed to enter it can only be supplied in the EXECUTE mode Optional parameter for rotating a DBCS character string Use the following codes to indicate the direction of character rotation CW 90 degree clockwise rotation CCW 90 degree counter clockwise rotation INV Inverted characters 180 degree rotation Optional parameter that changes the units for the vertical and horizontal expansion value When the point parameter is present the VE value defines the font height in point size where 1 point is 1 72 of an inch If the HE value is non zero it defines the character
452. rement amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK data For example a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA by 1 a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2 The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA field is defined by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field the STARTDATA field cannot contain more characters than used in the STEPMASK field Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is defined by the L value in the STEPMASK field L indicates linked but non incremental data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA field any alpha character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a non incremental non linked STARTDATA subfield Alphanumerics Incremental Fields Table 5 Increment Alphanumeric STEPMASK START DATA Character Type and Function 0 9 A Z Alpha characters incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters incremented by amount in STEPMASK field Space Same character type as character in the next right adjacent linked increment position Character type will be numeric if in least significant position 0 9 4 9 0 9 Non incrementing alphanumeric character Any Linked non incrementing alphanumeric character The examples on the following pages illustrate incremental alohanumeric data fields All
453. ric text adding 395 Fixed data 32 Fixed data Alphanumeric Data 23 Flash Memory Storage 24 EMC capability 24 flash memory utilization 24 printers without EMC capability 25 printers without SD capability 25 SD capability 24 Flash Memory Utilization 24 Font command 84 Font errors 455 Font load command 87 Font menus download 430 Form Design 403 Form Layout planning 403 page layout considerations 403 Form Examples Create mode 377 Execute mode 377 Normal mode 377 Form Exercise 391 Adding fixed alphanumeric text 395 Adding horizontal and vertical lines 394 Bar Code adding 397 Creating a Box and Corners 392 Form feeds paper motion 477 Form length command 88 Form name 29 G German 1 2 5 command format 279 Grid logo 469 standard 467 GS1 Data Matrix 261 GS1 Databar 252 GS1 128 238 GuardBand BC412 Barcode 181 H Height BC412 Barcode 182 Hex Character Encoding Command 89 HIBC 271 Horizontal Line Command 394 Horizontal Line Errors 440 Horizontal line errors 440 Horizontal lines adding 394 Ignore Sequence command 89 IGP PGL Alphanumeric Data 23 configure with control panel 23 Incremental Data 23 modes of operation 16 operation 15 IGP PGL command standards 27 Character Position Dot Position CP DP format 31 command parameters 29 comments in command lines 30 form name 29 Inline commands 28 line terminator 28 numeric values 30 printable character 28 p
454. rker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information 314 SH SC D data field STOP Planet Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value within the range of the 4 inch vertical address block Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value between the 1 2 inch left and right margins of the mail piece Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The bar code data Enter 11 digits The available characters for the data field are 0 through 9 hex 30 through 39 Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result 315 Chapter 3 Codes Planet Example Figure 44 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Planet bar code generated by the following program CREATE TEST Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar code command PLANET DARK 11 15 Dark Planet bar code at SR 11 SC 15 01675433738 11 di
455. rm Design 405 Chapter 4 Form Design 406 REE 80 100 105 Figure 72 Logo Design Creating A Form And Adding Form Components Creating A Form And Adding Form Components 4 Now create the form and start adding the form components from the layout grid Refer to Figure 71 Use the Special Function Control Code and Create command to define a form named HCBOATS Use the Box command to define the outer border with a line thickness LT 3 top left corner at row SR 11 column SC 10 and bottom right corner at row EH 55 column EC 70 In the same Box command sequence define another box with a line thickness of 2 top left corner at row 28 column 14 and bottom right corner at row 44 9 column 66 After defining the boxes stop the Box command Enter Format CREATE HCBOATS cc CREATE formname FL DISK BOX BOX 3 11 10 55 70 LT SR SC ER EC 2 28 14 44 9 66 STOP STOP 5 Mr Handcraft would like corners around the slogan Use the Corner command to define a line thickness LT of 2 top left corner at row SR 48 column SC 24 and bottom right corner at row ER 52 column EC 56 Make the vertical VL corner piece 4 spaces long and the horizontal HL corner piece 5 spaces long Then stop the Corner command Enter Format CORNER CORNER 2 48 24 52 56 4 5 LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP STOP 6 To make the columns for the special order items add two vertical lines each with a lin
456. rm command is issued the printer moves from the Normal mode to the Create Form mode During this phase the user sends text images and bar code data to the IGP PGL of this data is stored in memory An END statement terminates the IGP PGL data string The printer returns to Normal mode You can create as many forms as you wish and store them on your host You can also save forms to the Onboard Flash Memory SD card if available or Extended Memory Cartridge if available All forms have filenames You may want to print the form label it and store it for future reference Or you can devise another method for easy retrieval These forms can then be downloaded from your host to the printer When you Execute a form you can print it as many times as you wish This saves you time from downloading the form each time you want to print it Printer Operating Mode What It Means Normal Mode Printer receives data and prints text graphics Create Form Mode You send IGP commands to the printer Execute Form Mode Printer prints the form designed in Create Form mode Normal Mode Printer returns to Normal mode Figure 1 IGP PGL Modes Chapter 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Modes of Operation The IGP PGL has six modes of operation that use specific command sequences to control the IGP PGL e Quiet mode all IGP PGL commands except LISTEN are ignored e Inthe Normal mode the printer waits for an SFCC in order to perform IGP
457. rmal mode Missing delimiter must be a single quotation mark When issuing an SFCC change command the new SFCC character must be contained within two single quotation marks If the new SFCC character is being identified by the ASCII value no quotation marks are required Not defined EXECUTE page number error An error was made while specifying the page number used with the form being executed This error can be generated because of incorrect format or a page number that is too large The specified page number can range from 0 through 99 999 999 Since the page number is part of the Execute command the IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode EXECUTE format or delimiter error A format or delimiter error was detected in the Execute command the IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Amissing semicolon b colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of decimal digits in the parameters e Page command misspelled when specifying the page number Insufficient memory to EXECUTE the form Insufficient memory was available to recall and execute a form The IGP PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode Not defined Miscellaneous Errors Miscellaneous Errors 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Special function must be called fr
458. rman 1 2 5 Matrix and UPCSHIP X1 196 199 182 184 2 3 1 2 5 1 261 2 814 68 6 2 6 6 6 3 X2 344 302 367 282 271 2513 251 2 71 34 4 1 3 4 4 2 493 498 550 416 2 7 1 2 1 2 5 1 2 7 1 13 4 2 8 2 3 2 9 X4 591 600 667 551 3 2 1 251 2 7 1 281 28 2 1 1 8 2 1 X1A 246 150 198 168 2 1 2 7 1 271 2214 58 8 6 8 1 X1B 147 150 165 169 2 3 1 2 71 2 1 2 2 1 18 8 8 8 6 8 1 X1C 98 100 133 135 251 2 51 251 251 127 12 5 9 4 9 4 X1D 98 100 133 133 2 1 2 1 2 81 2 71 114 5 14 2 88 8 8 98 98 100 100 2 5 1 2 6 1 271 271 127 12 5 12 12 98 101 99 101 2 5 1 2 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 112 7 14 2 13 13 X1G 48 78 66 94 3 1 1 251 2 5 1 2234 122 6 15 9 18 9 14 4 X2A 320 274 333 232 2 2 1 2 131 2 1 1 271 43 5 4 2 5 1 X2B 295 300 333 332 2 3 1 2 71 2 1 2 2 1 14 4 4 4 3 4 X2C 196 200 267 267 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 51 6 3 6 2 4 7 4 7 X2D 196 200 267 267 2 1 2 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 17 3 7 1 4 4 4 4 2 196 200 199 199 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 7 1 2 71 6 3 6 2 6 6 2 196 200 198 200 2 5 1 2 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 16 3 7 1 6 5 6 5 738 449 602 499 2 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 2 2 1 11 9 2 7 1 2 7 X3B 443 450 501 499 2 3 1 2 71 2 1 2 2 1 2 9 2 7 2 9 2 7 X3C 295 300 401 400 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 51 14 2 4 1 3 1 3 1 X3D 296 304 400 398 2 1 2 1 2 8 1 2 8 1 14 8 4 7 2 9 2 9 295 300 300 299 2 5 1 2 5 1 271 271 14 2 4 1 4 4 295 302 298 300 2 5 1 2 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 14 2 4 7 4 3 4 3 X4A 984 602 801 666 2 1 1 2 7 1 2 7 1 223 13 1 1 5 2 X4B 591 601 667 668 2 3 1 2 71 2 1 2 2 1 22 1 2 1 2 X4C 394 400 534 533 2 5
459. rom 1 through 65535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is O 373 Chapter 3 _ Incremental Bar Code Fields STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be less than or equal to the number of characters in the STEPMASK field Characters allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code refer to the individual bar code descriptions for information on valid type and quantity of data characters The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard bar code data field is enclosed within delimiters TEST 288 Enters Create Form mode VDUP 3 6 BARCODE Bar code command C3 9 H7 1 6 5 00001 12345 PDF Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command VDUP OFF END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST Prints form NORMAL T LI M LITT 12343 374 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command specifies the location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create Form Mode STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the Execute command during the Execute Form Mode As with standard dynamic data fields incremental dynamic data fields allow you
460. rom Table 14 on page 163 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 2 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 2 through 9 9 inches If any value less than 3 is selected then the PDF must be suppressed using the PDF Font parameter S The default value is 1 3 inches is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale 347 Chapter 3 Codes BFn DARK SH SC D data field 348 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following step
461. rompt 29 semicolon 27 spaces 29 Special Function Control Code SFCC 27 storing data 30 uncompressed and packed bits compression 30 uppercase 27 IGP PGL Emulation 13 error codes 439 features 14 507 IGP PGL Emulation features Automatic Increment Decrement Capability 14 Expanded and Compressed Character Print 14 Label Generation 14 Logos 14 Macros 14 On Line Form 14 Reversed Print 14 Rotated Alphanumerics 14 Selectable Bar Codes 14 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields 375 Incremental Bar Code Fields 370 Incrementing bar code data 370 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command format 373 Incremental Data 23 Incremental data fields 32 Incremental dynamic data supplying 81 Incremental fields errors 453 Incrementing bar code data 370 Inline commands 28 Intelligent Mail 4 State 273 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 Check Digit 278 Data Field 278 Quiet Zone 278 Readable Data 278 Start Stop Codes 278 International character sets 435 ITF 14 command format 279 2 5 command format 279 example 282 K KIX Format PostBar and Royal Mail KIX 329 508 L Label Generation IGP PGL Emulation features 14 Left margins setting 473 Line errors horizontal 440 vertical 441 Line feeds paper motion 477 Line Spacing command 90 Line terminator 28 Lines horizontal command 91 Lines vertical command 92 Link 94 Listen command 97 Logo creating 401
462. rpreted See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer s Reference Manual for details The IGP PGL remains quiet until the LISTEN command page 97 enables standard IGP PGL operation The Quiet command is ignored if the IGP PGL is in the Execute Form mode The Quiet command is ignored for printers that do not have the LP emulation resident 125 Chapter 2 126 Command Codes Recall Purpose Loads the user pre stored program setup file SETUP PTX from the Onboard Flash Memory into the printer This is done without sending a system reset Mode NORMAL Format cc RECALL filename cc The Special Function Control Code RECALL The Recall command enter RECALL filename The name of the file to recall This parameter is optional If not present the default file SETUP PTX is loaded Comments The file SETUP PTX is also automatically recalled into the printer upon a RESET command Repeat Purpose Used during EXECUTE mode to repeat a form a given number of times including all the dynamic data This command is ignored if the Form Count or incremental parameter is used in the EXECUTE command Mode EXECUTE Syntax cc REPEAT n REPEAT The REPEAT command Enter REPEAT n The number of times to repeat the form with the same dynamic data Comments When a REPEAT command is encountered in EXECUTE mode PGL will store the repeat count Actual printing of the form will not be initiated by the REPEAT command The form will be printed repeatedly dep
463. rror message results Code UCC EAN 128 Examples The following example generates the SSCC 18 variant of a UCC EAN 128 bar code in horizontal orientation at the default ratio and vertically at a user defined ratio of double normal size NOTE The fields of 00 are seen here separated by spaces By default the Al is separated from the rest of the data by parenthesis This is controlled by the front panel option Al 00 Spaces in the IGP menu see your User s Guide CREATE UCCTEST Horizontal bar code is dark nominal width start row 35 start column 15 Human readable field is below the bar code in OCR B font BARCODE UCC 128 DARK 35 15 0034567890123456789 PDF X STOP Vertical bar code is dark double width start row 35 start column 50 Human readable data field is above the bar code in normal 10 cpi font BARCODE UCC 128 VSCAN XR2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 H12 DARK 35 50 0034567890123456789 PDF A STOP END GS1 128 EXECUTE UCCTEST NORMAL 00 3 4567890 123456789 5 00 3 4567890 123456789 5 Figure 26 UCC EAN 128 Example 1 The program below illustrates incremental UCC EAN 128 barcodes Incremental UCC EAN 128 barcode syntax for non impact printers requires that the STARTMASK be exactly as wide as the data field CREATE UCCINC 140 BARCODE UCC 128 1 DARK 3 20 XXXXXXXXX00001 400P0119600001 PDF B STOP ALPHA DARK 1 20 0 0 PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER STOP END EXECUTE
464. rt block and byte length are used then the mem bank must be specified 2 The size of the blocks in the USR area on Gen 2 tags supporting Block Permalock are vendor defined Specifying a start block and byte length that does not conform to the selected tag type will result in a syntax error Not all Gen 2 tags support Block Permalock Attempting to Block Permalock a non supporting tag will result in an error 3 New tags such as RSI IN47 Crkscr support 240 bits of EPC memory and 512 bits of USR memory 129 Chapter 2 130 Command Codes Bit Field length DFn IDFn A line description of a bit field and must have one of the following syntax formats 1 For non incremental data both static and dynamic length DF n format D datafielda D 2 For incremental fixed data length format STEP idirstep RPTn RSTn D startdata D 3 For dynamic incremental data length IDF n format A decimal number specifying the bit length of a field within a tag The maximum length for each DFn field is 64 bits for binary or decimal format For hexadecimal format the bit length can be up to the maximum bit length specified for the corresponding memory bank Optional parameter to indicate this field has dynamic data Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 512 to identify the field number of this particular field If this option is used datafield is ignored and dynamic data must be entered via the DF comm
465. rting row SR out of bounds ERROR 39 CORNER starting row SR ending row ER STOP END From the description of the error messages and the incorrect line identified by the error message the errors are easily located and corrected Notice a colon was accidentally input in the Box command where a semicolon was required error number 24 PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 ERROR 24 BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters STOP 413 Chapter 4 Solving Program Errors In the Corner command the starting row was too large This single input error caused the vertical length of the corner to extend beyond the form boundaries error number 35 the starting row to begin outside the form boundaries error number 31 and the starting ending row parameters to be out of order error number 39 CORNER 3 300 13 57 64 5 7 ERROR 35 CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds ERROR 31 CORNER starting row SR out of bounds ERROR 39 CORNER starting row SR ending row ER STOP END 414 5 Multinational And International Character Sets Multinational Character Sets The Multinational Character Set accesses one of 32 international character sets Each character set is 96 characters long and can be accessed by configuration selection or IGP PGL command Individual characters in the font can be accessed with the use of data bit 8 There are also 32 extended character sets which are available in bitmap fonts but
466. s a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 11 digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data It will not print with the data Use the same charact
467. s command disables the overlay set 1 ALPHA 5 75 2 3 A NOTE Prints an A character U S ASCII STOP END EXECUTE Overlay 1 Setting The Expanded Font Menu Option Purpose To access Block fonts in PGL user needs to set the Expanded Font menu to Block This can be done through the front panel or by using the configuration command BLOCK FONTS Format cc CONFIG BLOCK FONTS value END cc Represents the Special Function Control Code SFCC CONFIG The configuration command BLOCK FONTS The configuration item value 0 to disable non zero to enable If an overlay set is active and the Expanded Font option is set to Block the printer first checks the overlay set The overlay characters have precedence over the base characters except for control codes and the space character If an overlay character exists for a particular cell then that character will print in place of the character in the base character set 429 Chapter 5 _ Accessing Characters and Character Sets Downloaded Font Menus The Downloaded Font menu applies to both LP Bitmaps and IGP Block downloaded characters For example performing a Delete from Flash option deletes both Bitmap and Block downloaded characters from the flash memory Refer to the User s Manual for detailed descriptions of the menus and their functions 430 Multinational Character Set Charts Multinational Character Set Charts IGP 50 MULTINATIONAL Set
468. s is ignored in IGP PGL In addition the L parameter also used in earlier IGP PGL versions to specify a long reverse field for descending characters in dynamic alphanumeric data is now provided automatically in IGP PGL The IGP PGL ignores these parameters if found in a command line E Cn AFn L The optional elongated character parameter Enter E to specify elongated character printing Elongated characters are double height and single width If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0 or an error message will result Elongated character printing is also available with rotated alphanumerics The optional horizontal compression parameter Enter n any number between 10 and 30 specifying the number of horizontal characters per inch cpi 10 cpi is the default value 10A 10 cpi OCR A 10B 10 cpi OCR B If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0 or an error message will result The optional dynamic data field parameters for identifying the alphanumeric string location on a form and for designating the length of the alphanumeric string If these parameters are used the actual text cannot be entered during the Create Form mode it must be entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Dynamically entering data during the Execute Form mode permits changes to the alphanumeric text without redefining or re creating the form To use this field perform the following steps a Enter AF 33 Chapter
469. s Manual for sending binary data Be careful when editing PCX output files because most TEXT editors insert carriage returns and line feeds If a PCX file must be edited use a binary or hex editor NOTE The LOGO line must be terminated with an LF hex or FF hex 0C and then immediately followed by the PCX raster data The IGON and IGOFF commands can be used with the PCX raster data to ignore extraneous control or ASCII characters 113 Chapter 2 114 Command Codes PNG Logo Purpose Places the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode where logos can be defined using the PNG file format Mode NORMAL CREATE Format NORMAL cc LOGO ogoname PNG TRIM ROT DISK PNG raster data RHASTEREND END Format CREATE LOGODEF ogoname PNG TRIM ROT T PNG raster data RHASTEREND STOP NOTE The logos defined in CREATE mode are independent of the forms being defined at the same time The logo can be used by other forms and must be deleted by using the RESET or DELETE LOGO command cc The Special Function Control Code LOGO The Logo command enter LOGO LOGODEF The CREATE mode LOGODEF command enter LOGODEF logoname Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the logo Refer to page 29 for a list of allowable Logo Name characters All future references to this logo Delete Logo or Logo Call commands must use this name If a logo is defined with the same name as l
470. s depends on the thermal printer being used If the value specified is less than the minimum or greater than the maximum allowed by your printer the command is ignored Comments You can use any or all Paper parameters listed in any order in a single Paper command Do not list any parameters on separate lines Parameters not specified or specified incorrectly retain the previously selected value All Paper command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a RESET command Multiple paper commands within a single form will save the ast paper command parameters specified Changing orientation between Portrait and Landscape may cause previously defined forms to produce boundary error messages when the form is executed because width and height values are switched Example Based on power up printer defaults the following command selects the inverted portrait orientation PAPER ROTATE 180 110 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 Purpose Enables or disables data bit 8 as the paper instruction signal when the IGP PGL is configured for a serial interface This command has no effect on a parallel interface Mode NORMAL Format cc PION or cc PIOFF cc The Special Function Control Code PION The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction On command enter PION When this command is sent 7 data bits are allowed data bit 8 is enabled as the paper instruction When data bit 8 is set high the
471. s fof tetas 446 Exec te Ertors ient e epulum 447 Miscellaneous 449 Bar Code 2 eea tenete e e bere ee Re ta 450 Reverse Print nnn nnne nnne 452 Miscellaneous 452 Incremental Fields 453 Miscellaneous 453 Multinational Character Set Errors 454 I OnbERTOIS ce net A ciem Uu PEE M E QULA 455 Table of Contents Bar Code Errors ii asse Ree ERES aane aga 456 Miscellaneous e 456 Macro Errors 28 enh EP 458 A Compatibility Across Models 459 459 Normal Mode 460 Create Mode Commands sss 462 Execute Mode Commands seems 463 Standard ASCII Character Set 465 Grid Programs And Samples 467 Page Bouhidarles eH 471 Paper Selection and Maximum 471 Create Form ee drea na eR gne ERR 471 Execute Form Mode 471 Setting Top Bottom 472 Setting Left
472. s in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than It is permitted to supply no data at all d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters to use during Execute Form Mode Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command or use the CP DP format Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command or use the CP DP format The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used on both ends of the data field It will not print with the data data field PDF LOC GS1 128 The bar code data The data field for UCC EAN 128 consists of an application identifier
473. s range from 0 to 100 Changing the security level can affect the amount of data in the barcode symbol hence its size This parameter is not applicable to Micro PDF417 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row
474. s selecting the host interface active emulation and printer control options are adjusted according to the printer function switch descriptions in your printer s User s Manual Configure the IGP PGL in the same way you would configure the printer for other features You can select IGP PGL default parameters directly from the control panel as explained in your User s Manual or by control codes as explained in the Commands chapter Your User s Manual also contains detailed configuration menus and diagrams as well as descriptions of each configuration parameter available with your printer 23 Chapter 1 Flash Memory Storage Flash Memory Storage 24 Flash Memory Utilization All printers have a certain amount of onboard non removable flash memory on the main controller board that can be used for permanent storage Depending on the application this Onboard Flash Memory may not be sufficient Certain models of Printronix printers can be ordered with removable flash memory cartridge called Expanded Memory Cartridge EMC while other models have an SD card slot Both the SD card and EMC can be used to extend the range of permanent data storage for applications For printers with SD capability the extended range of data storage can be significant GB Since SD EMC capable printers have two storage choices allowing the same file name to exist on both SD EMC and Onboard Flash Memory a hierarchy search order is required
475. s the default base value from which alphanumeric characters are expanded Refer to the Font command on page 84 for more information about available typefaces and styles The character height can be up to a maximum of 13 9 inches which means if a page is 13 9 inches high you can print a character that fills the entire height of the page After an Expanded Print command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified expansion until another Expanded Print command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered An Expanded Print command with VE and HE set to 0 selects standard character printing The following command results in character printing at 25 times its vertical and 40 times its horizontal size EXPAND 25 40 83 Chapter 2 84 Command Codes Font Purpose Selects typefaces other than the default Gothic font Mode NORMAL CREATE EXECUTE Format cc FONT FACE NAME 4 BOLD BLOCK 4 SLANT POINT 4 SPACE 4 ZERO WIDTH NOTE The font is activated according to the changed options upon receipt of the font command cc FONT FACE The Special Function Control Code If you are using the Font command in the CREATE mode do not enter the SFCC The Font command enter FONT Identifies the specific typeface Enter FACE a space and the 5 digit typeface number representing the selected typeface 93952 Courier New Bold 93779 Letter Gothic
476. ses denoting particular data fields such as the application identifier Special characters such as start stop subset switch modulo 103 check digit and FNC1 do not appear in the human readable data The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code It may be positioned above or below a bar code and the bar code may be horizontal vertical or inverted Modulo 103 Check Digit A modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol immediately in front of the stop code in the same manner as the Code 128 bar code The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm The modulo 103 check digit is not displayed in the readable data field Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC 18 and SCC 14 Al 00 called the Serial Shipping Container Code or SSCC 18 takes eighteen additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a modulo 10 check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes Counting the two zeros of the application identifier the modulo 10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the data field Al 01 called the Shipping Container Code or SCC 14 takes fourteen additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a modulo 10 check digit on the preceding thirteen data bytes Counting the zero and the one of the application identifier the modulo 10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the data field The modulo 10 data
477. sing the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 287 Chapter 3 Codes Matrix Example Figure 35 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Matrix bar code generated by the following program CREATE MATRIX Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command MATRIX DARK 49 27 Dark Code Matrix at SR 49 SC 27 24688642 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command MATRIX VSCAN H12 DARK 44 52 Vertical Dark Matrix H 1 2 at SR 44 SC 52 24688642 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE MATRIX 1 Execute the form form count of 1 NORMAL SC 52 1 24688642 cvo9ga9ore Figure 35 Sample Matrix Bar Codes 288 THERMAL Maxicode Maxicode The Maxicode bar code is a fixed size matrix symbology made up of an offset of rows of hexagonal elements
478. smaller value of either 1280 or the Label Length setting T5000r FEED SHIFT Adjusts the Tear off position in hundredths of an inch Enter FEED SHIFT a space and a number of 50 to 20 TAM INTENSITY Specifies the darkness of the dots Enter INTENSITY space and a number in the range of 15 through 15 This parameter varies the amount of energy sent to the printhead Actual darkness is determined by a combination of print media type ribbon type and platen pressure INVERT Set the printer to print texts in inverted image Enter INVERT v LABELS Specifies the label sensor Enter LABELS a space and 0 for no sensor 1 for mark 2 for gap 3 for advanced gap or 4 for advanced notch T5000r LABELS Specifies the label sensor Enter LABELS a space and 0 for no sensor 1 for mark 2 for gap T2N TAM LANDSCAPE Prints in landscape mode Enter LANDSCAPE v LENGTH Specifies the length of the form in tenths of an inch Enter LENGTH a space and number from 1 through 9999 v 108 Table 9 Paper Parameters Paper Paper Parameter Description Line Matrix Thermal MEDIA Specifies the type of media handling Enter MEDIA a space and either 0 for continuous mode 1 for tear off strip 2 for tear off mode 3 for peel off mode 4 for cut mode paper is cut after printing each page T5000r MEDIA Specifies
479. specify the exact location of the field identified by n c Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic bar code string The number of characters and type of characters depends on the type of bar code used Refer to the individual bar code descriptions for information on type and quantity of data allowed for the specific bar code type 375 Chapter 3 376 Incremental Bar Code Fields d Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form Mode The length of the data must be less than or equal to the value assigned to the length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data on page 80 for more information Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields Fixed and dynamic incremental bar code data fields are duplicated horizontally and vertically in the same way that incremental alphanumeric fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated Refer to Chapter 2 for more information on duplicating incremental data CREATE TEST 288 Enters Create Form mode VDUP 3 6 BARCODE Bar code command C3 9 H7 IBF1 6 6 5 PDF STOP Ends bar code command VDUP OFF END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST Prints form IBF1 4000001 123459 NORMAL mu 4 Form Examples And Exercises Form Examples NOTE To aid in maintenance of a form or logo comments can be added to many command lines wit
480. ss Volume Liters n4 n6 336 Gross Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 337 Kilograms Per Square Meter n4 n6 340 Gross Weight Pounds n4 n6 341 Length Or ist Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 342 Length Or ist Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 343 Length Or ist Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 344 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 345 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 346 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 347 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches n4 n6 Logistics 348 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 349 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 350 Area Square Inches n4 n6 351 Area Square Feet n4 n6 240 GS1 128 Table 26 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued Content Format 352 Area Square Yards n4 n6 353 Area Square Inches Logistics n4 n6 354 Area Square Feet Logistics n4 n6 355 Area Square Yards Logistics n4 n6 356 Net Weight Troy Ounce n4 n6 357 Net Volume Ounces n4 n6 360 Volume Quarts 4 361 Volume Gallons 4 362 Gross Volume Quarts 4 363 Gross Volume Gallons 4 364 Volume Cubic Inches 4
481. symbols The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 22 through Table 24 except the system SFCC Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified LOC FONT Code 128A 128B and 128C Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the c
482. t speed within the original Execute command cc NORMAL The Normal mode command If the form count parameter was not used in the Execute command enter the SFCC and NORMAL to return the IGP PGL to the Normal mode The Normal mode command is input following all other Execute commands to enter variable data Refer to the following sections Input a line terminator to leave a blank line before entering the Normal command 75 Chapter 2 Command Codes Execute Form Electronic Vertical Format Unit Purpose Provides an efficient method of automatically skipping to a specified print line during repetitive printing tasks Mode EXECUTE Format See Appendix D Comments The Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU is used as overlay data within the Execute Form mode Detailed EVFU information is provided in Appendix D The EVFU must be loaded while in the Execute Form mode and immediately following the Execute command After executing the form and returning to Normal mode the EVFU information is automatically deleted from printer memory To print the form again re send the EVFU command Several key points to operating the EVFU are listed below e Send EVFU commands immediately following the Execute command or the format form feeds e EVFU can be unloaded by issuing an END LOAD command only e number of lines slewed is dictated by the current line spacing setting e In those circumstances where the EVFU
483. t technology Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division CG Times based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Table of Contents cT 13 About this 13 Warnings and Special 13 Related Documentation 13 The IGP PGL 13 14 How the IGP PGL Operates 15 Modes of Operations siteisiin iied an ikerin 16 Alphanumeric 23 Incremental 23 Configuring The IGP PGL With The Control Panel 23 Flash Memory Storage 1 eene 24 Flash Memory Utilization 24 Printers with SD or EMC 24 Printers without SD or EMC 25 Commands st hese 27 IGP PGL Command 27 Special Function Control Code 27 Semniicolorn iit Ou e e end 27 UDpercase Ete eet et eun 27 Inline 28 Line Terminator erinnere
484. t this e 5 the problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific e Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem faxing or emailing samples may be required Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 311 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 China 86 800 999 6836 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 19 07 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4116 or 65 6548 4132 China 86 400 886 5598 India 800 102 7869 http www printronix com supplies parts aspx 499 Appendix H Corporate Offices Corporate Offices 500 Printronix Inc 15345 Barranca Parkway Irvine CA 92618 U S A Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc c o Printronix Nederland BV Bijsterhuizen 11 38 6546 AS Nijmegen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Printronix Commercial Shanghai Co Ltd 22F Eton Building East No 555 Pudong Av Shanghai City 200120 P R China Phone 86 400 886 5598 Fax 86 21 5138 0564 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com Index A Accessing characters and char
485. tal lines Mode CREATE Format HORZ LT R SC EC STOP HORZ The Horizontal Line command enter HORZ LT Defines the line thickness measured in 1 72 inch dots Enter a value of 1 or greater Horizontal line thickness expands downward from the given row R Defines the row to draw the horizontal line Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 SC Defines the starting column of the horizontal line Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 EC Defines the ending column of the horizontal line Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 STOP Stop indicates the end of the HORZ command enter STOP If not entered the IGP PGL will expect another set of Horizontal Line command parameters 91 Chapter 2 Command Codes Example The following example specifies 2 horizontal lines The first line uses the character row in the R parameter and the second line uses CP DP format To illustrate positioning the starting row and colum
486. tandard DBCS SBCS printable characters except the character used to delimit the string in the D parameter The data appears as pre positioned information on the form beginning at the location specified by SR and SC This is the fixed or static DBCS SBCS data once defined on the form it is changed only by redefining the form using the TWOBYTE command STOP Indicates the end of the TWOBYTE command Comments The DBCS TrueType font used by the TWOBYTE command is determined by the current selected font face based on the following three conditions f the selected font is found and it is a DBCS font PGL will use the selected font f the selected font is found but it is not a DBCS font PGL will automatically use the first found DBCS font in memory If PGL cannot find any DBCS font in memory the TWOBYTE command will be ignored f the selected font is not found then PGL will automatically use the first found DBCS font in memory If PGL cannot find any DBCS font in memory the TWOBYTE command will be ignored TWOBYTE Command Syntax Line Matrix Create Form TWOBYTE Command Purpose Defines and positions DBCS data on a pre printed static field or as a dynamic data field TWOBYTE D Fn Pn kFn L DIR SR SC VE D DBCS DATA D STOP TWOBYTE The DBCS characters command enter TWOBYTE R The optional reverse printing white on black parameter Enter R to specify a black ba
487. te Form Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Alphanumerics ALPHA Defines size location and content of alphanumeric 33 characters and dynamic alphanumeric data fields Alpha ALPHA Defines starting data and increment amount for fixed auto 38 Incremental increment fields Bar Codes BARCODE Each bar code type has its own command to define size Chap 3 location orientation and data as described in the Bar Codes chapter Boxes BOX Defines size location and thickness of boxes 47 Circle CIRCLE Produces a circle on the printed table 51 Corners CORNER Defines vertical and horizontal length location and 61 thickness of a set of four corners Duplication HDUP Defines the number of horizontal duplications of an element 67 Horizontal and the spacing between duplications Duplication VDUP Defines the number of vertical duplications of an element 69 Vertical and the spacing between duplications Chapter 1 ThelGP PGL Emulation Table 2 Create Form Mode Commands continued Command Mnemonic Description Page Ellipse ELLIPSE Produces an Ellipse 70 End END Terminates the Create Form mode 71 Font FONT Selects a specific typeface bold slant italic factor and 84 symbol set Form Length LFORM Specifies form length by total number of lines at 6 or 8 Ipi 88 Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP PGL to ignore all characters after the 89 On Off IGOFF Ignore Sequence On command is sent until
488. tep the number RPTn RSTn STARTDATA of character positions in the data field and provides a mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Enter the appropriate value Refer to Table 5 on page 39 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values The optional incremental repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value is repeated before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before increasing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it prints The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is O Defines the starting value of the incrementing field Enter the appropriate value Refer to Using Incremental A
489. ter BOX Boxes expand down and to the right from the given row and column Defines the line thickness measured in dots Line thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1 72 both horizontally and vertically so that line thickness is equal in both directions Enter a value of 1 or greater Defines the starting row of the box Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the box Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the ending row of the box Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the ending column of the box Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column in millimeters is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Optional parameter Defines the degree of corner rounding Accept values from 0
490. ter FNC1 immediately follows the start code The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier Al at the beginning of bar code data Each Al determines the format and length of the data which follows Refer to Table 26 for more details Each Al field in the barcode data needs to be separated with lt SO gt where SO is the default OxE Table 26 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers Application Identifier Al Content Format 00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 01 Global Trade Number 2 14 02 Item Num of Goods Within Another Unit n24n14 10 Batch or Lot Number n2 an 20 11 Production Date YYMMDD n2 n6 12 Due Date YYMMDD n2 n6 13 Packaging Date YYMMDD n2 n6 15 Sell By Date Quality YYMMDD 2 6 17 Expiration Date Safety YYMMDD n2 n6 20 Product Variant 2 2 21 Serial Number 2 20 22 Quantity Date Batch and Link n2 an 29 23 Lot Number Transitional Use n3 n 19 37 Quantity of Units Contained For Use With Al 02 Only n2 n 8 240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3 an 30 241 Customer part number n3 an 30 242 Made to Order Variation Number n3 n 6 250 Secondary Serial Number n3 an 30 251 Reference to source entity n3 an 30 253 Global Document Type Identifier GDTI
491. ter to retrieve the logo from Onboard Flash Memory Enter DISK The DISK parameter is not needed for dynamic logos GFn The Onboard Flash Memory is automatically searched when the logo name is specified in Execute Form mode To retrieve the logo from the SD card or Expanded Memory Cartridge enter EMC See Flash Memory Storage on page 24 Stop indicates the end of the LOGO command enter STOP and the IGP PGL will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP PGL will expect another set of Logo Call command parameters Example LOGO 56 35 HAND 56 50 HAND 56 65 HAND STOP SR 56 SC 35 Logo Mode Create The following sample program specifies three logo calls placing the same logo at three different locations The logo was previously defined and stored The starting row and column specify the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page SC 50 SC 65 NOTE When the logo to be executed is not found in memory the LOGO NOT FOUND error is printed Logo Mode Create Purpose Mode Places the IGP PGL in the Create Logo mode where logos can be defined using the appropriate dot placements See TIFF Logo page 151 PCX Logo page 112 and PNG Logo page 114 commands to define logos using raster data NORMAL CREATE Format NORMAL
492. tered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC ora character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data 227 Chapter 3 228 Bar Codes data field PDF LOC FONT Enter the characters of the bar code data restricted to exactly 12 digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9
493. ters 217 characters 246 characters 277 characters 310 characters 344 characters 380 characters 418 characters 457 characters 1 character 6 characters 13 characters 21 characters 30 characters 41 characters 52 characters 65 characters 78 characters 93 characters 109 characters 126 characters 145 characters 164 characters 185 characters 206 characters 229 characters 253 characters 278 characters 305 characters not supported 4 characters 9 characters 14 characters 20 characters 27 characters 34 characters 42 characters 51 characters 61 characters 72 characters 83 characters 95 characters 108 characters 121 characters 135 characters 150 characters 166 characters 183 characters 200 characters Table 33 ECC 080 Characteristics Row x Column Maximum Numeric Maximum Alphanumeric Maximum 8 Byte Data 18 X 13 15 X 15 17 X 17 19 X 19 21 21 23 23 25 25 27 27 29 29 31 31 33 X 33 35 X 35 37 X37 39 X 39 41X41 43 X 43 4 characters 13 characters 24 characters 36 characters 50 characters 65 characters 82 characters 100 characters 120 characters 141 characters 164 characters 188 characters 214 characters 242 characters 270 characters 301 characters 3 characters 9 characters 16 characters 24 characters 33 characters 43 characters 54 characters 67 characters 80 characters 94 characters 109 characters 125 characters 143 characters 16
494. ters advancing the print position refers to cursor movement down the page according to positioning commands received by the host Throughout this appendix the term advancing the print position will be used to generically refer to this concept of cursor movement vertical paper motion Paper Motion Using Line Feeds and Form Feeds The most common method of advancing the print position with IGP PGL is through the use of line feeds and form feeds A line feed moves the print position down a distance determined by the current line spacing lpi In the Normal mode a form feed character advances the print position to the top of the next page in the Execute mode a form feed advances the print position to the top of the next form Form length is determined by the CREATE command 477 Paper Motion using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing Paper Motion using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing 478 The method of moving the print position using the PI line results in vertical slews of a specified number of lines relative to the current print position rather than slewing to a specific line For this to occur the following criteria must be met 1 The PI line must be enabled and set high and 2 Data bit 5 must be 1 set When a number of blank lines will be skipped on a form called paper slewing another method of paper motion may be used The PI signal can be detected by the IGP PGL as the 8th data bit in a s
495. th x 72 dpi minus Top and Bottom Margin Values 1 maxi mum height value 2 Page Width x 60 dpi minus Left Margin Value 1 maximum width value Values exceeding maximum values will produce an error message Setting Top Bottom Margins Using dot values to identify maximum vertical print positions the page boundary parameter of an 11 inch form has 792 dot rows at n 72 inch vertical resolution 72 dpi X 11 inches See Figure 76 With no Top Bottom Margin configuration setting on an 11 inch form the first print position is Starting Row 1 Starting Column 1 A However if a Top Bottom Margin value is set at 10 then Starting Row 1 is adjusted down by 10 dot rows B and the Ending Row is adjusted up 10 dot rows C thereby reducing the maximum vertical printable area to 773 dots 793 10 10 The greater the top bottom margin setting the smaller the printable area on the form 472 Setting Left Margins NOTE The Top Bottom margins are set under the LinePrinter configuration menu if present or from the host by sending the PGL CONFIG command See the Commands chapter Maximum Character Column Maximum Horizontal Dot 51 1 Maximum Vertical Print Area 772 dots Maximum Character Row 67 Maximum Vertical Dot 793 Figure 76 Top Bottom Margin Example Setting Left Margins Using dot values to identify maximum horizontal print positions the page boundary parameter of an 8 1 2 inch wide
496. the Create Logo command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory Also note that each rotation used requires a copy of the image therefore the number of rotations used affects the printer memory available The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined logo into a form The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid Once created the logo is ready to be used in any form Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control codes This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer Consult your host s User s Manual for sending binary data Be careful when editing PNG output files because most TEXT editors insert carriage returns and line feeds If a PNG file must be edited use a binary or hex editor NOTE The LOGO line must be terminated with an LF hex or FF hex 0 and then immediately followed by the PNG raster data The IGON and IGOFF commands can be used with the PNG raster data to ignore extraneous control or ASCII characters 115 Chapter 2 Command Codes Print File Purpose Prints files from the Onboard Flash Memory Print File can be used to show the SETUP functions that exist Mode NORMAL Format cc PRINT filename cc The Special Function Control Code P
497. the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Table 18 Codabar Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 30 2D 1 31 24 2 32 3A 3 33 2F 4 34 2 5 35 2 6 36 41 7 37 42 8 38 C 43 9 39 D 44 187 Chapter 3 Codes Codabar Example CREATE TEST 288 Enter Create Form mode BARCODE Bar code command CODABAR VSCAN X1 H7 5 20 Vertical Codabar bar code MAG 1 SR 5 SC 20 A12345B Data Field PDF B N Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST NORMAL SC 20 SRS gt m A lt Code 35 The Code35 barcode is used in high speed processing and postal automation The bar structure to be composed is simple and the safety of the barcode is excellent Print speed is fast so it is suitable for high speed reader of optical character Each number in the data field contains the bar that indicates the start so self search is possible The barcode is good for the error check Command Format BARCODE
498. the number of rows the symbol will have Enter R followed by the number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in multiples of 3 Parameters Hn Wn Cn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used Micro PDF417 only allows for a certain predefined combination of Rows and Columns Therefore both R and C parameters can be specified to select a valid combination See Table 43 on page 307 for allowed combinations When these parameters are omitted the printer automatically determines the smallest possible values Optional parameter that specifies the number of columns the symbol will have Enter C followed by the number of columns in the range of 1 through 90 Parameters Hn Wn Rn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used Micro PDF417 only allows for a certain predefined combination of Rows and Columns Therefore both R and C parameters can be specified to select a valid combination See Table 43 on page 307 for allowed combinations When these parameters are omitted the printer automatically determines the smallest possible values Force Micro PDF417 to encode the data using byte compaction mode This provides the best encoding for 8 bit binary data S n BFmL DARK SH SC PDF417 Optional parameter that specifies the security level Enter S followed by the security level in the range of 0 through 8 The default is 2 If 26 is included the security level is specified as a percentage Valid value
499. the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included DARK Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at10 digits d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK
500. this barcode 189 Chapter 3 Codes Height The barcode can range from 0 3 9 9 inches tall Default is 0 3 inches PDF PDF is not included for Code 35 C35 Example CREATE TEST BARCODE C35 X1 H4 10 10 137130 STOP END EXECUTE TEST 1 Code 39 Code 39 The Code 39 structure is shown Figure 11 and described the following pages x I QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 9 0 r OPTIONAL CCW DIGIT 1 1 OPTIONAL i READABLE i FIELD 1 UPPER 1 1 LOWER LOWER GUARD 91 jt GUARD GUARD I BAND I 5a j QUIET QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT gt HEIGHT 1 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION D E mu 1 Normal LOWER GUARD BAND START DATA FIELD stop quiet CODE ZONE 1 l OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION INV 1 ZONE Loe 1 UPPER GUARD BAND _ OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE 20 1 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND Figure 11 Code 39 Structure CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER j GUARD BAND HEIGHT HEIGHT 191 Chapter 3 192 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be
501. thus 33x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter a row separator is 3x the vertical element and the bottom row is 33x the vertical element in height RSS 14 Omnidirectional is used when the available space is too narrow for RSS 14 Databar GS1 Databar RSS 14 Databar Limited The RSS14LIM is also an RSS 14 Databar barcode type but cannot be read by omnidirectional scanners and has a height that is only a fraction of what is used for the full height RSS 14 Databar symbol The symbol consists of a left guard left data character check character right data character and finally the right guard The height of the bars for the symbol is 10x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter The item number that follows the AI of 01 must be within a range of 0 to 1999999999999 RSS 14 Databar Expanded The RSS14EXP is a superset of the RSS 14 Databar barcode type because it is not restricted to just Al of 01 The RSS14EXP barcode can encode up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters including multiple concatenated Al formats The height of the bars for the symbol is 34x the vertical element supplied in the MAG parameter RSS 14 Databar Expanded Stacked RSS 14 Expanded Stacked uses the same identifier RSS14EXP in the PGL command but also uses the SEG parameter to determine the maximum number of segments to use per row RSS 14 Databar expanded is capable of encoding 22 segments of data and by default the ba
502. tion for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data For ECC 000 through ECC 140 the data allowed within the data field depends on the format ID parameter The allowed data for these ECC types are given in Table 28 For Format ID 5 which accepts control characters and Format ID 6 which accepts codes greater than 127 you can e
503. tion may follow the paper command Format cc PAPER option NOTE Not all options may be available with your printer Consult your User s Manual to determine which options are available If an option is not available the emulation will ignore the corresponding command cc The Special Function Control Code NOTE SFCC should not be used in the CREATE mode Checkmarked cells in Table 9 means full compatibility for all applicable models in the line matrix or thermal product lines If the columns are left blank the command is ignored for the given product line If individual models are listed the commands are supported only on those listed models Thermal models include 2 SL4M T4M and T5000r SL5000r T5000r In some cases specific options are required e g RFID RTC for real time clock ODV for Online Data Validation Table 9 Paper Parameters Paper 424 Line Parameter Description Matrix Thermal ABORT Stops printing all remaining pages in the engine and x TAM flushes all partial job in progress Enter ABORT T5000r Calibrates the paper allowing the printer to detect the notch gap or black stripe depending on the paper type being used Run this option every time there is a change in paper type Consult your User s T5000r Manual for more information on paper types Enter CALIBRATE Clears the validator data report which are shown on E a few menu option under VALI
504. tituted character illegal must be 1 of 16 During character substitution in the USET command the hex value for the character being replaced must be one of the specified 16 hex values Only the following hex values ca can be replaced by another hex value fa 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E 154 USET defined character illegal must be hex 20 FF During the USET command the hex value for the substituted character fa must range between hex 20 and hex FF The value given may be out of bounds 155 USET syntax error END command is expected An END command is expected when the USET character set definition is completed 156 No such CONFIGURATION option 157 Left or Top Bottom margin too large for the current page size 158 Invalid CONFIG parameter error out of range 159 Download Data into Memory Module Failed 160 FONT command FONTLOAD command or DELETE FONT command parameter error 161 Illegal FONT typeface value must be resident 162 Illegal FONT bolding factor must be ON 1 or OFF 0 163 Illegal FONT slant must be LEFT 1 OFF 0 or RIGHT 1 164 Illegal FONT point size must be 4 999 165 Illegal FONT symbol set value 166 Illegal FONT space value must be 0 1 2 or 3 167 Illegal FONT Block setting must be 0 1 2 or 3 168 169 defined 170 PAPER CASSETTE command syntax error 171 Invalid PAPER parameter error out of range 172 Illegal FONT name format too long or not foun
505. to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Australian 4 State symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as Reed Solomon parity information Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The quiet zones should be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code The start bar consists of an ascender bar and is positioned at the left most end of the bar code The stop bar consists of a full height bar and is positioned at the right most end of the bar code adjacent to the check digit Data Field Australian 4 State bar codes use four types of bars to encode its data Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker Each Full Height bar is 0 198 inch x 0 030 inch The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62 5 of the Full Height bar in length while the Tracker bar is about 25 of the Full Height bar Each bar width is equal
506. ts Incrementing Bar Code Data Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA command parameters as described in Table 49 The parameters are part of the bar code command or part of the Execute command when using the Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data command The STEPMASK parameter performs three functions 1 It defines the increment amount step 2 It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field STARTDATA and 3 It provides a mask to link or unlink subfields of data for individual incremental activity The data provided in the STEPMASK field combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of these functions Table 49 Incremental Bar Code Data STEPMASK STARTDATA Character Type and Function 0 9 A Z Alpha characters are incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters are incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 370 Incrementing Bar Code Data Table 49 Incremental Bar Code Data STEPMASK STARTDATA Character Type and Function 0 9 Space Same character type as character in the next right adjacent linked increment position Character type is numeric if in the least significant position 0 9 Not A Z or Error 0 9 Not 0 9 or L Any Non incrementing alphanumeric character L Any Linked non incrementing alphanumeric character The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEP
507. ts printed character density as shown in Table 14 on page 163 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 159 You must specify 8 digits for for variable ratio NOTE There are eight values that comprise the dot ratio narrow bar narrow space 2x narrow bar 2x narrow space 3x narrow bar 3x narrow space 4x narrow bar and 4x narrow space User defined ratios for this barcode should have these eight values defined in the order specified Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 2 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 2 through 9 9 inches If any value less than 3 is selected then the PDF must be suppressed using the PDF Font parameter S The default value is 1 3 inches is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale 220 DARK SH SC D data field EAN 8 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field
508. uage Use this manual in conjunction with your printer s User s Manual for complete printer IGP PGL compatibility Warnings and Special Information Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings Always read and comply with this information The heading reveals the nature of the information WARNING WARNING tells you of conditions that could cause you physical harm CAUTION CAUTION tells you of conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment IMPORTANT IMPORTANT gives you information vital to proper IGP PGL operation NOTE Provides information affecting IGP PGL operation considered important enough to emphasize Related Documentation For RFID commands refer to the RFID Labeling Reference Manual The IGP PGL Emulation IGP PGL is the Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the Printronix Graphics Language which is designed for Printronix printers The IGP PGL provides on line forms bar codes and many alphanumeric text generation capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions of Printronix IGP protocol and programming IGP PGL graphics processing features are detailed below Chapter 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application IGP PGL programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time
509. ult value is 1 3 inches is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale 233 Chapter 3 Codes BFn DARK SH SC D data field 234 Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 0 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used Refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width
510. umber ranging from 0 to 512 to identify the barcode field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the barcode field identified by n c Replace L with a number equal to the total number of characters in the field The data field must be numeric and contain exactly 20 25 29 or 31 digits An empty field is also allowed d The information for Data Field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 78 Do not use Data Field to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used Refer to the Data Field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes This has no affect on horizontally oriented barcodes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 63 for more information Defines the starting row for the barcode Enter a value within the range of the 4 inch vertical address block Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Defines the starting column of the barcode Enter a value between the 1 2 inch left and right margins of the mail piece Character column or dot column is specified based on the SCALE command page 144 or use the CP DP format page 31 Intelligent 4 State Barcode D Data Field D Delimiters D can be any character not present in the data field The leading delimiter must be identical to the trailing delimiter
511. umbers to each dynamic data field If unique identifying numbers were not required these alphanumeric commands would be added to the existing alphanumeric commands being duplicated to produce the fixed form alphanumeric data NOTE Before the following dynamic data commands can be entered delete the form count parameter from the existing Execute command line the 1 at the end of the Execute command line shown on the program on page 382 The Form Count parameter cannot be used when data is supplied dynamically The Execute command line should now read EXECUTE SAMPLE and must be correctly terminated This is the Execute command for the first page of dynamic data ALPHA Begin alpha command for dynamic data AF1 20 10 8 12 0 0 AF1 1st line of upper left TO area AF2 20 11 8 12 0 0 AF2 2nd line of upper left TO area AF3 20 12 8 12 0 0 AF3 3rd line of upper left TO area AF4 20 10 8 49 0 0 AF4 1st line of lower left TO area AF5 20 11 8 49 0 0 AF5 2nd line of lower left TO area AF6 20 12 8 49 0 0 AF6 3rd line of lower left TO area STOP Stop the alphanumerics command Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data Enter the following dynamic data following the Execute command These dynamic data commands will supply the variable data to the bar code and alphanumeric fields previously identified in the Create Form mode After entering the data exit the file if necessary with your system and print The completed form is shown in F
512. urrent font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes the PDF to print above the horizontal barcode start row or vertical barcode start column a barcode font Error will occur If the width parameter w causes the PDF to exceed the barcode width the PDF width factor w will automatically reduce to fit within the barcode width without causing an error MAX STOP Optional parameter to specify the maximum number of data printed in the PDF If all data should be printed do not use this parameter Valid values are from 1 through 128 For example if the barcode data is 12345 and a MAX value of 3 is specified the PDF would print 123 Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 211 Chapter 3 Codes Table 22 Code 128A Character Set Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex NUL 00 SUB 1A 34 4E SOH 01 ESC 1B 35 4F STX 02 FS 1C 36 50 ETX 03 GS 1D 37 51 EOT 04 RS 1E 38 52 ENQ 05 US 1F 39 53 ACK 06 20 3A 54 BEL 07 21 55 BS 08 22 3C 56 HT 09 3D 57 LF 0A 3E 58 VT 0B 3F 59 FF 0 40 5A CR oD 41 5B SO 0E 42 5C SI 43 50 DLE 10 44 5E 11 45 5F 12 46 FNC 3 See NOTE 13 47 FNC 2 See NOTE 14 48 SHIFT See NOTE 15 49 CODEC See NOTE 16 4A FUNC
513. ver the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Codabar Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi To select a scalable font with user defined size enter Nh w or F Nh w The parameters h height and w width can each range from 1 to 96 and are expansion factors of a 10 cpi character Nh w prints in Letter Gothic font 93779 regardless of the current active font By default F Nh w uses the Letter Gothic as the current font selection You can change the default by using the FONT command NOTE Nh w and F Nh w will not print the PDF wider or taller than the barcode If the height parameter h causes
514. w form Use the Create command and PRACTICE as the form name Enter Format CREATE PRACTICE cc CREATE formname FL DISK The IGP PGL is now ready for Create Form mode commands Design a box with a line thickness LT of 2 dots a top left corner at starting row SR 35 starting column SC 16 and a bottom right corner at ending row 53 ending column EC 61 The STOP command must be entered to inform the IGP PGL that the Box command is complete Enter Format BOX BOX 2 35 16 53 61 LT SR SC ER EC STOP STOP Use the Corner command to set the box off with corners having a line thickness L7 of 3 dots a top left corner at row SR 30 column SC 13 a bottom right corner at row ER 57 column EC 64 a vertical length VL 5 character spaces long and a horizontal length HL 7 character spaces long The STOP command must be entered to stop the Corner command and END must be entered to terminate the Create Form mode to prepare for printing Enter Format CORNER CORNER 3 30 13 57 64 5 7 LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP STOP END END Now use the Execute command and form name to prepare for printing Enter a blank line using a terminator and then the Normal command to instruct the IGP PGL to return to the Normal mode after executing the form Enter Format EXECUTE PRACTICE cc EXECUTE formname PAGE n FC NORMAL cc NORMAL To print the form exit the file if necessary for your system and use the system print c
515. wide left quiet zone you are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed within the quotes at the end of the bar code data and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbo
516. width in 1 72 of an inch otherwise the character width is the same as the height Cannot be used with elongated E and compressed Cn parameters Defines the starting row of the DBCS character data field 1 lt SR lt Form Length Defines the starting column of the DBCS character data field 1 lt SC lt Form Width Defines the vertical expansion factor to enlarge DBCS characters vertically The factor must ensure that the characters after expansion do not exceed the form boundary limit The largest value is 63 0 and 1 specifies the stand font no expansion Elongated E characters cannot be used with a vertical expansion factor other than 0 Defines the horizontal expansion factor to enlarge DBCS characters horizontally The factor must ensure that the characters after expansion do not exceed the form boundary limit The largest value is 63 0 and 1 specifies the stand font no expansion Elongated E characters cannot be used with a horizontal expansion factor other than 0 The printable character identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric string Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the alphanumeric string itself You must use the same character at both ends of the alphanumeric string but it will not print with the data TWOBYTE Command Syntax Line Matrix DBCS SBCS TEXT The group of DBCS SBCS characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the s
517. wing commands will enable the snooper for all ports You can also enable preparser by using the front panel Send the following command to the printer before sending the job CONFIG SNOOP CANCEL PAR END CONFIG SNOOP CANCEL ETH END CONFIG SNOOP CANCEL SER END The CANCEL command works if it is received from any port PAR ETH and SER are listed as compatible with old PGL commands To disable a snooper send the following command to the printer before sending the job CONFIG SNOOP OFF END 2 After the snooper is enabled the cancel command can be sent to the printer during the print job through any port Example The following example shows the format of cancel command CANCEL Circle Circle Purpose Produces a circle on the printed table Mode CREATE Syntax CIRCLE LT SR SC DA STOP CIRCLE The Circle command LT Defines the border thickness measured in vertical IGP dots 1 72 inch increments SR Defines the starting row of the circle CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE command SC Defines the starting column of the circle CP DP format dot rows or direct measurement in millimeters based on the SCALE command DA Defines circle diameter measured in vertical IGP dots Circle diameter is based on dot dimensions of 1 72 inch both horizontally and vertically The circle diameter is equal in both directions Enter a value greater than the border thickness
518. with PC field NORMAL CREATE TEST1 432 RFWTAG 16 PC 16 H 3000 STOP RFWTAG 96 EPC 96 H 313233343536373839414243 STOP RFWTAG 256 USR 256 H 3132333435363738394142434445464748494A4B STOP RFRTAG 16 PC 16 DF1 H STOP RFRTAG 96 EPC 96 DF2 H STOP VERIFY DF1 H DFl VERIFY DF2 H DF2 END EXECUTE TEST1 NORMAL r n r n I I RFID PGL Commands Example 9 This example shows the usage of PERMALOCK NORMAL CREATE RFID 432 ALPHA IAF1 24 POINT 4 5 10 10 STOP RFWTAG 32 32 STOP RFWTAG PERMALOCKABC H 96 96 IDF1 H STOP RFRTAG 96 EPC 96 DF2 H STOP VERIFY DF2 H END EXECUTE RFID ICNT5 IDF1 STEP 1 222222222222222222220011 IAF1 lt DF2 gt NORMAL Example 11 This example shows the writing of 112 bits of EPC at start block 2 CREATE X H NOMOTION 128 EPC 2 16 128 H 305A4C41383434303030303130363738 STOP END EXECUTE X NORMAL 139 Chapter 2 140 Command Codes Example 12 This example shows writing and Block Permalocking 128 bits of USR beginning at start block 2 The size of the blocks in Gen 2 tags supporting Block Permalock are vendor defined This example assumes a tag embedded with a Monza 4QT chip The USR area of this chip is divided into 4 blocks of 128 bits total 512 bits of USR memory In this example after the Block Permalock completes block 2 of the USR
519. word for PERMALOCK you need to write RFWTAG the new content password to ACS first and then use this new password to PERMALOCK EPC For LOCK ex EPC the password may be different from the current content of ACS When a new password is used to lock EPC where ACS is not locked this new password is written to ACS and locks ACS at the same time while locking EPC For new tags where ACS is not locked and has all null data you can lock EPC with a new password directly without writing to ACS first For BLOCKPERMALOCK USR only the passcode is one previously written to the ACS Only the USR blocks specifically block permalocked based on the start block and byte length fields will be permanently locked Other blocks in the USR memory area can still be written to Example 1 The following example programs an SGTIN 64 value into the RFID tag that is embedded in a 4x6 smart label Assume that the SGTIN 64 value is provided as a single number CREATE SGTIN 64 432 RFWTAG 64 64 H 87D0034567ABCDEF EPC number STOP END EXECUTE SGTIN 64 1 NORMAL 133 Command Codes Chapter 2 Example 2 Same as Example 1 except the EPC number is broken into its component parts Assume that the SGTIN 64 value has the Header 2d Filter Value 5d EPC Manager Index 15383d Object Class 7037104 or OxABCDE and the Serial Number 012345694 CREATE SGTIN 64 432 RFWTAG 64 2 B 10 3 D 5 14 D 15383 20 H ABCD
520. ximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be equal to or less than the number of characters in the STEPMASK field If the number of data characters in dynamic alphanumeric data commands only is less than the number used in STEPMASK the data will print right justified with preceding spaces Leading spaces are not provided for bar code data For dynamic bar code data the type of characters allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code Refer to the individual bar code descriptions in the Bar Codes chapter for information on valid type and quantity of data characters The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard data field is enclosed within delimiters Execute Form Overlay Data Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered onto a predefined form The form is completed by positioning the data in the exact location it will appear on the form when printed The data is placed horizontally using tabs and spaces and vertically using line feeds form feeds and the EVFU For example if the serial number field on the form begins at character row 22 and column 14 enter 22 line feeds space over 14 columns and input serial number overlay data An entire form can be completed with a page of overlay data in this manner Overlay data at the end of a form is printed on a new form until all overlay data is used Then to advance to the next form use a form feed The I
521. xisting in memory the newly created form will replace the existing form All future reference to the form editing executing or deleting the form from the directory must be made using the assigned name FL The optional forms length parameter to specify the length of the form in IGP dot rows Form length cannot exceed the physical length of the page Refer to Appendix C Specify the form length in one of four ways a Enter 0 to define a form of unspecified length The form ends after the longest element specified in CREATE mode b Enter a value for the form length ranging from 1 through 65535 to specify the forms length in IGP dot rows c Donot specify this parameter A default of 792 IGP dots 11 inches is then selected 61 Chapter 2 62 Command Codes d Enter X to define the form length of undetermined length Upon EXECUTE mode the form s length is determined by the physical page length setting which depends on the paper orientation NOMOTION The optional parameter that tells the printer not to move the paper after execution of the form if the form does not print anything on the paper If the form has commands such as Alpha or Barcode commands that require printing this parameter will have no effect and the paper will always move By default PGL will always move the paper with or without the print graphic command NOTE NOMOTION is primarily used in RFID applications to program RFID tags DISK Opt
522. yout described in Table 45 NOTE Other than the data type and length the printer does not verify the contents of the optional fields 309 Chapter 3 Codes Table 45 Optional Macro PDF417 Fields Data Field Field Description Type Length 19231000 File Variable 9231001 Segment Count Numeric 5 00001 99999 NOTE If this field is used it must be present in all segments 19231002 Time Stamp Numeric 11 Time in seconds since January 1 1970 00 00 GMT 9232003 Text Variable 9231004 Addressee Text Variable 9231005 File Size Numeric Variable 9231006 Checksum Numeric 5 16 bit CRC checksum over the entire source file This checksum value must be a decimal value from 0 through 65 535 310 Planet Planet The Planet bar code was introduced by the U S Postal Service under the product name Confirm Planet is a 12 digit bar code used to track mail electronically both inbound and outbound Under the Confirm process the first two digits of the Planet data field defines the service expected The next nine digits are customer information and the last digit is the check digit The Planet bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 42 and Figure 43 and described on the following pages The Planet code can be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4 inch area across the length of the mail piece R
523. ypical examples of alphanumeric data that can be fixed onto the form e Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data positioned on the page with line feeds and spaces to fit into exact locations For example specific data can be overlayed onto a blank form as if you were typing data into the appropriate blanks on a preprinted form Customer names addresses and order numbers are examples of data overlayed onto a form e Dynamic data is variable data entered into specific locations on each form Each time the form prints a command enters new data in those locations Customer names addresses or any type of variable alphanumeric or bar code data can be provided dynamically Incremental Data The incremental data feature allows you to update alphanumeric and bar code data fields in an alphabetical or numeric manner automatically with just one set of data sent from the host computer Alphanumeric and bar code incremental fields can be used with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form mode The incremental fields can be increased or decreased repeated at specified intervals before updating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of increments Configuring The IGP PGL With The Control Panel Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is known as printer configuration The settings or configuration parameters such a

IGP®/PGL® Emulation for T2N™ Printronix Graphics Language

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

IGP&reg;/PGL&reg; Emulation for T2N&trade; Printronix Graphics Language

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

IGP®/PGL® Emulation for T2N™ Printronix Graphics Language